JP2015213582A - Rotary drum type game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of initiatively controlling the occurrence of a freeze state on a game machine side.SOLUTION: A rotary drum type game machine is provided with a push order regulation freeze trigger combination capable of deriving different game results in accordance with push orders. In the case where the push order is a first one, a freeze is executed. In the case where the push order is a second one different from the first one, the freeze is not executed. In the case where the push order regulation freeze trigger combination is won, either the push order to cause the freeze or the push order not to cause the freeze is assist-notified on the basis of a predetermined notification condition.

Description

  The present invention relates to a rotating game machine capable of generating a freeze effect.

  In general, in a spinning-type gaming machine, a player performs a lottery (internal lottery) for a combination in response to the start operation of the start lever, and rotates a plurality of spinning cylinders with various symbols to play a game. Start, and when the stop button is stopped by the player, the spinning cylinder is stopped and the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal lottery is derived and displayed as a game result, and a winning is generated according to the game result. Let the game finish.

  In this type of spinning machine, a freezing lottery is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery, and when this is won, in each winning game, for example, each spinning device of the spinning device is continued for a certain period of time. An effect that uses the freeze state, such as controlling the freeze state to be placed in a non-rotating state, causing a predetermined effect to appear by a liquid crystal display device or sound effect, and notifying the player of the internal lottery result information ( There is known one that executes a “freezing effect” (for example, see Patent Document 1 below).

JP 2009-285173 A

  In recent years, for example, a game property in which a predetermined winning state resulting from an internal lottery result is temporarily set to a stock state, and after a certain number of games are digested, the game state is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the winning state. Rotating amusement machines with a practical use have been put into practical use. As described above, since the game that will be executed in the future than the game for which the winning state is determined is shifted to the advantageous gaming state, an effect that has an impact will be displayed when the transition game arrives. It can be said that it is desirable to improve the fun of the game.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the occurrence of the freeze state depends exclusively on the internal lottery result, the occurrence of the freeze state has become a coincidence product. For this reason, it is not possible to control the timing of occurrence of the freeze state on the gaming machine side. For example, the freeze state is used at a timing when it is desired to notify the game information such as the above-mentioned winning state and the expected degree of winning in the future. There was a problem that it was not possible to make a notification from a production with an impact.

  In view of the above problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming machine side can control the generation of a freeze state.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means.
(1) a game result display means for deriving and displaying a game result by a combination of symbols when a plurality of types of symbols are displayed;
Starting means for rotating each cylinder under predetermined game start conditions;
In response to the starting operation of the starting means, a lottery for a plurality of types of roles is performed, and a winning lottery means for determining a winning combination;
A plurality of stop means provided corresponding to each of the spinning cylinders for individually stopping the rotation of the spinning cylinders;
With the stop operation of the stop means, stop control means for controlling the stop of the spinning cylinder so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be derived and displayed as the game result;
A delay state control means for executing and controlling a delay state for delaying the game progress from the normal game progress based on a predetermined execution condition;
Production means for performing production related to the game,
Production control means for the production means;
With
A revolving type gaming machine configured to be able to give a player a game value according to the game result,
In the role to be a lottery target of the role lottery means,
When the pressing order for operating the plurality of stop means is a predetermined procedure by the stop control means, a first combination of symbols accompanied by the provision of a first predetermined amount of game media is derived and displayed as the game result. On the other hand, when the pressing order is a procedure different from the predetermined procedure, the combination of the second symbols accompanied by the provision of the second predetermined amount of game media can be derived and displayed as the game result. Includes a set push order ruler,
The production control means includes
Assist notification for performing execution control on the effect means for notifying information relating to the pressing order corresponding to the winning combination based on the determination that the pressing order determining combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination lottery unit With control means,
The delay state control means includes
In the case where the pushing order prescribed combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination lottery means, the delay state is executed in the case of the predetermined procedure, while the procedure is different from the predetermined procedure. Do not execute the delay state;
This is a spinning machine.

(2) The first symbol combination and the second symbol combination are composed of the same symbol combination;
The first predetermined amount and the second predetermined amount are the same.
The above described spinning machine according to (1) above.

(3) The second predetermined amount is less than the first predetermined amount.
The above described spinning machine according to (1) above. The combination of the first symbol and the combination of the second symbol can be composed of the same symbol combination.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming machine side can control the generation of the freeze state.

It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance of the rotary type game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a symbol arrangement | sequence band. It is a figure which shows a winning line. It is the control block diagram which showed the outline | summary of the structure of the control apparatus of a rotating type game machine. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a main control board and an effect control board shown in FIG. 4. It is a game flow figure which shows the game form of the rotary type game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a game flow figure which shows the game form of the rotary type game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which the main control part side performs according to a game operation control program. It is a flowchart which shows the reel production | presentation lottery process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation rotation start setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the rotating cylinder stop process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific combination freezing effect management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze production | presentation process before all the cylinder stop in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze production | presentation process after all the cylinder stops in FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an operation effect process during a rear freeze effect in FIG. 13. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which the main control part side performs according to a game operation control program. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control side main process which an effect control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which an effect control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which an effect control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation management process which is one of the received command analysis processes in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the penalty monitoring process which is one of the received command analysis processes in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze command receiving process which is one of the received command analysis processes in FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a frozen operation command reception process which is one of the received command analysis processes in FIG. 18. FIG. It is a figure which shows a role lottery table. It is a figure which shows the first half of the winning combination and its content list corresponding to a winning combination. It is a figure which shows the second half of the winning list corresponding to the winning combination and its contents list. It is a figure which shows a normal freeze production lottery table. It is a figure which shows an AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery) table during RT0 game. It is a figure which shows this ART start game number addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during this ART game. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in an addition specialization zone. It is a figure which shows the AT lottery table for RT0 game promotion chance zone transfer lottery tables and the RT0 game promotion chance zone zone. It is a figure which shows the assistance alert | report lottery table for freeze production at the time of normal special AT winning. It is a figure which shows the assist notification lottery table for freeze production at the time of special AT winning during preparation ART. It is a figure which shows the assistance alert | lottery lottery table for freeze production at the time of this ART and specialization during normal special AT winning. It is a figure which shows the assist notification lottery table for freeze production at the time of replay B winning during preparation ART. It is a figure which shows the assist notification lottery table for freeze production at the time of specialization AT and replay B winning. It is a figure which shows the freeze effect selection table for special AT during RT0 game. It is a figure which shows the freeze effect selection table for special AT during RT1 game. It is a figure which shows the freeze effect selection table for special AT during RT2 game. It is a figure which shows the freeze production selection table for Replay B in RT1 game. It is a figure which shows the freeze production selection table for AT and replay B during RT2 game. It is the list which arranged the contents of production, dividing a freeze production type into freeze generation time (trigger divisions α-δ). It is the figure which listed the correspondence with the kind of freeze production (freeze A1-E3), its contents, and freeze production flag classification (01H-15H). It is the figure which listed the correspondence of the type (freeze F1-F5, F7-F9, freeze G1-G2), the content, and the freeze production flag classification (16H-20H) of freeze production. It is the figure which listed the kind of operation command and the information etc. which are included in the command. 7 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation in the case of freeze B4 as specific example 1. FIG. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of operation in the case of freeze B4 as specific example 2. FIG.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Mechanical configuration: Fig. 1>
As a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, a rotary gaming machine will be described as an example. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an external appearance of a swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming machine housing 1 for housing various gaming parts used for gaming, and a front side of the gaming machine housing 1. And a front door 2 attached to be freely opened and closed.

  The front door 2 is provided with a first display window 3 substantially in the center and a second display window 4 on the upper side thereof.

  The first display window 3 on the lower side is a rotator visual recognition unit, and the rotator 5a, 5b, and 5c (hereinafter referred to as “the rotator 5a” is arranged on the side of the rotator device 210 and three in a row. The left spinning cylinder 5a ”, the spinning cylinder 5b are referred to as“ middle spinning cylinder 5b ”, and the spinning cylinder 5c is referred to as“ right spinning cylinder 5c ”). It is provided as follows.

  In the present embodiment, about 3 symbols (about 9 in total) can be visually recognized through the rotating cylinder visual recognition unit 3. In each of the spinning cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c, there is formed a pattern irradiation backlight LED (backlight means: not shown) that irradiates each symbol displayed on the spinning cylinder visual recognition unit 3 from the inside of the spinning cylinder. . This design illumination backlight LED functions not only to make it easy for the player to visually recognize each symbol displayed on the rotating cylinder visual recognition unit 3, but also as an effect means for producing an effect related to the game. Depending on the type of color and the light emission mode (flashing, lighting, extinguishing, etc.), the light effect by the decoration of light is exhibited.

<Pattern Arrangement Band 200: FIG. 2>
FIG. 2 shows an example of the symbol arrangement band 200 included in each of the drums 5a, 5b, and 5c. The “1ST” symbol arrangement band shown in the figure corresponds to the left rotating cylinder 5a, the “2ND” symbol arrangement band corresponds to the middle rotating cylinder 5b, and the “3RD” symbol arrangement band corresponds to the right rotating cylinder 5c.

  In the symbol arrangement band 200, symbols (component element symbols) for configuring symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination (winning winning combination) by the internal lottery are displayed. As shown in the figure, there are a total of 10 types of symbols of this embodiment: red 7 symbol, white 7 symbol, BAR symbol, replay symbol, bell symbol, watermelon symbol, plum symbol, cherry symbol, blank 1 and blank 2. A pattern is provided. These symbols are arranged in a total of 21 frames in the rotation direction of the rotating drum, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 are assigned along the symbol arrangement order.

  Each of the spinning cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c is rotationally driven by the spinning cylinder drive motors 211a, 211b, and 211c (see FIG. 4), each of which is a pulse motor, whereby the symbols are displayed in a variable display and a stop display. Yes. Each spinning cylinder is not limited to a mechanical spinning cylinder that is rotated and stopped using an electric drive source such as a spinning cylinder drive motor, and is displayed on an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device 6 described later. It may be a dramatic rotator that is rotated or stopped on the image. Further, the number of rotating drums is not limited to three, and the number can be appropriately changed as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved.

  A plurality of winning lines 3 a are provided in the rotating cylinder visual recognition unit 3. As shown in FIG. 3, the winning line 3a includes two winning lines (an upper horizontal line, an intermediate stage) that horizontally traverse the upper stage (upper stage in the frame) and the middle stage (middle stage in the frame) of the rotating cylinder visual recognition unit 3. Horizontal line) and two winning lines (right down line and left down line) crossing the rotating cylinder visual recognition section 3 diagonally. As long as the winning line 3a can achieve the object of the present invention, the number and form of the winning line 3a are not particularly limited, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol arrangement configuration, symbol type, and combination in the symbol array band 200 It can be changed as appropriate according to the relationship such as the (combination structure) and the stop control mode (retraction control described later).

  In these winning lines, the number of lines treated as valid varies depending on the number of bets (the number of bets) for a unit game (one game). On the winning line (hereinafter referred to as “effective winning line”) that has been validated, the combination of the symbols that stop when each of the spinning cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c is stopped becomes the symbol combination that corresponds to the winning combination. In this case, a game value corresponding to the combination of symbols is given to the player. For example, when a winning combination with a game medal payout is won and the corresponding symbol combination is stopped on the effective pay line (the symbol combination that is determined in advance as a combination necessary for acquiring the gaming value) Is displayed as a game result), the hopper unit 500 (medal paying device: see FIG. 4) in the gaming machine housing 1 operates, and a predetermined number of game medals are paid out as a payout. Yes. This game medal is necessary when the player executes the game, and can be said to have game value.

  Further, the second display window 4 provided on the upper side of the first display window 3 (rotor visual recognition part 3) is a liquid crystal screen visual recognition part, and a liquid crystal display as an image display device mounted on the back side of the front door 2 is provided. Corresponding to the display screen (liquid crystal screen) 6a of the device 6 (LCD unit), for example, it is formed in a rectangular shape that is slightly smaller than the swivel viewing portion 3. The liquid crystal screen 6a faces the liquid crystal screen visual recognition part 4 and is provided so that it can be viewed from the player side. The liquid crystal display device 6 (liquid crystal screen 6a) displays an effect related to the game as an image.

  In addition, on both the left and right sides of the spinning cylinder visual recognition unit 3, there are provided decorative lamp units 13 for producing effects related to the game by decorating light. The decoration lamp unit 13 includes an LED (light emitting means) and exhibits a light effect by decoration of light depending on the type of light emission color and the light emission mode (blinking, lighting, extinguishing, etc.).

  In addition, a medal insertion slot 7 for inserting a game medal as a game medium and a storage device (credit means: a game medal inserted into a gaming machine or a prize are obtained at a step below the rotating cylinder visual recognition unit 3. Within the range credited by the functional unit (main control unit 400 (see FIG. 3) takes charge of the functional unit) that stores the game medals that can be stored and can store the number of stored medals (number of credits) by an electromagnetic method In this case, the upper limit of the bet number allowed for one game (the number of game medals that can be inserted for one game) (maximum bet number: in this embodiment, three game medals are the maximum bet number). MAX bet button 8 that can pseudo-inject gaming medals at once, 1-bet button 9 that can pseudo-inject gaming medals up to the upper limit of the betting number according to the number of times pressed, for credit settlement It is provided such as a credit settlement button 10. Further, a MAX bet LED 84 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the operation of the MAX bet button 8 is in an allowable state is built in the MAX bet button 8.

  In addition, an operation panel unit 14 formed in a horizontally long shape is provided below the stepped portion of the rotating cylinder visual recognition unit 3. The operation panel unit 14 includes a return button 15 for returning medals filled in the medal insertion slot 7, a rotation rotation start lever 11 for starting rotation of the rotation cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c, and each rotation cylinder 5a. Three rotating cylinder rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, 12c (left rotating cylinder stop button 12a, intermediate rotating cylinder stop button 12b, right rotating cylinder stop button 12c) for individually stopping the rotation of 5b, 5c are provided. It has been. In the present specification, unless specifically required, these spinning cylinder rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, and 12c are referred to as “rotating cylinder rotation stop buttons 12”.

  It should be noted that the MAX bet button 8, the 1 bet button 9, the credit settlement button 10, the spinning cylinder rotation start lever 11, and the spinning cylinder rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, and 12c are each detected as an operation. Switches for generating information (detection signals) (MAX bet switch 8a, 1 bet switch 9a, credit settlement switch 10a, spinning cylinder rotation start switch 11a, and spinning cylinder rotation stop switches 12a ′, 12b ′, 12c ′: see FIG. 4) Is provided.

  Further, at the position corresponding to the medal slot 7 on the back side of the front door 2, it is selected whether or not the game medal inserted into the medal slot 7 is legitimate, and the legitimate game medal is placed on the hopper unit 500 side. A guiding medal selector (not shown) is provided. This medal selector is provided with a medal detection sensor 7a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the inserted game medal, and the inserted game medal is placed in the hopper unit 500 (see FIG. 4) inside the gaming machine. A passage switching mechanism is provided by a blocker solenoid 7c (see FIG. 4) configured to be switchable between a medal receiving passage side for receiving and a medal return passage side for guiding to the medal tray 18 side.

  Below the operation panel 14, a decorative panel 17 is provided with colors and patterns for appealing the appeal of the gaming machine. Below the decorative panel 17 is integrated with the front door 2. An attached horizontally long medal tray 18 is provided. The medal tray 18 has a medal payout opening 19 for discharging the game medals paid out from the hopper unit 500 (see FIG. 4) and the returned game medals to the front side.

  Speakers 16 are provided on both sides of the front door upper part and the front door lower part of the front door 2 to output music and sound effects and exhibit a sound effect related to the game.

  Although not shown, a position that is easy for the player to visually recognize (for example, a position in the vicinity of the spinning cylinder visual recognition section 3 (for example, a rectangular area indicated by reference numeral 13) or a predetermined image display on the liquid crystal display device 6 Display areas) or at appropriate positions of the gaming machine 1 are provided with various display units that can notify the current game progress / game situation.

  Specifically, (A) “credit number display section (credit number display 86)” for displaying the number of credits, (B) “payout number display section for informing the number of game medals to be paid out according to the game result ( “Payout number display 87”, (C) “game start display section (game start) for notifying whether or not the operation of the rotation start lever 11 is valid (game start ready state (rotation start ready state))” "Display LED 81)", (D) "Medal insertion display section (medal insertion display LED 82)" for notifying whether or not the insertion of a game medal is acceptable, and (E) whether or not the re-game is in operation. Various information such as “re-game operation display section (re-game operation LED 83)” to be notified and (F) “insert number display section (insert number display LED 85)” to display the number of inserted game medals (current bet number). A display is provided There.

  These display units are displayed and controlled by a main control unit (main control board) 400 (see FIG. 4). For example, the credit number display unit and the payout number display unit are displayed on the current credit number information and game results by a 7-segment display. The game start display unit, medal insertion display unit, re-game operation display unit, inserted number display unit, and the like are configured to emit light from their built-in LEDs (off / lighting (flashing). ), The light emission color, etc.), so that the game situation can be notified.

  Here, the production means in the present invention may be any means that can exhibit production effects by stimulating the human senses such as vision, hearing, and touch, and light generation means such as a decorative lamp unit 13 and LEDs, Representative examples are an effect display means, a sound generating device such as a speaker 16, a vibration device for transmitting vibration to the player's body, or a wind pressure device for applying wind pressure to the player's body. The effect display device means a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a display device with seven segments). The liquid crystal display device 6 is a typical example of an image display device. In the case of an image display device, the liquid crystal display device 6 refers to a type that expresses an effect mainly by image display, and expresses an effect by a display other than an image like a 7-segment display device. Things are included in the concept of the effect display device.

<Control device: FIGS. 4 to 5>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a control device for a rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is a control block diagram showing an outline of a configuration of a control device for performing game operation control. The same components as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  The control device for a spinning-reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment receives a main control board 400 (hereinafter referred to as “main control unit 400”) that controls overall game operation control, and an effect control command from the main control unit 400. , A production control unit 410 (production control unit) that controls the production operation control (production appearance control with respect to the production unit) and an external power source (not shown) to generate and supply power necessary for the gaming machine (not shown) It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means). The effect control unit 410 includes an effect control board 420 and a liquid crystal control board 460, and the liquid crystal display device 6 is connected to the liquid crystal control board 460. In FIG. 4, the power supply route is omitted.

  The main control unit 400 includes a medal detection sensor 7 a for detecting a game medal from the medal slot 7, a MAX bet switch 8 a for detecting an operation of the MAX bet button 8, and a 1 bet button via the game relay board 370. 1 bet switch 9a for detecting the operation of 9, a credit settlement switch 10a for detecting the operation of the credit settlement button 10, a rotating cylinder rotation starting switch 11a for detecting the operation of the rotating cylinder rotation starting lever 11, and the rotation of the rotating cylinder A stop switch board 360 on which the switches 12a ′, 12b ′, and 12c ′ are mounted is connected, and the main control unit 400 can receive detection signals from these.

  Further, a blocker solenoid 7c is connected to the main controller 400 via a game relay board 370, and an excitation signal for solenoid control can be transmitted to the blocker solenoid 7c.

  A game display board 390 is connected to the main controller 400 via a game relay board 370. The game display board 390 includes a game start display LED 81, a medal insertion display LED 82, a re-game operation LED 83, a MAX bet LED 84 (a MAX bet button 8 built-in LED), and an insertion number display LED 85. The unit 400 can transmit a light emission control signal for controlling these display units. Further, the game display board 390 is equipped with a credit number display 86 and a payout number display 87, and the main control unit 400 can transmit a light emission control signal for controlling these 7-segment displays.

  Although not shown in the drawings, the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11, the rotating cylinder rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, 12c, the 1-bet button 9, and / or the credit check button 10 are provided with LEDs therein. The player can be notified of the validity or invalidity of the lever operation or button operation by the light emission mode (for example, light emission color) of the LED.

  Further, the main control unit 400 is connected with the rotation drive motors 211a, 211b, and 211c for rotating the rotation cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c of the rotation apparatus 210 via the rotation relay board 330. Reference numeral 400 can transmit a control signal for driving these rotating drum drive motors.

  In addition, the main control unit 400 includes a spinning cylinder position detection sensor (a sensor provided on each spinning cylinder for detecting the current rotation position of the spinning cylinder (current position from the base point) and rotation of the spinning cylinder) 212a, 212b, 212c is connected, and the main control unit 400 can receive detection signals from these rotation position detection sensors.

  The main control unit 400 also detects the full state of the hopper unit 500 and an auxiliary tank (not shown) for storing excess game medals overflowing from the hopper unit 500 via the payout relay board 350. The metal fitting 600 is connected.

  The hopper unit 500 includes a hopper motor 510, a payout control board (payout control means) 450 for driving and controlling the hopper motor 510, and a medal payout sensor 520 for detecting game medals discharged from the hopper unit 500. Is provided.

  When the game medal needs to be paid out, the main control unit 400 can transmit a “payout control command” for designating the number of payouts to the payout control board (payout control unit) 450. When the payout control board 450 receives a payout control command from the main control unit 400, the payout control board 450 controls the hopper motor 510 to perform payout processing of a specified number of game medals. The game medals that have been paid out are detected by a medal payout sensor 520, and the detection signal is input to the main control unit 400.

  The main control unit 400 is connected to a hall computer HC (a computer that comprehensively manages pachinko hall gaming machines) via an external concentrated terminal board 310, and the main control unit 400 has predetermined game information (for example, Information on the number of game medals inserted, the number of game medals paid out, the occurrence of a prize, etc.) can be transmitted to the hall computer HC.

  Further, the main controller 400 is connected to a rotating drum setting board 430 so that a detection signal from the rotating drum setting board 430 can be received.

  The rotating setting board 430 is provided with a reset switch (not shown) for releasing a predetermined game operation error, and a detection signal when the reset switch is operated can be transmitted to the main control unit 400. . Further, the rotating setting board 430 is provided with a setting switch (not shown) for changing a “setting value” that causes a change in the payout rate (mechanical discount (PAYOUT rate)) step by step. A signal indicating the set value can be transmitted to the main control unit 400. The “set value” mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability of a role) of a role by internal lottery for each stage (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6). (The setting value 1 is the lowest machine discount and the setting value 6 is the highest machine discount), which is advantageous for the player. Note that the set value is changed based on the sales strategy of the hall (amusement store) by the hall clerk operating the setting switch.

  The main control unit 400 is connected to an effect control board 420 constituting the effect control unit 410 via the effect I / F board 340. The main role of the effect control board 420 is to receive an effect control command from the main control unit 400, to select an effect based on the effect control command, and to a liquid crystal control command associated with the effect control command for the liquid crystal control board 460. , Sound control of the speaker 16, light emission control of the decorative lamp 13 and LED, operation control of a movable body accessory (not shown) provided at an appropriate place, and the like.

  A liquid crystal control board 460 is connected to the effect control board 420 via an effect I / F board 340. The main role of the liquid crystal control board 460 is reception of a liquid crystal control command from the effect control board 420, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 6 based on the liquid crystal control command, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the circuit configuration and functions related to the main control unit (main control board) 400 and the effect control unit 410 will be specifically described. Here, description will be made while paying attention to the effect control board 420 connected to the main control unit 400 as the effect control unit 410.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram schematically showing circuit configurations of the main control unit 400 and the effect control board 420 shown in FIG. First, the circuit configuration of the main control unit 400 will be described.

<Main control unit (main control board) 400>
The main control unit 400 includes a microprocessor having a main CPU 401c and a microcomputer 401 (in this embodiment, a Z80 system equivalent product) having a main ROM 401a and a main RAM 401b. In addition, an I / O port circuit 402 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards, a counter circuit 403, and an interface (I / F) circuit that mediates exchange of signals with external peripheral boards connected to the main control board 400 404 to 406, a motor drive circuit 407, and a switch input circuit 408 are configured.

  The main CPU 401c is, for example, a CPU of Z80 (manufactured by Zylog or equivalent), and includes a plurality of types of registers for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing.

  The main ROM 401a functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data relating to game operation control, and describes stop data for stop control of the revolving cylinder in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. “Stop table (not shown)”, “role drawing table (FIG. 24)” describing internal lottery data for internal lottery, winning flag setting data for setting internal lottery result information (winning flag) Various data necessary for game operation control are stored, such as a “winning flag setting table (not shown)” in which is described.

  The main RAM 401b functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data generated when the main CPU 401c executes the game operation control program, for example, an internal lottery random value used for internal lottery, internal lottery result information, game Data necessary for the progress of the game, such as state information, various timers related to game operation control, betting number setting information (game medal insertion number), credit number, payout number, and the like are stored and used according to the processing state. Further, the main RAM 401b functions as a random number counter used for a specific lottery (for example, freeze effect lottery described later: step S103 in FIG. 9), and functions as a random number generation unit that generates random numbers in software.

  In addition to the main ROM 401a, the main RAM 401b, and the main CPU 401c, the microcomputer 401 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) 401d, an interrupt function (a timer interrupt function that gives an interrupt signal to the main CPU 401c, and an interrupt prohibition). An interrupt controller circuit 401e that exhibits a function) is included.

  The CTC 401d is a circuit in which an 8-bit counter and a timer are integrated, and adds a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) having a constant period, and a time measurement function. Therefore, in this embodiment, a timer interrupt is applied to the main CPU 401c at a time interval of about 1.5 ms using the CTC 401d.

  The counter circuit 403 includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number within a certain range in hardware, and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and as a 16-bit counter as a whole. work. The main CPU 401c sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, thereby acquiring the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random value (random number size: 65536), and the random value is obtained. Used for internal lottery. The microcomputer 401 (main CPU 401c), when the turning rotation start lever 11 is operated under a predetermined game start condition (when the bet number as the game start condition is set), Based on a role lottery table (FIG. 24) to be described later, it is determined by lottery (internal lottery) which role has been won or “losing”, and the lottery result information (for example, winning number information) Or a winning (internal winning) flag) is stored (set) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 401b until a predetermined process is completed. As a general rule, the lottery result information is cleared for each game.

(Role drawing table: Fig. 24)
FIG. 24 shows an outline of the role lottery table according to the present embodiment. In the figure, each game state (RT0 game (normal game (low probability RT game) in FIG. 6), RT1 game (medium probability RT game), RT2 game (high probability RT game), RT3 game (not shown), bonus game ) Is shown as an example.

  As shown in the figure, the above-mentioned lottery table has a lottery area (refer to the judgment value column) corresponding to the internal lottery target (see the lottery target role: the “winning role type” column in the figure). An area is defined, and thereby the winning probability (determination value / lottery area (65536)) of each combination is defined. There are a total of 33 types of roles (see the “Winning Role Type” column in the figure) that are the targets of the internal lottery of this embodiment, excluding losing (details of each role will be described later), and the main CPU 401c Referring to the combination lottery table, it is determined which combination is won or unfair (losing) depending on which judgment value the internal lottery random number value belongs to.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the winning probability of a specific lottery target role (for example, normal replay of the winning number 22) or the combined winning probability of a specific lottery target type (for example, replay), depending on the gaming state. The combined winning probability of the role type is different. Further, the lottery target combination varies depending on the game state. For example, during the RT0 game, “Replay B1 to B3 (winning numbers 26 to 28), Replay C1 to C3 (winning numbers 29 to 31), CA replays 1 to 2 (winning number 32) that are the lottery target roles in the RT1 game. -33) "is excluded from the internal lottery target, while on the other hand, during the RT1 game," Replay A1-A3 (winning numbers 23-25) "which are the lottery target roles in the RT0 game are excluded from the internal lottery target. .

  Although details will be described later, in the RT3 game (not shown), the BB of the special role type is in a game state in which the BB is internally won (BB internal winning (bonus carryover game)), and in the RT0 game to the RT2 game, the BB is not The game state is in the internal winning (non-BB internal winning game).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 5, the main control unit 400 outputs an “effect control command” as control information (command information) that can specify the processing state, to the output buffer provided in the I / F circuit 404 with the effect control board 420. It is output via the circuit 404a. The effect control command is input to the effect control board 420 through the effect I / F board 340 and the input buffer circuit 340a for the main control board 400 provided therein. Such a production control command from the main control unit 400 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal from an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 400 via the production control unit 410. It is transmitted to the control board 420. That is, the production control unit 410 side functions only as an input in one-way communication.

  As the I / F circuit, an I / F circuit 404 with the effect control board 420, an I / F circuit 405 with the game relay board 370, and an I / F circuit 406 with other boards are provided. Signals from various switches and sensors arranged in the gaming machine main body are input to the switch input circuit 408 of the I / F circuit 405.

  The motor drive circuit 407 supplies drive pulse signals for controlling the rotating drum drive motors 211a, 211b, and 211c under the control of the microcomputer 401 (main CPU 401c), and controls the rotation of the rotating drums 5a, 5b, and 5c. Perform stop control.

  The rotation control of the spinning cylinder is performed on the condition that the operation of the spinning cylinder rotation start lever 11 is confirmed under the game start condition. Specifically, the microcomputer 401 has inserted a predetermined number of game medals (the number of games that can be started) based on detection signals from the medal detection sensor 7a, the MAX bet switch 8a, or the 1 bet switch 9a. Is confirmed, the acceptance of the operation detection signal input from the spinning cylinder rotation start switch 11a is validated (game startable state). Then, when the operation detection signal input from the rotating cylinder rotation start switch 11a is confirmed in the state where the game can be started, the rotating cylinder driving motors 211a, 211b, and 211c are driven and controlled via the motor driving circuit 407. The cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c are started to rotate, and then each cylinder is rotated at a substantially constant speed. Thereby, the rotation operation | movement which rotates each rotation cylinder is implement | achieved. In the present embodiment, three game medals are the maximum bet number (MAX bet) for one game, and the prescribed number as the game start condition is also three game medals. However, the maximum bet number can be changed according to the gaming state. For example, the maximum bet can be 3 game medals during a normal game, and the maximum bet can be 2 game medals during a bonus game. The prescribed number may be one or two and is not particularly limited.

  The rotation stop control is performed on the condition that the operation of the rotation rotation stop button 12 has been confirmed while the rotation is rotating. Specifically, when the microcomputer 401 confirms the input of the operation detection signal from the spinning cylinder rotation stop switches 12a ′, 12b ′, and 12c ′, the microcomputer 401 detects the specific position (for example, the horizontal direction at the bottom of the spinning cylinder visualizing unit 3). The symbol number existing on the line (the position corresponding to the lower part in the frame) is obtained and is designated as a “stop operation symbol number”, and from the stop operation symbol number based on a predetermined stop table (not shown) Determine how many frames (the number of sliding frames) to move and stop the spinning cylinder, and stop the spinning cylinder at the target position. The microcomputer 401 monitors the amount of movement of the rotating drum from the current position based on the detection signals from the rotating drum position detection sensors 212a, 212b, and 212c, and monitors the specific position. I know the symbol number that exists. As a result, it is possible to grasp for each stop of the rotating cylinder which symbol number of the symbol has stopped on the effective pay line of each of the rotating cylinders 5a, 5b, 5c. Further, even before the turning cylinder actually stops, the stop symbol on the effective winning line can be grasped in advance based on the number of sliding symbols and the stop operation symbol number.

  In the above-mentioned “stop table”, stop data is determined in which the number of sliding frames corresponding to the stop operation symbol number is determined within the maximum number of drawn frames (for example, 4 frames). This stop table mainly includes a plurality of types of stop tables selected according to the internal lottery result. For example, a stop table for all cylinders that determines the number of sliding frames for all cylinders, or a stop table that determines the number of sliding frames for each cylinder (for example, a stop table for left cylinders, a stop for medium cylinder) Table, right turn cylinder stop table), and stop operation order stop table selected according to the stop operation procedure (at least one of the stop operation timing and the stop operation order (push order) of the rotary cylinder). For example, a stop table for stopping a combination of symbols corresponding to the lost or winning combination on the effective winning line is included. With such a stop table, a specific symbol (for example, a symbol that can constitute a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (component symbol of the winning combination)) is stopped on the effective winning line within the maximum number of frames to be drawn. In other words, so-called “retraction control” is realized in which a specific symbol is not stopped on the effective winning line.

  This “pull-in control” is, as is conventionally known, when the winning combination is determined by internal lottery, the winning combination existing on the effective winning line at the timing when the rotation rotation stop button 12 is operated. Except for the component symbols (designs that can constitute a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination), within the range of the predetermined number of sliding frames (maximum number of draw frames (maximum 4 frames in this embodiment)) on the effective winning line This is a stop control mode in which the stop position of the rotating cylinder is controlled in such a manner that when the component symbol of the winning combination that can be stopped is present, the symbol is drawn on the effective winning line. Therefore, even if the component symbol of the winning combination does not exist on the effective winning line, the component symbol of the winning combination can be stopped on the effective winning line by drawing the maximum number of draws from the stop operation symbol number. Then, basically, the symbol is drawn on the effective winning line, and the stop position of the spinning cylinder is controlled so that the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is established on the effective winning line.

  By utilizing such a pull-in control characteristic and determining the symbol arrangement configuration in the symbol arrangement band of each cylinder or the number of sliding symbols according to the stop operation symbol number, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be configured. Even if the symbol can be stopped on the effective winning line regardless of the stop operation procedure (at least one of the stop operation timing and the pressing order) (100% can be pulled in (100% pull-in rate)) Depending on the stop operation procedure, even if the maximum number of sliding frames is drawn, it is possible to make the stop impossible on the effective pay line (so-called “missing” can be generated). As a result, for example, a missed eye when a specific role is missed (for example, “a missed eye (bell bell)” when a bell 1 described later is missed) or a “reach eye” when a bonus role is missed For example, a specific stop display mode can be derived as a game result.

  However, if any winning combination is not won by internal lottery, that is, if it is `` losing '', the stop position of the spinning cylinder where the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped on the effective winning line is determined. It has become so. Therefore, in a game that is “losing”, the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination will not stop on the effective winning line regardless of the timing of stopping the spinning cylinder, and the game result will always be “losing”. Become.

  In the symbol arrangement band 200 (see FIG. 2) of the present embodiment, a specific symbol type (for example, bell symbol) is arranged so that the pull-in rate on a predetermined effective pay line is 100%. For other designs, the pull-in rate is not necessarily 100%. In addition, there is a case where the pulling rate for a specific design is different between one spinning cylinder and another. As a result, it is possible to draw a corresponding symbol combination 100% for a specific winning combination without depending on the stop operation procedure, or to cause a “missing” depending on the stop operation procedure. It should be noted that what kind of symbol is determined as to what pull-in rate depends on the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination described later (see FIGS. 25A to 25B), the symbol arrangement configuration of each symbol, the effective winning line, etc. Can be changed as appropriate.

<Production control unit 410 (production control board 420)>
Next, the effect control board 420 of the effect control unit 410 will be described.

  The effect control board 420 includes a microprocessor with a built-in sub CPU 421c (effect control CPU) and a microcomputer 421 with a sub ROM 421a (effect control ROM) and a sub RAM 421b (effect control RAM). In addition, a CTC 421d having the same function as the CTC 401d, an interrupt controller circuit 421e for giving an interrupt signal to the sub CPU 421c, an I / O port circuit 422 for inputting / outputting signals to / from the effect I / F board 340, a counter circuit 423 etc. are comprised. The effect control board 420 is connected to the liquid crystal control board 460 and various effect means such as the speaker 16 and the decorative lamp 13 via the effect I / F board 340.

  The sub-ROM 421a functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to an effect control program in which an effect control procedure is described. Is stored. Further, the sub RAM 421b functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data generated when the sub CPU 421c executes the effect control program, such as effect random number for effect lottery, effect control unit side game state (effect state) information, and the like. The data necessary for the production to appear is stored and used according to the processing state.

  Similarly to the counter circuit 403, the counter circuit 423 includes a random number generation circuit and a sampling circuit. The sub CPU 421c sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the effect processing state (for example, at the timing when the effect control command is received), thereby acquiring the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as the effect random number value. This effect random number is mainly used for effect pattern lottery.

  Although not shown, the effect control board 420 receives an effect control command from the main control unit 400 and performs an effect process for light and sound. An optical display control unit for an optical display device including an LED is provided.

  The liquid crystal control board 460 (see FIG. 4) includes a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 6 based on the liquid crystal control command received from the effect control board 420. This display control unit stores a VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and an image (image image data) in which VDP performs image development processing (effect image data). Character) ROM, VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by VDP, liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and display control of liquid crystal control CPU It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores a program describing an operation procedure and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory.

  With regard to the appearance control of the effect, the microcomputer 421 (sub CPU 421c) constructs an effect scenario to appear in the current game based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 400, and produces sound effects and light effects. A dedicated control signal is transmitted to the sound generating device and the optical display device at a timing when generation is necessary, and a liquid crystal control command is sent to the liquid crystal control board 460 at a timing when image reproduction to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 6 is necessary. Send to. The production scenario is a production in a broad sense including a plurality of types of production patterns, and each production pattern plays a role as one element (part production) constituting the production scenario. Thereby, the reproduction of the sound effect corresponding to the effect pattern, the lighting / flashing driving of the decoration lamp 13 and the LED, or the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 6 is realized, and various effect patterns are sequentially arranged in time series. Alternatively, a target production (production scenario) appears by developing a plurality simultaneously. Such effects include various effects related to the game. For example, effects (notice effects) for notifying (indicating) internal lottery result information (winning role), effects for notifying the game state (state notification) Representative examples include an effect (for example, background display effect), an expected effect for notifying the winning possibility of winning a role (winning expectation), an assist notification effect (support effect) described later, and the like.

  In addition, the microcomputer 421 displays a production control command including specific information sent from the main control unit 400 (for example, that the combination of the winning combination information and the specific symbol has stopped on the effective winning line, the specific symbol has stopped. In response to such information, the transition control can be performed between a plurality of types of performance states including an AT game described later.

  Although not shown, the interrupt terminal INT of the effect control board 420 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 400 transmits a command among the command transmission lines. The sub CPU 421c generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, and an effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. Unlike the main CPU 401c, the sub CPU 421c executes an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically) when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal. Even in the middle, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the main CPU 401c (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 410 (effect control board 420). The first strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the main CPU 401c for a predetermined period during which the sub CPU 421c (production control CPU) can reliably receive a command. When transmitting the liquid crystal control command, the effect control board 420 generates an interrupt strobe signal, and sends a liquid crystal control command of 2 bytes length composed of a MODE signal and an EVENT signal to the liquid crystal control board 460 before and after. .

<About the type of winning combination (winning role type), the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (combination of winning symbols: winning combination type), and dividend (game value): FIG. 25A to FIG. 25B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 25A to FIG. 25B, the relationship between the type of winning combination (winning role type) according to the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (winning role type), and the payout (game value) thereof Will be described. FIG. 25A to FIG. 25B are diagrams for explaining the combination of roles according to the present embodiment, and illustrate combinations of symbols according to the winning combination and their combination names.

  In addition, the symbols corresponding to the respective columns of “left turning cylinder”, “middle spinning cylinder”, and “right spinning cylinder” in the “combination of symbols” column shown in the figure are on the effective winning line in the spinning cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c. The stop symbol is shown. Also, the “push order” column in the figure shows the stop operation order for establishing the symbol combination shown in the “symbol combination” column in the figure (hereinafter, the X-th stop operation is performed as necessary). This is referred to as “Xth stop operation”, and “the Xth stop operation target” is abbreviated as “Xth stop operation turn”, and “left” in the figure indicates that the stop operation target is the left turn cylinder 5a "Middle" means the middle cylinder 5b, and "Right" means the right cylinder 5c). However, the illustrated winning combination types include not only the pressing order but also a condition that requires a stop operation timing as a condition for establishing a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 25A to FIG. 25B, the role configuration according to the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  In this embodiment, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of types of lottery object combinations are provided. These lottery roles are broadly classified into those belonging to “special role types” and those belonging to “general role types”. Furthermore, “general role types” are classified as those belonging to “small role type” and “replay ( Replay) It is roughly divided into those belonging to the role type '. The above-mentioned “special role type” is a role type that triggers the transition to “bonus game”, which will be described later, and the “small role type” is a role that involves “payout of game medals (including 0 payouts)” “Replay role type” is a role type with “replay” and is defined as a role having different performances.

  The above-mentioned “re-game” refers to the conditions for starting the next game without inserting game medals (game media) (including using the game medals for games by storage means or by operating other devices). Specifically, the same amount (the same number) as the amount of game media used in this game (the number of game medals inserted for setting the bet amount) is artificially given (automatically) The next game can be started. This re-game can be said to have game value in the same way as a game medal in that the player can play the next game without reducing the game medal. This game value is not limited to the one that acts on the player in a game, but can also include one that acts against the player. In addition to the above-mentioned re-games and game medals, such game value includes, for example, a game state transition such as a game state promotion transition / fall transition and a predetermined lottery related to the transition (for example, an AT lottery (to be described later) 27), and the number of additional games by an additional game number lottery (FIGS. 28 to 30) described later.

  In this embodiment, “Red 7BB” and “White 7BB” are provided as belonging to the special role type, and “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry” are provided as belonging to the small role type. ”,“ Strong cherry ”,“ AT1-4 ”,“ special AT1-6 ”belong to the above-mentioned replay roles,“ normal replay ”,“ replay A1 to A3 ”,“ replay B1 to B3 ”,“ replay ” “C1 to C3”, “CA replays 1 to 2”, and the like are provided.

  If any of the above-mentioned lottery targets is determined as a winning combination by internal lottery, a winning flag corresponding to that winning combination is established, and as a result of the game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops on the effective winning line It is allowed to be displayed. Then, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops on the effective winning line when each of the cylinders stops, it is determined that a combination corresponding to the combination of symbols is established, and the gaming value corresponding to the combination of the symbols is It is given to the player. In addition, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped across a plurality of effective winning lines, the winning combination is duplicated. For example, in the case of a small role with a predetermined number of game medals paid out, A payout corresponding to the line can be obtained (for example, see a weak cherry to be described later).

  In this specification, when a winning combination is determined by internal lottery, a combination of symbols derived and displayed as a game result (especially a combination of symbols allowed to be stopped on the effective winning line) is indicated as “winning combination. The combination of symbols handled as a winning combination is stopped (established) on the effective winning line may be referred to as “winning (regardless of whether or not game value is given)”. is there. In addition, when a so-called “missing” occurs, a specific stop display mode (missing eye) derived and displayed as a game result is also an aspect of a combination of symbols derived and displayed as a game result. Can also be treated as a winning combination.

<Composition>
Next, with reference to FIG. 25A to FIG. 25B, the winning combination will be described.

(Small role: weak watermelon, strong watermelon)
First, the weak watermelon with the winning number 8 and the strong watermelon with the winning number 9 will be described. These winning combinations are defined as “unrestricted pushing order” allowing the winning of the corresponding winning combination at least regardless of the pushing order. In this regard, a different winning combination (including a case where a losing eye is derived as a game result depending on at least the pressing order) can win, such as AT1 to AT4 and a specific replay type to be described later. It is different in nature from the “push order ruler”.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the weak watermelon and the strong watermelon have a combination of symbols “watermelon”-“watermelon”-“watermelon” (watermelon assortment) for which a winning combination is permitted by winning. However, the effective winning line where the watermelon alignment is established differs depending on the stop operation timing between the case where the weak watermelon is won and the case where the strong watermelon is won. For example, when a strong watermelon is won, it can be stopped on the right downward line at a specific stop operation timing, but when a weak watermelon is won, it cannot be stopped. Thus, the player can discriminate whether the winning combination is a weak watermelon or a strong watermelon by carefully performing the pushing operation.

  When the weak watermelon or strong watermelon (watermelon set) wins, a predetermined number (for example, 6) of game medals are paid out as a payout.

(Small role: weak cherry, strong cherry)
Next, the weak cherry with the winning number 10 and the strong cherry with the winning number 11 will be described.

  Weak cherries and strong cherries are stipulated as “Unordered push order”, and the combination of symbols allowed to win by winning is “cherry (bottom)”-“ANY”-“ANY (“ ANY ” "" Means that the symbol type does not matter) ", a combination of symbols (weak cherry), and a strong cherry is a combination of" cherry (middle) "-" ANY "-" ANY "(strong cherry) It has become. In addition, the notation “cherry (non-middle stage)” in the weak cherry shown in the figure indicates that the stop symbol on the effective winning line (upper horizontal line, left down line, or right down line) other than the middle horizontal line is a cherry pattern. This means that the notation of “cherry (middle stage)” in the strong cherry means that the stop symbol on the effective winning line of the middle horizontal line is the cherry symbol.

  When the above-mentioned weak cherry or strong cherry wins, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game medals are paid out as a payout. However, if a weak cherry wins, it will be a double win over two active pay lines, and game medals (for example, 4 (2 + 2)) for 2 winning lines will be paid out.

  In addition, the above-mentioned weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, or strong cherry may give another game value as a game value in addition to paying out a game medal. For example, the execution right of “AT lottery (FIG. 27)” that will be advantageous to the player, which will be described later, and “additional game number lottery (FIGS. 28 to 30)” that adds the number of continuing games of this ART game are granted. Etc.

(Small role: AT1-4)
Next, “AT1 to AT4” with winning numbers 12 to 15 will be described.

  The AT1 to AT4 are defined as “push order defining combinations” in which different combinations of symbols (winning combinations) can be stopped (winning) on the effective winning line according to at least the order of pressing. That is, a predetermined pressing order is assigned to a specific symbol combination to be stopped on the effective pay line. Although details will be described later, AT1 to AT4 give the player a winning combination (advantageous winning combination) that favors the player in the case of a predetermined pushing order, and to the player if the pushing order is different from that. It is determined that a winning combination that can act adversely (unfavorable winning combination) can be stopped (winning) on the effective winning line. Since AT1 to AT4 are substantially the same except for the difference in pushing order regarding advantageous winning combination or disadvantageous winning combination, "AT1" is representatively described below in order to avoid duplication. To do.

(About AT1)
As shown in the figure, the symbol combinations that are allowed to win by winning AT1 are (1) “Bell”-“Bell (middle)”-“Bell” symbol combinations (Bell 1), (2) “Bell” (Upper stage)-"Bell (upper stage)"-"Bell (upper stage)" symbol combination (Bell 2). That is, when AT1 is determined as a winning combination, the above-described bell 1 and bell 2 are placed in a winning-permitted state.

  More specifically, when AT1 is determined as a winning combination, Bell 1 and Bell 2 are placed in a winning-permitted state. In other words, AT1 is a role that allows Bell 1 to win a prize by winning. Thus, it can be said that it has a property as a “duplicate combination” that can be won in combination with a combination that allows the winning of the bell 2, that is, a plurality of types of combinations can be won simultaneously in one internal lottery. In this embodiment, like this “duplicate role”, there is provided a lottery target role in which a winning combination and a stop symbol pattern (winning combination) allowed by the winning combination are associated with 1 to N, and one winning combination is provided. On the other hand, the game contents are enriched by providing a plurality of types of stop symbols to make this effective. In addition to AT1 to AT4, there are duplicate BB1 to duplicate BB5, special AT1 to special AT6, specific replay role types (for example, replay A1 to A3), and the like, which have such a property as a duplicate role. .

  The notation “bell (middle)” in the illustrated bell 1 means that the stop symbol on the effective winning line of the middle horizontal line is a bell symbol, and the notation “bell (upper)” in the bell 2 is This means that the stop symbol on the effective winning line on the upper horizontal line is a bell symbol. In the case of the present embodiment, “bell 1” has a bell symbol alignment on an effective winning line other than the upper horizontal line, and bell 2 has a bell symbol alignment on the upper horizontal line. Thus, by making different the winning line where the bell symbol alignment is established, it is easy to distinguish whether the bell 1 has won or not.

  The “Bell 1” is positioned as a winning combination having a relatively higher game value than the Bell 2. Specifically, for example, when Bell 1 wins, 12 game medals (first predetermined number (first game value)) are paid out, and when Bell 2 wins, it is less than that. Four game medals (second predetermined number (second game value)) are paid out. This is because the winning combination (advantageous winning combination) that acts favorably on the player or the winning combination (unfavorable winning combination) that acts adversely on the player is derived and displayed as a game result, according to AT1 in accordance with at least the pressing order. (This also applies to AT2 to AT4.)

  It should be noted that whether or not each of the cylinders 5a, 5b, 5c corresponds to the first to third stops, that is, grasping of the pushing order is determined by “stop operation order monitoring means” which the main control unit 400 serves as its function unit. Be monitored. This stop operation order monitoring means monitors the rotation state and the stop state of each of the rotating cylinders, and based on the rotating and rotating cylinders, the number of stop operation of the rotating cylinder targeted for the stop operation is Know if it exists (push order).

  Next, a combination of symbols allowed to win a prize by winning AT1 will be specifically described from the viewpoint of stop control.

(In the case of forward push (push order correct answer))
As shown in FIG. 49, in the case of forward pressing (stop operation procedure for stopping in the order of the left rotating cylinder 5a → the middle rotating cylinder 5b → the right rotating cylinder 5c) (in the case of the correct pressing order), the bell 1 is an effective winning prize. The spinning cylinder stop control (retraction control) is performed so as to stop on the line (in this embodiment, on the effective winning line other than on the upper horizontal line).

(In the case of other than forward pressing (incorrect pressing order))
On the other hand, when the pressing order is other than the forward pressing (in the case of incorrect pressing order), the bell 2 is stopped so that it stops on the effective pay line (in this embodiment, on the upper horizontal line). Stop control is performed.

(About Bell 1 missing from AT1)
In the present embodiment, when AT1 is determined as a winning combination, if the above push order is incorrect, bell 1 (12 payouts) is missed, and instead, bell 2 (4 payouts) ) Is derived and displayed as a game result.

  If the bell 1 is lost, the bell 2 stops on the upper horizontal line. At this time, the “replay”-“watermelon / blank 2”-“red 7” always appears on the middle horizontal line. / White 7 / BAR / Plum / Blank 2 ”(hereinafter, this symbol combination is abbreviated as“ bell spill ”), any one of a total of ten symbol combinations are stopped simultaneously (see FIG. 2). That is, if the bell 1 is missed, the double winning between the bell 2 and the bell spilled eyes occurs. In addition, this bell spilled eye is a combination of symbols like a loose eye. Since this “bell removal eye” is also a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination, it can be said that AT1 is an overlapping combination in which the winning combination of the bell 1, the bell 2, and the bell removal eye is repeated.

  If this bell spill is won, as a payout, if the game medal is paid out and if it is in a specific game state (for example, RT2 game described later), the current game state (RT2 game) will be more than that. FIG. 6 shows details regarding the transition between the RT game, the AT game, and the game state (transition between the RT game, the AT game, and the game state). Details).

  The above-mentioned bell spilled eyes work exclusively as a “falling opportunity” that triggers a transition to a gaming state that adversely affects the player, and to be regarded as a disadvantaged winning role related to AT Can do. In this way, a fall triggering role (here, a combination of a small role with a payout of a game medal (here, Bell 1) and a break-up eye (a combination that is not a combination of the same or similar symbol types) Bell spilled eyes) will make it possible for players to pay attention to "Bell 1" and conceal the fact that they have won the fall opportunity, so the player has a clear indication of the fall opportunity. You will not be able to understand. In this embodiment, if the push order is incorrect for the AT, since the bell 2 and the bell spill are derived and displayed as game results, the bell 2 and the bell spill are assumed to be equivalent. Can be handled.

  With respect to AT2 to AT4, the same event pull-in control as AT1 is performed. Specifically, in the case of a predetermined pushing order (push order correct answer), 'Bell 1 (advantageous winning combination)' stops on the effective winning line, and in other pushing orders (push order incorrect answer) The pull-in control of the same event as AT1 described above, such as “Bell 2 (first disadvantageous winning combination)” and “Bell spilling (second disadvantageous winning combination)”, is performed. . However, it is not limited to the pull-in control as described above, and in the case of an incorrect push order with respect to AT, the pull-in rate of the disadvantageous winning combination (for example, Bell 2) is less than 100% (Bell 2 is missed depending on the stop operation timing) If the bell 2 is missed, “bell bell spill” may be derived and displayed as a game result. In this case, even if the answer is wrong in the pressing order, the winning of the bell spilled eyes is avoided according to the stop operation timing and does not fall down (for example, if it is a specific (specific range) stop operation timing, the winning is avoided. Can be created, and the technical intervention of the player can be increased to make the game interesting.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the description has been given assuming that the advantageous winning combination is determined as the same winning combination (Bell 1) for each AT (AT1 to AT4). Alternatively, a part of each AT may have the same winning combination, and another AT may have a different winning combination. Similarly, the disadvantageous winning combination (Bell 2) may also be a different winning combination for each AT, the same winning combination for some ATs, and different winning combinations for other ATs. Also good.

(Small role: Special AT1-6)
Next, “Special AT1 to Special AT6” with winning numbers 16 to 21 will be described.

  The special ATs 1 to 6 belong to the “push order prescribed combination”, and the corresponding special small combination (special small combination 1 to 6) or the bell 1 wins according to the pressing order. Each of the special ATs 1 to 6 is substantially the same except that the special ATs (special roles 1 to 6) or the pushing order for winning the bell 1 are different. Therefore, in the following, “special AT1” will be representatively described in order to avoid duplicate description. Further, regarding the explanation of the stop control of the rotating drum, the explanation will be made by omitting the substantially same points as AT1 to AT4 as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description.

(About special AT1)
As shown in the figure, the combinations of symbols that are allowed to win by winning the special AT1 are (1) “Bell”-“Bell (middle)”-“Plum” (Special Small Role 1), (2) “Bell” -"Bell (middle)"-"Bell" symbol combination (Bell 1). That is, when the special AT1 is determined as the winning combination, the special small combination 1 and the bell 1 are placed in a winning-permitted state. Therefore, it can be said that the special AT1 has a property as a duplicate combination that can be won by the special combination 1 and the bell 1.

  When the special AT1 is won, it is determined based on at least the pressing order which symbol combination is stopped on the effective pay line. However, when the first stop operation cylinder is the middle rotation cylinder 5b, the “special small role 1” stops on the effective winning line only when the predetermined stop operation timing is reached, and the first stop operation cylinder is If it is other than the middle drum 5b, "Bell 1" stops on the effective pay line regardless of the stop operation timing.

  In detail, with respect to the “plum symbol” which is a component symbol of the special small role 1, the pull-in rate on the effective winning line is arranged to be less than 100% because of the pull-in control ( One plum symbol is arranged (see symbol arrangement band 200 in FIG. 2). For this reason, in the case of special AT1, if the plum symbol of the right turn cylinder 5c is operated at a stop operation timing that cannot be drawn onto the effective winning line (for example, when the pushing operation fails), the special small part 1 is missed. As a feature, a combination of specific symbols (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “AT chance eyes”) always stops on the effective pay line. That is, when the special AT 1 is won, 100% of the special small role 1, the bell 1, and the AT chance are drawn. Paying attention to the fact that this AT chance is also a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination, the special AT1 is a combination of the special small role 1, the bell 1, and the overlapping combination that is redundantly won for the AT chance. I can say that. The other special small roles 2 to 5 are also subjected to the same event pull-in control as the special small role 1 described above, and the special small roles corresponding to the special small roles 2 to 5 (special small roles 2). -6), Bell 1 and AT chance are drawn 100%. The AT chance may be “Bell 1”. In this case, if the special small combination 1 is missed, the bell 1 will win instead of the special small combination 1.

(About special AT dividends)
The special AT1 can be given a specific game value as a game value in addition to paying out a game medal. This game value can be given a relatively high game value compared to the other small roles described above (weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, AT1-4). Of the role types, the highest level of game value (for example, the highest game value among all the role types excluding special role types) may be given. In this respect, the special AT is positioned as a premium role.

  In the present embodiment, as a specific game value related to the special AT1, granting the right to execute an “additional game number lottery” for adding the number of continued games of ART games, and assist notification for guiding a prize-winning procedure for a promotion opportunity described later Grant of the right to execute (support effect) can be given (right grant for promotion replay notification described later, or an additional right for the number of continued ART game games described later can be given (details will be described later). Further, as other game values, a predetermined number of game medals are awarded in the winning game. For example, 15 special payouts 1 (special small roles 2 to 6 are the same) and AT chance are paid out 15 pieces, and Bell 1 is 12 pieces. Therefore, the special AT1 has a winning combination that works favorably for the player or a disadvantageous action that acts more adversely than the player, at least in accordance with the pressing order. Has a role that can be derived displayed as technique result. Note that special AT2~6 also, so that substantially the same game value as the above-mentioned special AT1 is applied.

(Replay role: normal replay, replay A1 to replay C3, CA replay 1 to 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25B, the replay roles of the winning numbers 22 to 33 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, a replay role type (for example, normal replay) that allows winning of a combination of one type of symbols that accompanies replay and a replay role type that allows winning of a combination of multiple types of symbols that accompany replay ( For example, a plurality of types of replay roles including replays A1 to C3) are provided.

(Replay role: Normal replay)
First, “normal replay” of the winning number 22 will be described.

  The symbol combinations that are allowed to win in the normal replay winning are the symbol combinations “replay”-“replay”-“replay” (normal replay). This normal replay belongs to the “push order unquestioned role” and does not require a stop operation timing. In other words, when the normal replay is won, regardless of the stop operation procedure, the normal replay is won. When a normal replay wins, the payout becomes a replay regardless of the gaming state.

(Replay role: Replay A1-A3)
Next, replays A1 to A3 with winning numbers 23 to 25 will be described.

  The replays A1 to A3 belong to the “push order prescribed combination”, and the normal replay or the promoted replay is awarded according to the push order. The replays A1 to A3 are mainly the same except that the push order for winning these replay roles is different. Therefore, in order to avoid duplication, the replays A1 to A3 will be described below. "Will be described as a representative.

(About Replay A1)
As shown in the figure, the symbol combinations that are allowed to win by winning Replay A1 are (1) “Replay”-“Replay”-“Replay” symbol combinations (normal replay), (3) “Replay” — It is a combination of two types of symbols: “Replay” — “Watermelon / Cherry” symbol combination (promotional replay). That is, when the replay A1 is determined as the winning combination, the above-described normal replay and promotion replay are placed in a winning-permitted state. Therefore, it can be said that the replay A1 has a property as a duplicate combination that can be won in duplicate for these replay combinations.

  In this embodiment, when Replay A1 is won, which combination of symbols is stopped on the effective pay line depends on the order of pressing at that time regardless of the stop operation timing because of the pull-in control. It has come to be decided. Specifically, regarding the push order assigned to the replay A1, if the push order is a predetermined push order (reverse push (right → middle → left): push order correct answer), the promoted replay stops on the effective winning line. When the pressing order is different from the predetermined pressing order (pressing order other than reverse pressing: incorrect pressing order), the normal replay is stopped on the valid pay line. This is different from the special AT which requires a stop operation timing.

(Regarding dividends for normal replay and promoted replay related to Replay A1)
Next, the payout of each replay combination that can be won by winning Replay A1 will be described.

  When the above-mentioned “normal replay” is won by winning the replay A1, the payout is replayed regardless of the gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the above “promotion replay” wins, the following specific game value is given. In this embodiment, when a promotion replay wins in a specific gaming state (for example, RT0 game described later), the payout is given to the re-game and from the current gaming state (here, RT0 game). , It is shifted (promoted) to another gaming state (RT1 game) that can be beneficial to the player (becomes a relatively high profit state). The above-mentioned promotion replay is exclusively associated with the above-described promotion transition, and serves exclusively as an “elevation trigger” that is a trigger for transitioning to a gaming state that works favorably for the player. In this respect, the promoted replay is positioned as a winning combination having a relatively higher game value than the normal replay. This “promotion opportunity” is an aspect of “state transition opportunity” that is a transition opportunity from one gaming state to another gaming state due to at least one of the winning and winning. In addition, as a thing having such a property as a state transition trigger, there is a “falling trigger” described later. These state transition triggers can be either the winning combination or the winning combination. In other words, the gaming state may be shifted when the winning combination is won, or the gaming state may be shifted when a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the winning combination wins, which is determined as appropriate. be able to.

  In this way, in the replay A1, as in the above-described AT1 to 4 and special AT1 to 6, a winning combination that works favorably for the player or a winning action that acts more adversely than the player depends on at least the pressing order. As a result, the combination can be derived and displayed (the same applies to replays A2 to A3, replays B1 to B3 described later, replays C1 to C3, and CA replay).

  In the following, regarding the replays A1 to A3, for convenience of explanation, the push order in which the special replay is won is referred to as “push order correct answer”, and the other push order (the push order in which the normal replay is a win) is “push”. It may be referred to as “order incorrect answer”.

(Replay role: Replay B1-B3)
Next, replays B1 to B3 with winning numbers 26 to 28 will be described. Note that the details of the stop control (retraction control) of the rotating drum will be described by omitting the same points as in the replays A1 to A3 in order to avoid repeated description. Similarly, replays C1 to C3 and CA replays 1 and 2 described later will be omitted as appropriate.

  Replays B1 to B3 belong to a “push order prescribed combination”, and a replay combination of a normal replay, a fall replay, and a special replay is awarded according to the order of pressing. The replays B1 to B3 are substantially the same except that the push order for winning these replay roles is different. Therefore, in the following, in order to avoid duplication, “Replay B1 "Will be described as a representative.

(About Replay B1)
As shown in the figure, the symbol combinations that are allowed to win by winning Replay B1 are (1) “Replay”-“Replay”-“Replay” symbol combination (normal replay), (2) “Watermelon / Blank” 2 ”-“ Replay ”-“ Replay ”symbol combination (falling replay), (3)“ Red 7 / Replay ”-“ Red 7 / Replay ”-“ White 7 / Bell ”symbol combination (special replay) This is a combination of 8 types of symbols. That is, when the replay B1 is determined as the winning combination, the above-described normal replay, fall replay, and special replay are placed in a winning-permitted state. Therefore, it can be said that the replay B1 has a property as a duplicate combination that can be won in duplicate for these replay combinations.

  As for the replays B1 to B3, as in the same event as the replay A type described above, whether or not the combination of symbols stops on the effective pay line is determined by the pressing order. Specifically, with respect to the pressing order assigned to the replay B1, as shown in the figure, when the first stop operation cylinder is the left rotation cylinder 5a, “normal replay” is selected, and the first stop operation rotation is in the middle. “Troll fall replay” is stopped (winning) on the effective winning line when the first stop operation cylinder is the right rotating cylinder 5c in the case of the rotating cylinder 5b. .

  However, when the special replay is in the pushing order for winning (in this case, when the first stop operation cylinder is the right rotation cylinder 5c), the special replay to win according to the stop operation timing of the rotation cylinder Replay types are different. In this embodiment, due to the pull-in control, when the stop operation timing is a specific stop operation timing in each cylinder, “red 7”-“red 7”-“white 7” (7-match replay) is effectively won. If it is not the specific timing, it is drawn on the line and stopped, and other special replays ("Red 7 / Replay"-"Red 7 / Replay"-"White 7 / Bell") Any one of the seven types excluding replay) is drawn on the effective winning line and stopped. In other words, “Replay” or “Bell”, which is a component symbol of special replay, did not draw 'Red 7 symbol' or 'White 7 symbol' on the effective winning line in each cylinder due to the pull-in control. In this case, the symbol type stops instead of the symbol.

(Regarding normal replay, fall replay, and special replay dividends related to replay B1)
Next, the payout of each replay combination that can be won by winning the replay B1 will be described.

  When the above-mentioned “normal replay” is won by winning the replay B1, the payout is replayed regardless of the gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned “special replay” wins, the following specific game value is given. In the present embodiment, when a special replay is won in a specific gaming state (for example, RT1 game described later), a re-game is given and from the current gaming state (here, RT1 game), it is more than that. The game is shifted (promoted) to another gaming state (RT2 game described later) that can advantageously act on the player (becomes a relatively high profit state). The above-mentioned special replay is accompanied by the above-described promotion transition, and serves exclusively as an “elevation trigger” that serves as a transition opportunity to a gaming state that favors the player. In this regard, the special replay is positioned as a winning combination (advantageous winning combination) having a relatively higher game value than the normal replay.

  When the falling replay wins the above “special replay”, the following specific game value is given. In the present embodiment, when a fall replay wins in a specific gaming state (for example, RT1 game or RT2 game), a re-game is given and from the current gaming state (here, RT1 game or RT2 game). More than that, the game is shifted (falling down) to another game state (RT0 game) that can adversely affect the player (becomes a relatively low profit state). In other words, the fall replay, contrary to the above-described special replay, works exclusively as a “fall fall trigger” that triggers a transition to a gaming state that acts adversely on the player. In this respect, the fall replay is positioned as a winning combination (unfavorable winning combination) having a game value relatively lower than that of the normal replay.

  As described above, the replay B1 is similar to the AT1 to AT4 and the replays A1 to A3, according to at least the pressing order, according to the advantageous winning combination (here, special replay) or disadvantageous winning combination (here, fall replay or normal replay). Can be derived and displayed as a game result.

  When the replay B1 is won, for example, the “special replay” that works favorably for the player is only the push order in which the first stop operation cylinder is the right cylinder 5c. The rate is “1/3”. That is, if it is unclear whether or not the replay B1 has been won, if it is a special replay, the player can win with a probability of 1/3. This means that the winning rate can be changed by assigning one or more kinds of pushing orders in order to win a specific winning combination (winning winning combination) with respect to the pressing order determining combination.

  In the following, regarding the replays B1 to B3, for the convenience of explanation, the pushing order in which the special replay wins is referred to as “push order correct answer”, and the other pushing order (push order in which the normal replay or the falling replay wins) Is sometimes referred to as “wrong push order”.

(Replay role: Replay C1 to C3)
Next, replays C1 to C3 with winning numbers 29 to 31 will be described.

  The replays C1 to C3 belong to the “push order prescribed combination”, and one of the replay combinations of the normal replay and the fall replay is awarded according to the pushing order. The replays C1 to C3 are substantially the same except that the push order for winning these replay roles is different, so that the replays C1 to C3 will be described below in order to avoid duplicate descriptions. "Will be described as a representative.

(About Replay C1)
As shown in the figure, the symbol combinations that are allowed to win by winning the replay C1 are (1) “Replay”-“Replay”-“Replay” symbol combinations (normal replay), (2) “Watermelon / Blank” 2 ”-“ Replay ”-“ Replay ”symbol combinations (falling replay), and a combination of two types and symbols. That is, when the replay C1 is determined as the winning combination, the normal replay and the fall replay are placed in a winning allowed state. Therefore, it can be said that the replay C1 has a property as a duplicate combination that can be won in duplicate for these replay combinations.

  As for the replay C1, as in the case of the replay A type and the replay B type described above, whether or not the combination of symbols stops on the effective pay line is determined by the pressing order. Specifically, with respect to the pressing order assigned to the replay C1, as shown in the figure, when the first stop operation cylinder is the left rotation cylinder 5a, "normal replay" is performed, and the first stop operation rotation cylinder is in the middle. In the case of the rotating cylinder 5b, the “tumbling replay” stops (wins) on the effective winning line. As for replays C1 to C3, the normal replay works as an advantageous winning combination, and the fall replay works as a disadvantageous winning combination.

  In the following, regarding the replays C1 to C3, for convenience of explanation, the pushing order in which the above-mentioned normal replay is won will be referred to as “push order correct answer”, and the other pushing order (push order in which the falling replay will be won) will be “push”. It may be referred to as “order incorrect answer”.

(Replay role: CA Replay 1-2)
Next, CA replays 1 and 2 with winning numbers 32 to 33 will be described.

  The CA replays 1 and 2 belong to the “push order prescribed combination”, and one of the replay combinations of the normal replay and the chance replay wins according to the pressing order. The CA replays 1 and 2 are substantially the same except for the difference in the pushing order for winning these replay roles, and in the following, in order to avoid duplication, “CA “Replay 1” will be described as a representative.

(About CA Replay 1)
As shown in the figure, the symbol combinations that are allowed to win by winning CA Replay 1 are (1) “Replay”-“Replay”-“Replay” symbol combinations (normal replay), and (2) “BAR”. / Bell "-" BAR / Replay "-" BAR / Bell "(Chance Replay 1). That is, when the replay CA replay 1 is determined as the winning combination, the above-described normal replay and chance replay 1 are placed in a winning-permitted state. Therefore, it can be said that the replay C1 has a property as a duplicate combination that can be won in duplicate for these replay combinations.

  As for the CA replay 1, as in the case of the replay A type and the replay B type described above, it is determined by the pressing order which symbol combination is stopped on the effective pay line. Specifically, regarding the pressing order assigned to the CA replay 1, as shown in the figure, when the reverse pressing is performed (right → middle → left: correct pressing order), “normal replay” is other than the reverse pressing ( If the answer is “incorrect push order”, “Chance Replay 1” is stopped (winning) on the effective winning line. As for the CA replay, chance replays 1 and 2 serve as an advantageous winning combination, and normal replay serves as an unfavorable winning combination.

  Here, when the above-mentioned chance replay is in the pushing order for winning (in this case, “reverse pushing”), the type of chance replay to be won is different depending on the stop operation timing of the spinning cylinder. . In the present embodiment, due to the pull-in control, when the stop operation timing is a specific stop operation timing in each cylinder, “BAR” − “BAR” − “BAR” (BAR replay) is pulled into the effective winning line. If it is not at the specific timing, other chance replays (any one of the seven combinations of “BAR / Bell”-“BAR / Replay”-“BAR / Bell” symbols excluding BAR replay) Is drawn on the active winning line and stopped. In other words, “replay” or “bell” of the component symbol of the chance replay indicates that if the “BAR symbol” cannot be drawn on the effective winning line in each cylinder due to the pull-in control, the “BAR symbol” It is a symbol type that stops instead of.

(About dividends by chance replay)
When the chance replay wins, the following specific game value is given. In the present embodiment, when a chance replay is won in a specific gaming state (RT1 game or RT2 game described later), the payout is given a special game value that is beneficial to the player as well as being replayed. (For example, granting the right to shift to the additional specialization zone described later) (details will be described later).

(Special role: single BB1 to BB2, duplicate BB1 to BB5)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25A, the BB role types of the winning numbers 1 to 7 will be described. In this embodiment, single BB1-BB2 and duplication BB1-BB5 are provided. BB1 and BB2 mean “single BB1” and “single BB2” shown in FIG. 25A, but the abbreviations “BB1” and “BB2” are used unless confusion with the overlapping BB occurs.

(Special role: single BB1, BB2)
First, BB1 and BB2 with winning numbers 1 and 2 will be described.

  BB1 and BB2 are “special role types” that serve as an opportunity to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player, and are different in nature from general role types (small role type and replay role type). This special role is, for example, a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small role type changes (for example, changes with a high probability) triggered by winning a combination of symbols (bonus role) corresponding to the special role, or special pull-in control. Transition to a special gaming state (so-called “bonus game”) such as a gaming state (so-called “challenge bonus (CB),“ challenge time (CT) ”) in which the number of drawn symbols of a particular symbol varies It is a role that becomes an opportunity, and in this respect, it is different from a small role type that does not shift to such a gaming state as a result of winning a prize.

  The combination of symbols allowed to win by winning BB1 is a combination of symbols “Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7” (red 7BB), and the symbols allowed to win by winning BB2 The combination of “white 7”-“white 7”-“white 7” is a combination of symbols (white 7BB). These BB1 and BB2 are “unordered pushing order”, but the combination of symbols can be stopped on the effective winning line only when the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing because of the pull-in control. . For this reason, when the rotating cylinder is stopped at the stop operation timing at which BB1 or BB2 cannot be drawn onto the effective pay line, the BB1 or BB2 is lost. In the following, for convenience of explanation, BB1 or BB2 may be referred to as “BB”, and a combination of symbols corresponding to BB1 or BB2 (red 7BB, white 7BB) may be referred to as “bonus combination” unless otherwise required.

(Bonus game)
When the bonus combination is won, the game is shifted from the next game to a special game state (bonus game) advantageous to the player. During this bonus game, the winning probability of a specific general role type increases (see the role lottery table in FIG. 24), and when a bonus game occurs, the average number of game medals per game increases compared to other game states. Thus, the player can acquire many game medals in a short game period. In this embodiment, the performance of the bonus game differs between BB1 (red 7BB) and BB2 (white 7BB), and the bonus game based on red 7BB is a bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game based on white 7BB. Yes. For example, in the case of white 7BB, the first predetermined number (for example, 109) or more game medals are paid out, and in the case of red 7BB, the second predetermined number (for example, 241) or more is larger than that. The bonus game ends when the game medal is paid out.

<About carry over of BB>
The special combination BB (BB1 and BB2) described above is set as a “carryover combination” that can carry over the winning flag (bonus winning flag) to the next and subsequent games. For this reason, in the case of winning BB1 or BB2, the winning state relating to the BB is maintained during the game period until the bonus combination corresponding to the winning BB is won, and during this time, all BBs are selected by lottery. Excluded from the target.

  In other words, in the bonus winning flag, the bonus winning flag is not newly established or duplicated. The state where the bonus winning flag is carried over is referred to as “bonus carryover game” or “BB internal winning”.

  On the other hand, a role other than BB (special role type) is set as an “uncarryable role” in which the winning flag cannot be carried over to the next game. During bonus carryover games, the internal lottery for general roles (small role type, replay role type) is performed as usual. For this reason, a duplicate winning state in which a bonus winning flag and a winning flag of another combination are simultaneously established may occur. In such a case, whether to win a combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is determined based on a predetermined pull-in priority. In this embodiment, regarding the replay role type, the small role type, and the special role type, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning role (winning role) is determined as “bonus role <small role <replay role (maximum It is determined that the pull-in control is performed with priority in the order of “priority” (small role priority control). As a result, in the case of a game in which the above-mentioned winning combination with BB is selected, the rotation of the spinning cylinder is controlled under this pull-in priority order.

(Special role: Duplicate BB1 to BB5)
Next, overlapping BB1 to BB5 (duplicating BB type) of winning numbers 3 to 7 will be described. In addition, in order to avoid duplicating description, it demonstrates omitting suitably the point substantially the same as said single BB1 and BB2.

  The duplication BB1 to BB5 has a role as a “duplicate role” in which a specific small role type and a single BB1 or BB2 can be elected redundantly. Specifically, these duplications BB1 to BB5 are: A specific small role type (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak watermelon, or strong watermelon) and a special role type (single BB1 or single BB2) can be won simultaneously. For example, duplicate BB1 is won The weak watermelon number 9 and the winning number 1 BB1 are to be won in duplicate (in this case, “winning number 9 + winning number 1”), and the overlapping BB1 is determined as the winning role In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the weak watermelon (weak watermelon) and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 (red 7BB) are placed in the winning-permitted state.

  In this case, in the game in which the duplicate BB1 is won, it is determined which of the winning combinations are preferentially drawn on the effective pay line based on the drawing priority order. In this embodiment, since the small role priority control is performed, in the game, first, the pull-in control is performed so that the weak watermelon can preferentially win. Note that the same event pull-in control is performed for the other overlapping BB2 to BB5. By providing such a duplicate BB role as a lottery target role, if a small role that can be won in duplicate with BB wins, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for a bonus game when the small role wins. .

  It should be noted that the above-described lottery winning combination, corresponding winning combination, payout, and combination of the types thereof are not particularly limited as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved. For example, the special role type (including the BB overlapping role) may be single, multiple types, or a configuration in which the special role type itself is not provided. As for the small role type (small role type or replay role type), the type and the number of types are not particularly limited as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved.

  In addition, for a lottery target belonging to the “push order specified role”, an allocation of a stop operation procedure for winning a specific winning combination (for example, what push order is used in order to win an advantageous winning combination or an unfavorable winning combination) And a winning rate (for example, a push order selection rate for winning an advantageous winning combination or an unfavorable winning combination) are not particularly limited as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved. For example, in this embodiment, the replays B1 to B3 are determined so that the winning rate of the corresponding replay role is 1/3, but not limited to this, the pressing order is set to 2 to 6 options, The winning rate may be set to ½ to 1/6 (the same applies to the lottery target roles belonging to other pressing order specified combinations). In addition, a specific winning combination does not necessarily win in a predetermined pressing order, but may be based on the stop operation timing and the pressing order. For example, if the push order matches the stop operation timing, an advantageous winning combination wins. If the stop operation timing does not match even if the push order matches, there is a disadvantage winning combination or a game that has no game value. It can be set as the structure which stops.

<Game form: FIGS. 6 to 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7, an outline of the game form (game characteristics) of the revolving game machine according to the present embodiment will be described while paying attention to each game state and transition control of these game states.

<Game state>
In the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in addition to the basic gaming state controlled on the main control unit (main control board) 400 side, additional control controlled on the sub control unit (production control unit 410) side is performed. Gaming state is provided. The game state (main control unit side game state) controlled on the main control unit side includes a general game (in this embodiment, RT0 game (normal game) to RT3 game) and a bonus game, and an effect control unit The gaming state controlled on the 410 side (the production control unit side gaming state (production state)) includes AT (assist time) games.

(RT (replay time) game)
The RT game refers to a “re-game probability fluctuation state” in which the winning probability of the replay role involving re-game is changed from a predetermined probability of the base game state. In this embodiment, the RT0 game having the lowest replay probability (here, the combined winning probability of the replay role type) is used as a base game state, and the winning probability of the replay role is higher than this RT0 game. A plurality of types of RT games (RT1 game to RT3 game) are provided as the “re-game high probability lottery state”. Specifically, based on RT0 game, the winning probability of the replay role is “RT0 game (ordinary game: low probability RT game) <RT3 game (bonus carryover game state (BB internal winning state)) <RT1 game (medium probability) RT game) <RT2 game (high probability RT game) ”(see FIGS. 6 and 24). The RT3 game and the RT0 game have substantially the same winning probability of the replay role as the RT0 game, and it is difficult for the player to detect the difference between these RT games from the viewpoint of the appearance rate of the replay role. It has become a thing.

  Each of the RT games is roughly classified according to whether it is an RT game related to a bonus carryover game state (BB internal winning state) or an RT game related to a bonus non-carryover game state (general game state). Specifically, RT games in the general gaming state are RT0 games to RT2 games, and RT games in the bonus carryover gaming state are RT3 games. Moreover, the transition control between the above RT games is performed in response to the winning or winning of a specific role, and the fun of the game is improved by making these plural types of RT games effective. In this specification, “RT0 game” having the lowest winning probability of the replay role is treated as “normal game”.

(AT game)
The AT game notifies the player of information related to the lottery result of the role by using the display means such as the liquid crystal display device 6, the decorative lamp unit 13, and the speaker 16 through image display effects, sound effects, light effects, etc. It is a privilege gaming state to play. This AT game is different from a game state (RT game, bonus game, etc.) controlled on the main control unit 400 side, but in a game state (effect state) controlled on the effect control unit 410 (effect control board 420) side. is there. The generation and termination of this AT game is managed and controlled by the “production state management means” that the production control unit 410 takes on as its function unit. This production state management means comprehensively manages a plurality of types of production states including a normal state (non-AT game (normal notification state)) and an AT game. The effect state management means includes a normal notification state (non-AT game) and an advantageous notification state (AT game) that can act on the player more advantageously than the normal notification state as notification states for notifying information related to the winning combination. : In this embodiment, it functions as “notification state management control means” for managing and controlling a plurality of types of notification states including AT1 games to AT3 games.

  In this embodiment, as already described, a plurality of types of push order defining combinations are provided. For example, in AT1 to AT4, a combination of symbols (advantageous winning combination) that can act advantageously can win according to the pressing order. However, during non-AT games (normal performance state), even if these roles are won, information for guiding the winning of the winning combination (stop operation procedure information (related to at least one of pushing order and stop operation timing) (Information) is not notified to the player, or even if it is notified, the probability of notification is low, so during non-AT games, a clue for winning an advantageous winning combination cannot be obtained, Therefore, during non-AT games, the game progress is more disadvantageous to the player than during AT games.

  On the other hand, during AT games, the information for guiding the winning combination winning combination related to the push order determining combination as described above is notified with a high probability, and the winning becomes extremely easy. For example, when one of AT1 to AT4 is won, for example, push order information for guiding winning of “Bell 1” which is an advantageous winning combination is notified to the player. Thereby, if a player carries out stop operation of the spinning cylinder according to the notification content, the bell 1 can be easily won. Therefore, during AT games, the game development is more advantageous to the player than during non-AT games. As a result, during AT gaming, the average profit (so-called “PAYOUT rate” or “base value”) that a player can obtain per game is improved compared to that during non-AT gaming. Information for guiding the winning of such a combination of specific symbols (including advantageous winning combination, disadvantageous winning combination, and other specific symbol combinations) (stop operation procedure information (at least push order and stop operation timing) An effect mode capable of notifying information on either one)) is referred to as “assist notification”.

  In addition, even if the same winning combination is determined, the content of the notification may be different. In other words, it is not necessarily the content that makes it possible to win a combination of symbols that favors the player (100%). For example, when the push order ruler is elected, not only the “correct answer push order” is notified, but the “incorrect answer push order” and the “correct answer push order” are notified in duplicate. (Such assist notification is referred to as “selective assist notification”). For example, when push order replay 1 is won, if the player is presented with a total of two push orders, one for pushing the promotion replay and the other for the normal replay, the player pushes either The order (two choices in this case) is followed, and the winning rate (correct answer rate) of the promotion replay by assist notification can be reduced to 50%. In this way, at the time of the stop operation of the spinning cylinder, whether or not to shift to another game state is determined by the player's arbitrary stop operation, so that a tension is given to the player and the game Can be improved. Further, different game characteristics can be created by changing the probability that the selective assist notification appears depending on at least one of the AT game type and the winning combination type. As a result, the gameability can be diversified, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Further, the content of the assist notification effect of the present embodiment can include information that only presents information regarding the pressing order to the player and does not present information regarding the type of winning combination to the player. This means that if the winning combination type itself is notified, it may be inconvenient if the winning combination procedure of the symbol combination that works for the player is found out depending on the combination of the combination without notifying the pressing order. Because.

  Further, in principle, the assist notification only presents information regarding the pressing order to the player, and does not present information regarding the winning combination type to the player. This is because, if the winning combination type is clearly indicated, depending on the composition of the combination, the player who knows the allocation of the pressing order will know the pressing order of the advantageous winning combination or the unfavorable winning combination. This is because the significance of generating assist notification is lost. For example, replays B1 to B3 have the same replay role type, but since different push orders that are different from each other are assigned, the player who knows the assigned role type is clearly indicated. The push order that becomes “push order correct answer” is revealed on the side, and the significance of generating the assist notification is lost.

  Therefore, as the effect mode of the assist notification, the information that the winning combination itself is revealed is not notified, but only the display (notification) content regarding the pressing order is different, and the effect mode itself shows the same or very similar effect mode. Information on the winning combination belonging to the group of the same system and the push order information can be notified, instead of notifying the information that the winning combination itself is found or notifying. For example, in the AT group of AT1 to 4, characters / images that specify the pressing order based on yellow are displayed, and in the replay role group, characters / images that specify the pressing order based on blue are displayed. You can make it appear. Further, as described above, only the push order information can be notified without notifying the group type. Thereby, at the time when the pressing order is notified, the player cannot clearly know the winning combination itself, but if the assist notification is made, it can be advantageous game development for the player, so the player Actively follow the contents of the assist notification.

(Assist notification of unquestionable push order)
Further, as described above, the assist notification basically guides the winning of a combination of specific symbols related to the pressing order defining combination, but it can also be generated for an unordered pressing order. For example, when a missing operation can occur due to the stop operation timing, the player can be notified of the stop operation timing at which the missing operation does not occur.

  The assist notification described above is controlled by the “assist notification effect control means” in which the effect control unit 410 serves as its function unit. The AT game of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of AT games (AT game 1 and AT game 2), and the assist notification effect control means is based on a push order notification effect selection table (not shown). The assist notification to be displayed is determined. In this push order notification effect selection table, the assist notification to be displayed is defined in association with the AT game type and the winning combination type.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7, the contents of each gaming state and the transition control between each gaming state will be described. 6 to 7 are state transition diagrams showing an outline of transition states between gaming states.

(RT0 game (normal game: low / medium probability RT game): upper left frame in FIG. 6)
As already described, the main control unit side gaming state includes RT0 gaming to RT3 gaming. In this embodiment, the initial gaming state is “RT0 gaming (normal gaming state)” (upper left frame in FIG. 6). It is supposed to be started. This "initial game state" is a transition (start) on condition that the gaming machine is turned on, the setting is changed, the main RAM is cleared, or the bonus game is finished. It is a gaming state to be played.

  In this RT0 game, the winning probability of the replay role is set to the lowest during all RT games, and the gaming state that acts adversely on the player compared to other RT games (the gaming state where the profit given to the player is lower) ). In addition, during the RT0 game, an AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery: FIG. 27) related to the AT game transition described later is also performed. During the RT0 game, among the replay role types, the replay A1 to A3 are in a game state that can be won.

  Paying attention to the main control unit side gaming state, the basic gaming state transition is from the initial gaming state RT0 game to “RT0 gaming → RT1 gaming → RT2 gaming → RT0 gaming” (the upper left frame in FIG. 6). → the left middle frame → the lower left frame → the upper left frame), and the like, a game transition state in which the RT0 game to the RT2 game are circulated is traced.

  Further, focusing on the main control unit side gaming state and the production control unit side gaming state, when the transition is made from RT0 game (normal game (RT0 game + non-AT game)) to RT1 game, AT1 game (upper right frame in FIG. 7). ) Occurs and the gaming state captured as the entire gaming machine is “RT1 gaming + AT1 gaming (preparation ART gaming)”. When this preparatory ART game is shifted to RT2 game, an AT2 game (lower right frame in FIG. 7) is generated and the gaming state regarded as the entire gaming machine is “RT2 game + AT2 game (this ART game: pseudo bonus game)” " Therefore, if attention is paid to the gaming state captured as the entire gaming machine, the game transition state in which the normal game to the ART game such as “normal game → prepared ART game → main ART game → normal game” is circulated is followed. ing. In the present embodiment, the profit given to the player is relatively increased due to the relationship of “normal game <preparation ART game <main ART game (pseudo bonus)”.

  In addition, if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the above ART game, the game is shifted to the “additional special zone (RT2 game + AT3 game)” that works favorably for the player, and the continuation condition of this ART game is advantageous (this book) In the embodiment, an advantageous gaming state in which the number of continuing games of this ART game is likely to increase is achieved).

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the transition between gaming states will be briefly described first.

  Referring to FIG. 7, in the above-described normal game (RT0 game + non-AT game), if an elective replay notification lottery (AT lottery: FIG. 27), which will be described later, is won, the generation of an assist notification for winning the promotion replay is allowed. The promoted replay notification condition is satisfied. When the promotion replay notification condition is established, if any of the replays A1 to A3 is won, the push order for winning the promotion replay is assisted, and the advance replay is awarded to the preparatory ART game (RT1 game + AT1 game). To be migrated. During this preparatory ART game, when the replays B1 to B3 are won, an assist notification related to the special replay is generated, and when the replays C1 to C3 are selected, an assist notification related to the normal replay is generated. In addition, when AT1 to AT4 are won, an assist notification related to Bell 1 (advantageous winning combination) is generated. Thereby, during the preparatory ART game, the game state can be shifted to the present ART game without reducing the game medals as much as possible.

  If any of Replays B1 to B3 is elected during the above-mentioned prepared ART game, the push order for winning the special replay will be assisted and the ART game (pseudo bonus: RT2 game + AT2 game) will be given by the promotion replay. It is transferred to. This ART game is continued until the number of continued games (for example, 40 games) is exhausted. During this ART game, when replays B1 to B3 are won, an assist notification related to normal replay occurs, and AT1 to AT4 are won. Then, an assist notification related to the bell 1 (advantageous winning combination) is generated. In addition, if CA Replay 1 or 2 is won during this ART game, it may be transferred to a special zone (RT2 game + AT3 game). During this special zone, the number of continued games in this ART game is added. In addition, the number-of-games lottery (see FIG. 30 described later) is preferentially performed. Note that when the fall opportunity is won in the preparation ART game, the main ART game, and the specialization zone, at least the main control unit gaming state falls to “RT0 game” which is a low-probability RT game.

  In short, the gaming state transition is promoted to a gaming state that works more favorably to the player than the current gaming state when a predetermined promotion transition condition is satisfied, and a predetermined falling condition is satisfied. The game state is shifted from the advantageous game state to the game state disadvantageous to the player.

(Freeze production)
Here, for convenience of explanation, the freeze effect according to the present embodiment will be described first.

  The present embodiment is configured to be controllable to a freeze state (delayed state) in which the game progress is delayed from the normal game progress based on a predetermined condition. This freeze state is generated mainly by controlling the progress of the game in a delay state more than usual so that the predetermined game operation process does not proceed for a predetermined time. In general, an effect mode that appears using a freeze state is referred to as a “freeze effect”. For example, the spinning effect (the main effect during the freeze) and the effect produced by the effect means (the sub effect during the freeze) appearing in association with each other, or each independently (independent) It is an effect mode to be put out, and what kind of freeze effect appears is determined based on at least the internal lottery result (winning combination).

  The “rotation effect” of the main side effect during the freeze means an effect (rotation effect) by dynamic or static movement of the rotation during the freeze (delay) or a combination thereof. The “dynamic movement of the spinning cylinder” is “anomalous rotation” that moves differently from normal rotation (rotating at a normal speed in the forward direction). Typical examples of irregular rotation include reverse rotation of the rotating cylinder, inching in the opposite direction, trembling from side to side or up and down, folding movement that rotates from the reverse direction to the forward direction and returns to the reverse direction, and each rotating cylinder is temporal. An irregular start that starts rotating in the opposite direction one after another, a temporary stop state when a specific pattern is aligned, and then a pseudo-rotation where the rotating cylinder re-rotates, a low-speed forward rotation, and so on. “Static movement of the spinning cylinder” means that all the spinning cylinders are stationary, that is, they are stationary during freeze (delay). The stationary state includes not only a stationary state in which all the cylinders are completely stationary, but also a state in which the player can recognize that it is apparently stationary. As described above, there are two types of revolving effects: one in which the revolving cylinder is “rotated” and the other in which the revolving cylinder remains “non-rotating”.

  The freeze state of the present embodiment is a time during which a freeze can occur in one game (for example, when the rotation rotation start lever 11 is operated, when the rotation rotation stop button 12 (12a, 12b, 12c) is operated, the entire rotation is stopped. The freeze state is configured to occur at one or more possible occurrence times due to time or the like.

  There may be a plurality of times when this freeze can occur in one game (for example, freezes A4, B4, C4, E1 to E3 described later (see FIG. 35A)). When freezes occur at these freeze occurrence possible times, these times can be trigger points (basic trigger points) for starting the freeze effect. An effect that can be triggered by the arrival of this basic trigger point is referred to as a “freeze effect”. This “production at the time of occurrence of freeze” is an effect mode at the time of start of freeze that appears with the occurrence of a freeze in that it can be triggered by the arrival of a basic trigger point (for example, see FIG. 23A). The occurrence of the freeze is notified by this effect when the freeze occurs. The effect at the time of occurrence of the freeze mainly serves as a main effect mode (for example, see FIG. 37, FIG. 38, “Battle effect” described later) that appears throughout all or part of the freeze period.

(Direction during operation (freeze during operation))
In addition, the above “freeze state” means that the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period (freeze time), so that the operation of the operating means for proceeding with the game progress (normal game progress) until the freeze time elapses. The operation of the operation means for the operation is “invalid handling (operation invalidation state)”. Specifically, for example, if a freeze occurs before stopping the full rotation, even if the rotary rotation stop button 12 is operated, the stop control of the rotary that is the stop target is not executed, and the It stays spinning. That is, the player is placed in a gaming situation in which the operation of the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12 does not work. Thereafter, when the freeze state is released, the original turning operation of the rotating drum is placed in an allowable state. That is, when the player operates the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12, the spinning cylinder that is the target of the stop can be stopped.

  However, in the present embodiment, even in the freeze state, the detection signal (operation detection signal) itself from the operation unit is accepted, and the freeze effect is changed by using the detection signal emitted from the operation unit. It is configured to be able to. Specifically, a specific effect can be displayed based on the operation means being operated during the freeze (freeze effect). The effect that appears due to the operation of the operation means is referred to as “effect during operation during freezing (effect during operation)”. Therefore, the effect during operation during freezing may occur as part of the effect when freezing occurs (occurs in duplicate with the effect when freezing occurs), or occurs independently when the effect when freezing occurs is not executed. There is also a case. In other words, the freeze effect (freeze effect scenario) includes a “freeze event effect” that can be triggered by the arrival of the basic trigger point, and the arrival of one or more different trigger points (operation of the operating means (trigger “Operation during freezing (operation during operation)” that can appear at the time of operation)) is included. The effect during operation during freezing may be either the effect during main freeze or the effect during sub-freeze, and these can be generated in duplicate or independently.

  The appearance control of the effect during operation during freezing will be described in detail. In the case of the present embodiment, the operating means (for example, the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11, the rotating cylinder rotation stop button 12 (12a to 12c), the 1 bet button 9, or the MAX bet button 8) even in the frozen state. The main control unit 400 that can receive the detection signals from these is configured to be grasped, and the main control unit 400 confirms that the operation means is operated during the freeze. As an effect control command, for example, “operation commands (operation commands 1 to 10 during freeze)” shown in FIG. 36 are generated (details of the operation commands during freeze will be described later). For example, when the rotation rotation stop button 12 is operated during the freeze, the rotation stop control for deriving and displaying the game result is not performed, but an operation command corresponding to the detection signal is generated, which is the main command. Transmission is possible from the control unit 400 side to the effect control unit 410 side. In this case, “in-frozen operation commands 1 to 6 (see FIG. 36)” corresponding to the operation of the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12 is generated.

  The production control unit 410 can use the “operation command during freeze” to display the “production during freeze operation” during the freeze. By using the generation of the middle operation command, it is possible to change the contents of the freeze effect depending on whether or not the operation means is operated. By using the operation means, it is possible to realize a “player participation type game production (player participation type production)” in which a player can participate.

  The “player participation type production” as described above is excellent in production effect in that the player can participate in the game production and enjoy the contents of the game. Specifically, when a player participates in the game production, the game production result gives a feeling that the game result itself has an influence, or the game production result Information related to the current gaming state (for example, information related to the winning combination, information about whether or not the AT lottery (see FIG. 27 described later) is successful, information about whether or not the game is successful, information about the number of games related to the extra lottery (see FIGS. 28 to 30 described later), etc. (Predetermined game information) can be notified.

  The “player-participation-type production” during such a freeze is simply more effective than the “player-no-participation-type” freeze production in which the freeze production proceeds automatically. Since the content of can be changed, the degree of freedom of freezing production is widened, and the variation can be abundant.

  In addition, the “player participation type effect” includes not only an effect mode in which the player intentionally participates in the game effect, but also an effect mode in which the player participates unconsciously as follows. It can be. In this regard, for example, when a freeze occurs after the first stop operation, such as Freeze A2 and Freeze F7 described later (in this example, the freeze occurs at the first stop operation: see FIGS. 35A and 35B). A representative explanation will be given.

  In a game situation in which freeze A2 or freeze F7 occurs, the player may stop the spinning cylinder as usual (normally, the first stop operation → second stop operation → second A series of three stop operations can be performed at a good tempo), and the second stop operation is not effective due to freeze (here, freeze after the first stop operation) (the original stop control of the spinning cylinder by the stop operation is disabled) ), The next lap cylinder cannot be stopped. For this reason, the player cannot operate the second stop operation, “Is the reaction at the time of the stop operation bad due to the abnormality of the rotation of the rotation of the rotating cylinder 12?” It is expected that the rotating cylinder rotation stop button 12 will be operated again. Using such a player's psychology, while triggering that the rotation rotation stop button 12 (other operation means may be used) is operated during the freeze while giving a sense of incongruity that the stop operation does not work (accompanying trigger) ) As a timing, an effect at the time of operation with freezing with impact (for example, an effect mode different from a normal notice effect mode: an impact effect) is made to appear.

  In this case, when the freeze occurs, the effect that the freeze has occurred is not generated, but the occurrence of the freeze is concealed so that the player can unconsciously participate in the game effect, and the effect during the operation during the freeze. Can give a sense of sudden occurrence. Such an effect during operation during freezing appears in a form that strikes the player's intention, so if an effect with an impact is adopted, it is considered that the impact received by the player will be considerably high. In this case, it is more preferable to conceal the occurrence of the freeze from the player in the stage before the occurrence of the freeze effect (in this example, from the start of the game to the stage before the first stop operation). . For example, it is preferable to make an effect appearing as if it was lost or to win another lottery target role and keep the occurrence of freezing in a concealed state.

  As described above, the freeze effect according to the present embodiment has some effect on the content of the effect developed during the freeze before and after the operation using one or a plurality of operation means (changes to the effect before and after the operation). Can be brought). In particular, as described above, the effect during operation during freezing that appears in a way that strikes the player's intention is considered to have a high impact level and increase the number of players who want to experience it again. It can be said that it is a freeze production excellent in production effect in improving the repeat rate (operating rate). It should be noted that the change in performance by the operation means can be caused when the operation means (the operation means related to the performance appearance target) is operated within a predetermined operation reception valid period during the freeze effect.

(Freeze production type: FIG. 34, FIG. 35A to FIG. 35B)
Next, various freeze effects according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35A to 35B.

  35A and 35B show the types of freeze effects (freezes A1 to E3, freezes F1 to F5, F7 to F9, and freezes G1 to G2), the contents of the respective freeze effects (mainly the contents of the spinning effect side), and It shows the correspondence with “freeze effect flag type (01H to 1AH, 1CH to 1DH (“ H ”means a hexadecimal number)” ”used to identify the freeze effect type internally. This freeze effect flag is set in the reel lottery effect process (step S17) of Fig. 8 to be described later, and is used when the desired freeze effect is generated. It is also used when determining the production mode (production content) of production (production by production means). Based on the grayed type and winning type, it is possible to determine the representation embodiment. Thus, winning be the same freeze effect type is different, different freezing in sub side effect may be generated.

  The types of freeze effects in the present embodiment include “freeze effect at start of rotation of the swivel (freeze effect at lever-on)” and “game result” depending on where the freeze occurs (basic trigger point). Freeze production before derivation (freeze production before stopping all cylinders) "and" Freeze production after derivation of game results (freeze production after stopping all cylinders) ". These freeze effects occur independently in a unit game (one game) or in a linked form. The number of basic trigger points that cause a freeze in one game is determined for each freeze type (freeze effect type in FIGS. 35A and 35B).

  The “freeze state” relating to the freeze effect is generated when the rotation rotation start lever 11 and the rotation rotation stop button 12 are operated at the time when the freeze can be generated (basic trigger point) according to the freeze effect scenario. . Therefore, among the freezes in accordance with these freeze production scenarios, the freeze that occurs when the rotation rotation start lever 11 is operated (the first freeze in the production scenario) is generated when the rotation rotation start lever 11 is operated. It becomes the same as the freeze that occurs.

  This freeze production scenario includes a scenario in which a freeze occurs once at a predetermined trigger point (single trigger scenario) and a scenario in which a freeze occurs at a plurality of trigger points with different freezes (multiple trigger scenario). There are two types of the latter scenario for multiple triggers. One of them is that the same type of freezes are linked according to the scenario. For example, as shown in FIG. 2 that occurs over the trigger point (at the time of the stop operation), that is, a freeze in which linkage is defined (hereinafter referred to as “same type linkage scenario freeze”). The other one is that different types of freezes are linked according to the scenario. For example, as shown in freezes E1 to E3 in FIG. 35A, the freezes before stopping the full rotation (during the first stop operation and the second stop operation). Or, one of them) and a freeze whose linkage is determined so that both the freezes after stopping the entire cylinder (at the time of the third stop operation) occur (hereinafter referred to as “heterogeneous linkage scenario freeze”) are caused.

  The above-mentioned similar linkage scenario freeze and heterogeneous linkage scenario freeze both contain static operations in which the freeze included in these scenarios temporarily interrupts (delays) the progress of the game. However, in addition to this, it is also possible to create a production scenario in which a dynamic action of activating irregular rotation during the freeze state is combined (for example, freeze C2, C3, C4 in FIG. 35A). And so on), it can be classified as a “special freeze” with anomalous rotation.

  The details of the freeze effect type (FIG. 34) divided by the trigger timing (freeze occurrence time) and the details of the freeze effect type (FIGS. 35A and 35B) will be described below.

(Trigger category: Fig. 34)
FIG. 34 is a table in which focusing on differences in individual trigger timings (freeze occurrence times) in a freeze production scenario, the freeze production types are divided by trigger categories α to δ, and the contents of the production are arranged according to the categories α to δ. It is. The occurrence of the freeze state is one of the triggers that generate the production during the sub-side freeze, and since it is not a precondition that the freeze production has occurred, the basic “trigger point (TP)” Can be called. Another trigger that generates the effect during the sub-freeze is when the operation of the operation means performed during the freeze effect is a trigger that generates the effect during the freeze operation. It is an “incidental trigger” because it is a prerequisite.

(Freeze at rotation start: Trigger category α)
The trigger section α “freezing at the start of rotation of the rotating cylinder (freezing at the time of turning on the lever)” indicates that the original operation of the rotating cylinder rotation starting lever 11, that is, the operation performed for the purpose of rotating the rotating cylinder at the normal time is detected. As a trigger timing, the operation or process (start of normal rotation of the spinning cylinder) which is the next stage in the game progress is set as a delay target, and the timing for enabling this is delayed by a predetermined freeze time (FT1), and as a result This is control for temporarily stopping (freezing) the progress of the game. Therefore, the end of the freezing time (FT1) is the end timing of the freezing at the start of the rotating rotation.

  Of course, during the freeze period, the operation functions for the purpose of progressing the game are effective for the operation means such as the rotation rotation start lever 11, the rotation rotation stop button 12, the MAX bet button 8, and the 1 bet button 9. Since the original game function does not work even if these times are operated (invalid operation), this state can also be regarded as an operation means system effect (operation means effect). In other words, freeze that makes the next stage of game progression (next stage following lever on) “operation of the operating means for the purpose of starting normal rotation of the cylinder” invalid (cannot be started by lever operation) It can be seen as a production inside.

  However, even during the freeze period, when the operation means is operated, an operation command indicating that the operation has been performed can be generated each time the operation is performed. Therefore, the production control unit 410 uses this as a trigger, that is, by receiving this operation command, the freeze sub-stage production (for example, production at the time of freeze occurrence) that has already occurred during freeze rotation at the start of rotation of the rotating cylinder, By making the effect during operation during freeze appear, it is possible to change the effect during the freeze side.

  Further, if necessary, in order to generate a main side effect during freezing, the operation of the operation means other than the progress of the game is validated (ON signal and / or OFF signal of the operation signal is accepted effectively). it can. For example, by operating “operating means” such as the spinning cylinder rotation start lever 11, the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12, the MAX bet button 8, and the 1 bet button 9, an irregular rotation is performed on the spinning cylinder during the freeze. When performing the above, it is free to associate the operation other than the original purpose of the operation means as an execution opportunity of the spinning effect (irregular rotation).

  Next, as described above, the spinning effect produced on the main side during the freezing includes the one that causes the spinning cylinder to “rotate” and the one that keeps the spinning cylinder “not rotated”. For example, during the freeze period, that is, before the entire spinning cylinder normally rotates (before entering the rising stage to a constant speed), It causes unusual rotation, such as reverse rotation, all at once or sequentially or irregularly (an irregular start with irregular start times). For example, step movement from 1 / n frames to multiple frames This is an effect that causes an “unusual rotation” to be performed and a combination of symbols showing a winning combination of a specific role as required. The spinning effect by the “rotating rotation” is to give the player a different impact than usual due to the rotating action of the spinning cylinder during the freeze, coupled with the invalid action of the first spinning cylinder stop operation. . In this embodiment, an effect of stopping for a predetermined number of seconds after reverse rotation by 1/4 frame, or a lock effect of rotating backward for a predetermined number of seconds is displayed. As the lever-on freeze accompanied with this irregular rotation, there are freezes A1, B1, and C1 shown in FIG. 35A.

  In addition, the spinning effect (non-rotating spinning effect) by “no rotation” is to maintain the spinning cylinder in a non-rotating state for the entire period during the freeze time (for example, 30 seconds in the case of freeze D1). In combination with the invalid action of the normal rotation start operation, the player has a different impact than usual. As a thing accompanied by this non-rotation, there exists freeze D1 shown to FIG. 35A.

  On the side of the production control unit 410, the sub-side production during freezing can be performed during the above-mentioned freeze when the lever is on. That is, the effect control unit 410 has received a “freeze type command” (for example, step S105 in FIG. 9, step S436 in FIG. 12 described later) according to the freeze effect flag type transmitted from the main control unit 400 side. On the basis of this, the sub-stage effect during the freeze (the effect scenario when the freeze occurs (including the effect scenario when the operation during the freeze is included)) is determined (set) (trigger category β, described later) The same applies to γ). For example, if a freeze occurs when the lever is turned on, for example, an opening effect such as blacking out the screen, the background is made a different color from the normal, and if necessary, an accessory is activated to create a more impactful image effect or sound ( (Sound / Voice) production and light production. Thereafter, in accordance with the set production scenario, an image production, a sound (sound / voice) production, a light production, and a production during operation during freezing are displayed in accordance with the progress of the rotation production. During the freeze, the LED built in the rotation rotation stop button 12 displays a red color indicating that the original stop operation (stop control operation) is impossible. Further, during the freeze period of the trigger category α, the effect control unit 410 side can make the effect during operation during freeze appear.

(Before derivation of game results (before stopping the entire trunk) Freeze: Trigger category β)
“Freeze before derivation of game results (freeze before stopping all cylinders)” for trigger categories β and γ is after all cylinders normally rotate in the forward direction, and all game cylinders stop and game results are derived. This is a freeze effect that may occur before

  This “freeze before game result derivation” is triggered by the detection of an original operation of the rotating cylinder rotation stop button 12, that is, an operation performed for the purpose of stopping the first or second cylinder during normal rotation. And delaying the timing for enabling the operation of stopping the second or third cylinder (the original operation of the stop button), which is the next stage in the progress of the game, by a predetermined freeze time (FT2, FT3). As a result, it is the control that temporarily stops (freezes) the progress of the game. Therefore, the end of the predetermined freeze time here (for example, FT2, FT3 in FIG. 34) is the end timing of the freeze before deriving the game result.

  “Freeze before game result derivation” in the trigger category β is a stop button related to the first stop operation among the stop buttons in which the LED built in the stop button has changed from “red” in which operation is disabled to “blue” in which operation is permitted Starts by detecting the original target operation for (for example, the left-handed rotation stop button), delays the timing for enabling the second stop operation, which is the next stage in the game progress, and freezes that is the delay time The process ends when the time (FT2) has elapsed. In many cases, the spinning effect is performed by “no rotation” (for example, freezes A2, B2, and D2 in FIG. 35A), and in rare cases, the spinning effect is performed by “anomalous rotation”. Performed (freeze C2 in FIG. 34).

  During the freeze period of this trigger category β, the “second stop button operation”, which is the next stage of the game progression (the next stage following the first stop operation), is invalid (the state where it does not work even if pressed). However, when an operation is performed, the operation command is generated. When the operation command during freeze (see step S502 in FIG. 14, step S512 in FIG. 16, and FIG. 36 described later) is received during the freeze period of this trigger category β, the effect during operation during freeze is displayed in the set production scenario. In the case where it is incorporated, it is possible to make a production effect during operation based on this appear.

(Before derivation of game results (before stopping the entire trunk) Freeze: Trigger category γ)
“Freeze before derivation of game results (before stopping all cylinders)” in trigger category γ is the stop related to the second stop operation among the stop buttons changed from “red” for disabled operation to “blue” for allowed operation Freeze is the delay time that is started by detecting the original target operation of the button (for example, the middle-rotor rotation stop button), delaying the timing for enabling the third stop operation, which is the next stage in the game progress, The process ends when the time (FT3) has elapsed. In many cases, the spinning effect is performed by “no rotation” (for example, freezes A3, B3, and D3 in FIG. 35A), and in rare cases, the spinning effect is performed by “anomalous rotation”. (For example, C3 and C4 in FIG. 35A).

  During the freeze period of this trigger category γ, “the operation of the third stop button”, which is the next stage of the game progress (the next stage following the second stop operation), becomes invalid (the state where it does not work even if pressed). However, when an operation is performed, the operation command is generated. When the operation command during freeze (Step S502 in FIG. 14 to be described later, FIG. 36) is received during the freeze period of this trigger category γ, Based on this, it is possible to produce an effect during operation during freeze.

(After derivation of the game results (after all cylinder stops) Freeze: Trigger category δ)
“Freeze after derivation of game result” in the trigger category δ is the original purpose of the remaining stop button changed from “red” to “blue”, that is, the stop button related to the third stop operation (for example, the right-turn cylinder rotation stop button) Starts when an operation is detected, delays the timing for enabling the payout process (winning determination process), which is the next stage in the progress of the game, and ends when the freeze time (FT4) that is the delay time has elapsed It becomes. Further, as the spinning effect, a spinning effect is performed by non-rotation (in a state where the rotation is stopped) (for example, freezes A5, B5, D5 in FIG. 34A, F1-F5, F9, G1- in FIG. 34B). G2 etc.).

  Even during the freeze period of the trigger section δ, an operation command can be generated by operating the operating means. When the operation command during freeze (Step S512 in FIG. 16 described later, FIG. 36) is received during the freeze period of this trigger category β, if the effect during operation during freeze is incorporated in the set production scenario, Based on this, it is possible to produce an effect during operation during freeze.

(Operation command type: FIG. 36)
When operating means such as the spinning cylinder rotation start lever 11, the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12, the MAX bet button 8, and the 1 bet button 9 are operated once (one reciprocation), an operation detection signal is issued. For example, when the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated once (one reciprocation), the switch acts and an operation detection signal is output. The main control unit can take out a trigger pulse that can be used for an operation command twice in total from the rise and fall of the operation detection signal. The first one is a signal (hereinafter referred to as an “ON signal”) generated at the leading edge (front edge) of the operation detection signal pulse when the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is moved from the original position to another position (when pushed down). "). The second signal is a signal (hereinafter referred to as “OFF”) generated at the trailing edge (rear edge) of the operation detection signal pulse when the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is moved from the other position to the original position (when pushed back). Signal "). The main control unit 400 side transmits the operation command using either the ON signal or the OFF signal.

  FIG. 36 is used for the type of operation command (command type) output from the main control unit based on the operation of the operation means, the information included in the command, the transmission time, and the appearance of any effect. The contents are summarized in a list.

  The “freeze type command” in FIG. 36 is issued when the rotation rotation start lever 11 is operated, and information that can specify the freeze type (freeze production type) (including information indicating that the freeze has not occurred) is included. included. This freeze type command determines the effect at the time of the occurrence of the freeze (the production scenario during the freeze production (for example, the entire scenario at times t0 to t9 in FIG. 37). Used.

  The “freeze command” is issued when a freeze command is generated, which is a trigger timing for producing a freeze. The freeze command has a transmission timing according to the freeze effect flag type, and includes freeze start instruction information. The freeze command is sent when a freeze occurs and is used as a trigger for starting the freeze production (main and sub sides). It does not determine the overall scenario like the freeze type command. It is created based on either the ON signal or the OFF signal when the lever is operated.

  The “Freeze end command” is transmitted at the end of the freeze time managed by the freeze timer, and includes information that the freeze effect has ended. Used.

  “Freeze operation command” is issued when operating means such as the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12, the MAX bet button 8, and the spinning cylinder rotation start lever 11 are operated. .

  Among them, “Freeze operation command 1” is a command generated when an ON signal is generated when the left rotation cylinder stop button 12a is operated, and “Freeze operation command 2” is an operation of the left rotation cylinder stop button 12a. This is a command generated at the time of the OFF signal. “Freeze operation command 3” is a command generated when an ON signal is generated when the mid-cylinder stop button 12b is operated, and “Freeze operation command 4” is a command generated when the mid-cylinder stop button 12b is operated. This is a command generated at the time of OFF signal. “Freeze operation command 5” is a command generated when the right-turn cylinder stop button 12c is operated, and “Freeze operation command 6” is a command generated when the right-turn cylinder stop button 12c is operated. This is a command generated at the time of OFF signal. “Freeze operation command 7” is a command generated when an ON signal is generated when the MAX bet button 8 is operated, and “Freeze operation command 8” is generated when an OFF signal is generated when the MAX bet button 8 is operated. Command. “In-frozen operation command 9” is a command generated when an ON signal is generated when the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated, and “in-frozen operation command 10” is a command generated when the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated. This is a command generated at the time of OFF signal.

  Any of the above-described operation commands 1 to 10 during freeze can be a trigger (accompanying trigger) that causes an effect during operation during freeze.

  Here, a case where not only an ON signal (ON operation signal) but also an OFF signal (OFF operation signal) is required will be described. For example, when the player holds the state where the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is pressed down for a while and then releases the rotation cylinder rotation start lever 11, a time difference is generated between the ON signal and the OFF signal. Also in the case of other operation means such as the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12 and the MAX bet button 8, a time difference is produced between the ON signal when pressed and the OFF signal when released. Therefore, a time difference is generated between the ON operation command and the OFF operation command for the freeze operation command. In the present embodiment, it is possible to generate different types of effects during an operation during freeze using the ON operation and the OFF operation, or the time difference between them.

  For convenience of explanation, a case where a freeze occurs after the first stop operation, such as Freeze A2 and Freeze F7 described later, will be described as a representative example.

  When the player operates the left-turn cylinder stop button 12a as the first stop operation, freezing occurs. In this case, it is preferable that the freeze is generated not by the ON signal but by the OFF signal. The reason is that the occurrence of the freeze itself is controlled by the main control unit 400 side, so it is a rare case, but if the occurrence of the freeze is triggered by the ON signal of the left cylinder stop button 12a, If the button pressed state (ON operation state) is maintained, the effect during the subsequent operation during freezing cannot be generated unless the left-turn cylinder stop button 12a is released (OFF state) (for the rotation effect). This is because the generation of the operation signal and the operation command during the freeze is hindered), and the freeze time ends and the freeze ends. For this reason, according to the type of freeze or the scenario of the freeze effect, it is possible to change the occurrence of the freeze to an ON signal or an OFF signal. For example, an ON signal can be used as an opportunity to generate a freeze when the operation type is a freeze type that does not execute the operation effect during the freeze operation, and an OFF signal can be used as an opportunity to generate the freeze effect. In the case of the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the occurrence of a freeze is generated by an ON signal that occurs when a predetermined operating means is operated.

  Returning to the description again, during the freeze (during the freeze production), during the entire or part of the period (predetermined operation acceptance valid period), for example, the first ON operation and OFF operation of the mid-cylinder stop button 12b, and the second time If a case where an effect during operation during freezing is generated when the ON operation is performed is described as an operation during operation during freezing, for example, the ON operation command is triggered when the mid-cylinder stop button 12b is first turned ON. (In this case, “In-frozen operation command 3 (see FIG. 36)” occurs), “In-frozen operation effect (sub-effect during freezing)” appears. After that, the “turning drum effect (main side effect during freezing)” is started in response to the OFF signal generated at the moment when the first middle drum cylinder stop button 12b is released, and the OFF operation command generated in this case (in this case) In response to the “OFF operation command 4 (see FIG. 36)”, an “in-frozen operation effect (freezing sub-side effect)” corresponding to the initial OFF operation command is displayed. Thereafter, again (second time), when the mid-cylinder stop button 12b is turned on, an effect during operation during freezing “effect during operation during freezing (sub-side effect during freeze)” based on the operation command appears. As described above, during one freeze period, when the operation means is pressed (ON operation) and / or released (OFF operation), the corresponding operation effect during freeze can be executed. Is possible.

  In addition, it is possible to notify predetermined game information using the “effect during operation during freeze”. The predetermined game information includes, for example, information related to the winning combination, AT lottery (see FIG. 27 to be described later) success / failure information, additional lottery (see FIG. 28 to FIG. 30 to be described later) result information, and the number of added games, Various game information relating to the game state (current main control unit side state and effect control unit side game state) and the like. In this way, if the “game information” that the player wants to know is announced using the effect during operation during freeze, the game result of this time will be displayed when the operating means is pressed or released. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and tension to the player, and to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, it is possible to make it possible to produce an effect during operation during freezing based on the time width during which the ON-OFF operation is performed (ON state duration). Specifically, for example, if the ON state duration time during which the OFF operation is performed from the ON operation of the middle-cylinder stop button 12b within the operation reception valid period is less than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), freeze The effect during middle operation does not appear, and when it is longer than the predetermined time (so-called “long press”), the effect during operation during freezing can appear. In addition, if the duration of the ON state of the mid-cylinder stop button 12b is less than 3 seconds, the first freezing operation effect is displayed, and if it is 3 seconds or more, the other freezing operation effect is displayed. As described above, it is also possible to cause different effects during operation during freezing corresponding to the ON state duration time.

  On the main control unit 400 side, the ON state duration can be grasped by counting the time from the ON signal reception to the OFF signal reception corresponding to the operation means. On the side of the production control unit 410, it can be grasped by counting the time from reception of the ON operation command corresponding to the operation means to reception of the OFF operation command. Therefore, both the main effect during freezing and the sub effect during freezing can appear based on the ON state duration time.

  In addition, based on the fact that the operation means is turned ON or OFF a predetermined number of times (number of times of operation), it is possible to produce an effect during operation during freeze. For example, if the ON operation (or OFF operation) of the middle-cylinder stop button 12b is confirmed five times within a predetermined time (count valid time), the effect during operation during freezing can be displayed. With respect to the number of operations of the operation means, the main control unit 400 side can grasp the number of times by counting the number of receptions of the ON signal or OFF reception corresponding to the operation means. On the side of the production control unit 410, the number of times of receiving the ON operation command or the OFF operation command corresponding to the operating means can be counted to grasp the number of times.

  Further, depending on the number of operations described above, it is possible to make a different effect during operation during freeze. For example, when the number of OFF operations of the mid-cylinder stop button 12b is the fifth, as described above, when a specific operation effect during freezing that can notify predetermined game information is displayed, the fourth middle When the body stop button 12b is operated, an operation during freezing that can notify predetermined game information at the next (fifth) operation, such as "Let's be up at the moment when the next stop button is released!" If an effect at the time of operation during freezing is announced to notify that a time effect will appear, the player actively operates the middle cylinder stop button 12b and presses the fifth middle cylinder stop button 12b. You can enjoy a sense of expectation and tension as to what information will be provided at the moment of release.

  In addition, when an effect during operation during freezing appears, a configuration may be used in which one of a plurality of effects during operation during freezing is selected by lottery. For example, during multiple freezes related to the winning role type, whether or not an AT lottery (see FIG. 27 described later) is successful, whether or not an extra lottery (see FIG. 28 to FIG. 30 described later), and / or the number of added games An operation-time effect can be provided, and one of these can be determined by lottery, and the determined operation-time effect can be displayed. In this case, depending on the above winning combination type, whether or not the AT lottery (see FIG. 27 described later) is successful, whether or not the additional lottery (see FIG. 28 to FIG. 30 described later) is successful, and the amount of the additional game, By changing the selection rate of the effects, information and expectation regarding them can be notified using the effects during operation during freeze. For example, a plurality of types of effects during the freeze operation corresponding to the light effects of the decoration lamps of blue, yellow, and red are provided, and the winning expectation of the AT lottery increases in this order of blue, yellow, and red. In this case, by changing the selection rate according to the degree of expectation, it is possible to make the effect during operation during freeze related to the degree of expectation appear. Thus, the player can actively operate the operation means and enjoy a sense of expectation and tension as to what information is provided by the effect during operation during freeze.

  The effect at the time of the freeze operation can generate the effect at the time of one freeze operation and the effect at the time of another freeze operation. Specifically, during the appearance of the freeze operation effect related to the ON operation, the freeze operation effect related to the OFF operation is duplicated, or the freeze operation effect related to the operation of the current operation means is displayed. During the outage, the effect at the time of the freeze operation related to the operation of the next operation means can be made to appear redundantly.

  For example, when a turning effect is displayed when the turning rotation stop button 12 is turned ON, and the turning rotation stop button 12 is turned OFF during the turning effect, Sub-freezing effects such as sound effects (for example, lightning sounds) and light effects (for example, flash effects) can be displayed. In addition, a turning effect is produced when the first turning rotation stop button 12 is turned on (or when the turning operation is off), and the second turning rotation stop button 12 is turned on during the turning effect. When an ON operation is performed (may be during an OFF operation), an effect using a sound effect, a light effect, a movable body accessory, etc. is displayed as an effect during a freeze operation, overlapping with the currently performed turning effect. Can be issued. In this case, various freeze operation effects are developed one after another in duplicate, so that an effect mode with impact can be realized.

  Note that the “operation reception valid period” may be provided as a condition for causing the operation effect during the freeze to appear. This operation reception valid period can be appropriately determined according to the freeze effect type. This is because the freeze time differs depending on the freeze effect type, and it is necessary to secure an effective effect time width. In short, when a predetermined operation means is operated during the freeze (during the freezing effect), the effect during the freezing operation can be displayed under a predetermined condition. For example, when a specific operation means (for example, the middle cylinder stop button 12b) is operated within a predetermined operation reception valid period and an OFF operation command is received, “the execution condition of the effect during operation during freezing is satisfied. ”Is displayed as a“ production during operation during freezing (here, sub-stage production during freezing) ”. In other words, even when the mid-cylinder stop button 12b is operated within the operation acceptance valid period, the effect during the freeze operation does not appear by the ON operation command, and the OFF operation command is effect-controlled within the operation acceptance valid period. On the condition that the part 410 side has received (establishment of the execution condition of the effect during operation during freeze), the effect during operation during freeze appears.

  What kind of operation means are used for the above-mentioned “execution condition during operation during freeze”, what kind of operation signal (ON / OFF signal) and operation command during freeze are used, and ON / How to determine the number of times of OFF operation, what time width the ON state duration is to be set, where to set the operation reception valid period during freezing, how many time periods the operation reception valid period is The various execution conditions such as “to be performed” can be appropriately determined according to the freeze effect type (in this embodiment, the freeze effect type illustrated in FIGS. 35A and 35B). In addition, it is possible to appropriately determine how many trigger timings at which the effect during operation during freeze is executed. This is because the freeze time and the effect scenario differ depending on the freeze effect type, and it is necessary to secure an effective effect time width. Therefore, according to the freeze effect scenario (effect content), game characteristics, etc., it is free to associate what execution condition with what freeze effect type.

  Further, when a plurality of types of effects during the freeze operation are made to appear during the freeze, it is preferable that the effects during each freeze operation have a certain relevance. A typical example is a story tailoring effect (for example, a story-like effect, a battle effect, a step-up effect, etc.). For example, the first freeze operation directs the content “The main character sets a bomb on the bridge”, the second freeze operation directs the content “explodes the bomb”, and the third (final) freeze. This is a scenario scenario with a story tailoring, such as “the bridge to be blown up collapses” or “the explosion failed to collapse”. In particular, as a result of a series of effects at the time of freeze operation (for example, as the contents of the effect at the time of the final freeze operation), if the above-mentioned “game information” that the player wants to know is notified, While enjoying the production of the story tailoring, the person can have a sense of expectation and tension about the result, which can further increase the fun of the freezing production. In the above example, for example, regarding the AT lottery, if the content is “the bridge to be blown up collapses”, the AT lottery is won. If the content is “failed to explode and failed to collapse”, the AT lottery is not won. The information such as can be notified by the effect during the freeze operation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, an effect based on the ON / OFF operation of the operation means can be displayed during the freeze. That is, it is possible to provide a timing for generating an effect during the freeze operation not only when the operation means is turned on but also when the operation is turned off. For example, as described above, an “effect during operation during freeze” appears based on receiving an ON signal, an OFF signal, an ON operation command, an OFF operation command, or the like during an ON operation or an OFF operation. Can do. Further, the “effect during operation during freezing” can also appear based on the number of ON / OFF operations or based on the ON state duration for which the ON-OFF operation is performed. Thereby, the appearance timing of the effect during operation during freeze and the degree of freedom of the type are expanded, and the freeze effect can be varied.

(Details of freeze production type: FIGS. 35A to 35B)
Next, details of the freeze effect type according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Freeze production at the start of rotation of the rotating drum: Freeze A1, B1, C1, D1 (01H to 04H))
These freezes A1, B1, C1, and D1 belong to the “freeze effect at the start of rotation of the rotating cylinder (freeze when the lever is turned on)” that is generated when the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated, and the freeze effect flags “01H” to “04H” are set. It is associated. The freeze at the start of the rotation of the rotating cylinder occurs when the operation of the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is used as a trigger point and the operation is performed here as a trigger timing. To be exact, this freeze is triggered by the winning of the freeze effect lottery (reel lottery effect process (step S17) described later in FIG. 8), and the rotation of the spinning rotation stop button 12 which is the next game operation stage. The action point at which the stop operation (first stop operation) becomes effective is delayed by a predetermined freeze time (delay time). Therefore, during the freeze time (during the freeze state), even if the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated, normal rotation of the rotating cylinder cannot be started (normal rotation start invalid state) Occurs.

  Among these, “Freeze A1” and “Freeze B1” are used for a predetermined number of seconds (about 2) by rotating the rotating cylinder back by 1/4 frame as a rotating effect during a freeze in which the normal rotation start of the rotating cylinder is delayed. This is a freeze effect that causes an irregular rotation to be stopped only for a second or about 5 seconds). Also, “Freeze C1” is a variation that during the freeze when the start of normal rotation of the rotating cylinder is delayed, the rotating cylinder produces 1/4 frame reverse rotation, stops for about 5 seconds, and reverse rotates about 10 seconds. This is a freeze effect that allows rotation. The “freeze D1” is to place the rotating cylinder in a non-rotating state as a rotating effect during a freeze in which the start of normal rotation of the rotating cylinder is delayed. It is a long freeze that invalidates the game progress objective operation (first stop operation) for the rotation rotation stop button 12 for a long time of 30 seconds from the beginning, and is one of the premium freeze effects with a very low winning probability. .

  However, in the state where the operation means effect that the game progression target operation (normal rotation start operation) of the spinning cylinder rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, and 12c does not work is generated during the lever-on freeze, other than the above Anomalous rotation can also be performed as a spinning effect during freezing. For example, a rotating effect that slowly rotates the left, middle, and right rotating cylinders simultaneously for a predetermined time, a rotating effect that starts rotating at different timings of the left, middle, and right rotating cylinders, A spinning effect where one or two of the right spinning cylinders rotate in a different direction from the other spinning cylinders, or a spinning effect where the left, middle and right spinning cylinders swing up and down within one frame It is. Further, within a predetermined freeze time, a rotating cylinder is configured such that the operation of the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 or the operation of the MAX bet button 8 is received one or more times and the above irregular rotation is performed each time. It is also possible to employ a “player participation type production” related to the production. Needless to say, the “player-participation-type effect” related to the above-mentioned spinning effect can be employed not only for the lever-on freeze but also for other freeze effects described later.

  The above-mentioned “player-participation-type effect relating to the spinning effect” can be executed by the operating means connected to the main control unit 400 side that controls the spinning effect, and is connected only to the effect control unit 410 side. It cannot be executed by operating a production button (not shown). The reason is as follows.

  The operation information related to whether or not the effect button has been operated cannot be transmitted from the effect control unit 410 side to the main control unit 400 side, whereby the effect control button is operated on the main control unit 400 side. It is not possible to grasp whether or not. As already described, in order to prevent an external go-to action, the production control unit 410 side functions only as an input in one-way communication, and some information is mainly received from the production control unit 410 side. This is because the control unit 400 cannot transmit. Therefore, due to the operation of the effect buttons, the spinning effect controlled on the main control unit 400 side cannot be changed. Therefore, the rotation effect can be changed by specific operation means (for example, the rotation rotation start lever 11 and the rotation rotation stop button 12 that can be directly detected by the main control unit 400 side). (12a-12c) It is limited to the 1 bet button 9 or the MAX bet button 8 or the like (see FIG. 4).

(Freeze production before stopping all cylinder rotations (05H-0CH): Freeze A2, B2, C2, D2, Freeze A3, B3, C3, D3)
These freezes A2, B2, C2, and D2, and freezes A3, B3, C3, and D3 occur before all the cylinders stop rotating (after the first stop operation to the second stop operation). It belongs to “Previous Freeze Effect (Freeze Effect Before All-Turn Rotation Stop)”, and Freeze Effect Flags “05H” to “0CH” are associated. These freeze effects before stopping the rotation of all the rotations of the cylinder are performed as long as the rotation of the rotation of the rotation of the rotation button 12 is stopped during the freeze period (freeze time) after the first stop operation or the second stop operation. Even if the second stop operation or the third stop operation is performed, it occurs with an interruption (invalid stop operation) of the game progress that the corresponding rotating drum cannot be stopped.

(Freeze A2 / B2 / C2 / D2)
Among these, “freeze A2, B2, C2, D2” stops one of the rotating cylinders 5a, 5b, 5c (for example, the left rotating cylinder 5a) that has started normal rotation and has entered a state where rotation can be stopped (for example, the left rotating cylinder 5a). The first stop operation (1 stop) is set as a trigger point, and the operation performed here is generated as a trigger timing (freeze effect after the first stop operation). Note that the occurrence of a freeze with the first stop operation as a trigger timing means that when freezes A2, B2, C2, and D2 are won in the freeze effect lottery (reel lottery effect process (step S17) in FIG. 8 described later). It is fixed.

  The above "freeze A2" is generated as a trigger timing when a first stop operation is performed to stop one of the rotating cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c that can stop rotating (for example, the left rotating cylinder 5a). After the first stop operation, during the predetermined freeze period (here, 5 seconds), “the operation to stop the remaining spinning cylinder (the middle cylinder 5b or the right cylinder 5c) that is the next stage of the game progress (the first cylinder 5c) This is a freeze effect (short freeze) that “2 stop operation)” does not work.

  “Freeze B2” occurs as a trigger timing when a first stop operation is performed to stop one of the rotating cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c (for example, the left rotating cylinder 5a) that can be stopped after the rotation of the rotating cylinder starts. After the first stop operation, for a predetermined freeze period twice as long as the above-mentioned freeze A2 (here, 10 seconds), one of the remaining rotating cylinders (the middle rotating cylinder 5b or the right rotating cylinder 5c). This is a freeze effect (middle freeze) in which the second stop operation to stop is not effective.

  “Freeze C2” is generated as a trigger timing when a first stop operation is performed to stop one of the spinning cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c (for example, the left spinning cylinder 5a) that can be stopped. After the stop operation, “one of the remaining rotating cylinders” is the next stage of the game progress following the first stop operation for a predetermined freeze period (here, 10 seconds) that is twice the freeze A2. The second stop operation to stop one (the middle turning cylinder 5b or the right turning cylinder 5c) does not work, and the remaining turning cylinder (the middle turning cylinder 5b and the right turning cylinder during the freeze) is used as a turning effect during the freeze. 5c) is a freeze effect (special freeze) in which both or one of them rotates specially. Here, the “special irregular rotation” means, for example, that the left turning cylinder 5a is stopped by the first stop operation, and at the same time the rotating cylinder (both the middle rotating cylinder 5b and the right rotating cylinder 5c) of other non-stopping operations are rotated. Or one) suddenly switches to slow movement (rotates slower than normal rotation speed), switches to high-speed rotation (rotates faster than normal rotation speed), and once it stops rotating (Vibration) or bounce movement. However, in some cases, as the “special irregular rotation”, irregular rotation such as 1 / 4-frame reverse rotation or complete reverse rotation as described in the freezes A1, B1, and C1 may be performed after the stop. .

  “Freeze D2” is generated as a trigger timing when a first stop operation is performed to stop one of the rotating cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c (here, the left rotating cylinder 5a) that can be stopped. After the stop operation, over the predetermined freeze period of 3 times the freeze A2 (here, 30 seconds), the next stage of the game progress following the first stop operation is “the remaining spinning cylinder. Is a freeze effect (long freeze) in which the “second stop operation for stopping the middle cylinder 5b or the right cylinder 5c” is not effective, and is one of premium freeze effects with a very low winning probability.

(Freeze A3 / B3 / C3 / D3)
Next, “Freeze A3, B3, C3, D3” is one of the remaining two rotating cylinders (here, the intermediate rotating cylinder 5b and the right rotating cylinder 5c) that continue to rotate after the first stop operation ( For example, the second stop operation for stopping the middle cylinder 5b) is set as a trigger point, and the operation performed here is generated as a trigger timing (freeze effect after the second stop operation). Note that the occurrence of a freeze with the second stop operation as a trigger timing is determined in advance when the freezes A3, B3, C3, and D3 are won in the freeze effect lottery (reel lottery effect process (step S17) in FIG. 8 described later). It is fixed.

  Among these, “Freeze A3” is generated with a second stop operation as a trigger timing to stop one of the remaining two cylinders that can be stopped after the first stop operation (here, the intermediate cylinder 5b), After the second stop operation, during the predetermined freeze period (here, 5 seconds), “the operation to stop the remaining spinning cylinder (the right rotating cylinder 5c), which is the next stage of game progression (third stop operation) "Freeze production (short freeze)".

  “Freeze B3” is generated as a trigger timing by a second stop operation that stops one of the remaining two cylinders that can be stopped after the first stop operation (here, the intermediate cylinder 5b). Freeze effect that the third stop operation to stop the remaining rotating cylinder (right cylinder 5c) is not effective for a predetermined freeze period (here, 10 seconds) twice the freeze A3 after the two stop operations. (Middle freeze).

  “Freeze C3” is generated when a second stop operation is performed on one of the rotating cylinders (for example, the middle rotating cylinder 5b) that can be stopped after the first stop operation, and the freeze is performed after the second stop operation. During the predetermined freeze period twice as long as A2 (here, 10 seconds), the “third stop operation for stopping the remaining rotating cylinder (right cylinder 5c)”, which is the next stage of the game progress, becomes ineffective. As the rotator effect during the freeze, the rotator effect (special rotator rotation as described in Freeze C3) in which the remaining rotator (the right rotator 5c) performs a special anomaly rotation during the freeze (special Freeze).

  “Freeze D3” is generated as a trigger timing when a second stop operation is performed to stop one of the rotating cylinders that can stop rotating after the first stopping operation (for example, the intermediate rotating cylinder 5b). Later, the third stage of stopping the remaining spinning cylinder (right cylinder 5c), which is the next stage of the game, over a predetermined freeze period (here, 30 seconds) that is three times the above-mentioned freeze A2. This is a freezing effect (long freeze) that “operation” does not work, and one of the premium freezing effects with a very low winning probability.

(Freeze A4 / B4 / C4)
The scenario of “freeze A4 / B4 / C4” has a plurality of trigger timings at which a freeze occurs before all game cylinders start normal rotation and before a game result is derived. Specifically, the first stop operation time before the rotation of all the cylinders is stopped as a first freeze occurrence trigger timing, and the second stop operation time is set as a second freeze occurrence trigger timing (first 1 and second freeze operation after stop operation). Note that the occurrence of a freeze with the first stop operation and the second stop operation as trigger timings was awarded to freezes A4, B4, and C4 in the freeze effect lottery (reel lottery effect process (step S17) in FIG. 8 described later). It is predetermined at the time.

  “Freeze A4, B4, C4” is similar to Freeze A2, B2, C2, D2 and Freeze A3, B3, C3, D3. It belongs to “Previous Freeze Effect (Freeze Effect Before All-Turn Rotation Stop)”, and Freeze Effect Flags “0DH” to “0FH” are associated with each other. In this respect, the freezes A4, B4, and C4 are the same as the freezes A2, B2, C2, and D2, and the freezes A3, B3, C3, and D3. However, the scenario of freezes A4, B4, and C4 includes a plurality of trigger timings for generating freezes in one game, and freezes A2, B2, C2, and D2 that include only one trigger timing for generating freezes in one game. This is different from the scenario of freeze A3 / B3 / C3 / D3. The freezes A4, B4, and C4 are not rotated even if the rotation rotation stop button 12 is operated in the second stop operation or the third stop operation during the first freeze generated by the first stop operation. This occurs with the interruption of the game progress (stop operation invalid) that the trunk cannot be stopped.

  “Freeze A4 / B4 / C4” is a freeze effect (linked freeze effect) that occurs during a unit game every time the freeze is stopped. Specifically, this is a freeze effect in which the freeze after the second stop operation occurs following the freeze after the first stop operation. In the case of this linkage freeze effect, the first freeze occurs with a first stop operation that stops one of the rotating cylinders (for example, the left rotating cylinder 5a) as a trigger timing, and the second freeze A second stop operation for stopping one of the rotating cylinders that can stop rotating (for example, the intermediate rotating cylinder 5b) is generated as a trigger timing.

  As described above, in the case of “freeze A4 / B4 / C4”, the occurrence of the freeze after the first stop operation and the second stop operation is only an event scheduled by the production scenario, for example, the second stop operation is performed. There will be no freezing effect lottery. However, after the freezing effect lottery at the time of operation of the rotation rotation start lever 11, the freeze may be generated after the second stop operation by passing through another freezing effect lottery.

  “Freeze A4” is a linked freeze effect in which the freeze A2 (five seconds after the first stop operation) and the freeze A3 (five seconds after the second stop operation) occur in succession.

  “Freeze B4” is a linked freeze effect in which freeze A2 (freeze for 5 seconds after the first stop operation) and freeze B3 (freeze for 10 seconds after the second stop operation) occur in succession.

  “Freeze C4” is caused by the above-mentioned freeze C2 (freeze for 10 seconds after the first stop operation) and freeze C3 (freeze for 10 seconds after the second stop operation + special irregular rotation of the other reel (last cylinder)). It is also classified as “special freeze” with special irregular rotation.

(Freeze production after all cylinder rotation stops (10H-12H): Freeze A5 / B5 / D5)
“Freeze A5 / B5 / D5” is a trigger timing of occurrence of freeze after the game result is derived, that is, the third stop operation is performed. Note that the occurrence of a freeze with the third stop operation as a trigger timing is determined in advance when the freezes A5, B5, and D5 are won in the freeze effect lottery (reel lottery effect process (step S17) in FIG. 8 described later). Yes.

  The freezes A5, B5, and D5 are generated after the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed and all the cylinders stop rotating. “Freeze effect after derivation of game results (freeze effect after all cylinders stop rotating)” And freeze effect flags “10H” to “12H” are associated with each other. In these freezing effects after all rotations of the spinning cylinder are stopped, a game value is given (for example, a game medal) until a predetermined freezing period elapses and the freezing effects are ended after the third rotation operation of the spinning cylinder rotation stop button. In this embodiment, a game determination interruption (freeze) occurs in which the winning determination process (step S20 in FIG. 8) is not performed and the grant time is delayed, and the game progress is advanced during the freeze. The operation of the operation means is invalid.

  Of these, “Freeze A5” is triggered by the third stop operation (stopping all-turn cylinder) that stops the last turning cylinder that can stop rotating, and after the third stop operation (after stopping all-turn cylinder rotation) Freezes that the game process at the next stage of the game progress is postponed for a predetermined freeze period (here, 5 seconds), specifically, the game medal payout process is postponed from the normal time. Production.

  “Freeze B5” is a freeze effect in which the payout of game medals is postponed more than usual for 10 seconds after the full-pipe rotation stops (after the third stop operation).

  “Freeze D5” is a freezing effect in which the payout of game medals is postponed for 30 seconds after the suspension of all-round rotation (after the third stop operation), and the winning probability is very low. one of.

(Linkage freeze production (13H-15H): Freeze E1-E3)
“Freeze E1 to E3” are linked freeze effects that are determined (linked) according to the scenario that the freeze effect occurs after stopping the rotation of all cylinders following the freeze effect before stopping the rotation of all cylinders. Flags “13H” to “15H” are associated.

  Specifically, this is a linked freeze effect in which the third freeze after the third stop operation occurs after the first freeze after the first stop operation and the second freeze after the second stop operation. In the case of this linkage freeze effect, the first freeze occurs with the first stop operation (for example, the stop operation of the left cylinder 5a) as the trigger timing, and the second stop operation (for example, the stop operation of the middle cylinder 5b) with the trigger timing. The second freeze occurs, and the third freeze occurs with the third stop operation (for example, the stop operation of the right cylinder 5c) as a trigger timing. These are only events scheduled in the middle of the freeze effect scenario. When the first stop operation, the second stop operation, or the third stop operation is performed, the freeze effect lottery is not performed again at that time. However, after the freezing effect lottery at the time of operation of the rotation rotation start lever 11, the freeze may be generated after the second stop operation by passing through another freezing effect lottery.

  “Freezes E1 to E3” are all three trigger points that are scheduled to occur through the freeze effect before stopping the rotation of all cylinders and the freeze effect after stopping the rotation of all cylinders, that is, the first stop operation, It is a special freeze effect (SP freeze effect) that has a very high impact in that a freeze effect is generated at each of the two stop operations and the third stop operation. Under this SP freeze effect, the game progress is interrupted each time the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation are performed, and the game progress is interrupted after the first stop operation ( The second stop operation is invalid), the game progress is interrupted after the second stop operation (third stop operation is invalid), and the game progress is interrupted after the third stop operation (payout execution delay).

  Of these, “Freeze E1” is a freeze effect with a 5-second freeze after the first stop operation + a 5-second freeze after the first stop operation + a 5-second freeze after all cylinder stops (after the third stop operation). This is a freeze effect in which the freeze times that occur three times are all the same 5 seconds.

  “Freeze E2” is a freeze effect with a freeze for 5 seconds after the first stop operation + a freeze for 5 seconds after the first stop operation + a freeze for 20 seconds after the entire cylinder stop (after the third stop operation). This is a freeze effect in which different freeze times of 20 seconds are mixed instead of the same 5 seconds.

  “Freeze E3” is a freeze effect with a freeze for 5 seconds after the first stop operation + a freeze for 10 seconds after the first stop operation + a freeze for 20 seconds after all cylinder stops (after the third stop operation). This is a freeze production with different freeze times.

(Freeze F1-F5, F7-F9 (Freeze F category): FIG. 35B)
Next, freezes F1 to F5 (16H to 1AH), freezes F7 to F9 (1CH to 1EH), and freezes G1 and G2 (1FH to 20H) will be described. In the following description, in order to avoid duplication, the substantially same contents as the above-mentioned “freezes A1 to E3” are omitted as appropriate.

(Freeze F1-F5 / F9)
“Freeze F1 to F5, F9” belong to “Freeze production after stopping all-round rotation” like Freeze A5, B5, and D5, and Freeze production flags “16H” to “1AH” and “1EH” are associated with each other. ing. The freezes F1 to F5 have the same freeze period (60 seconds in this case), but different freeze effects (effect contents) appear (this will be described later). However, freezes F1 to F5 may have different freeze times, and some of the freezes F1 to F5 (for example, freeze F1, freeze F3, and freeze F5) may have the same freeze time.

  “Freeze F9” is a freeze effect in which the payout of game medals is postponed for 60 seconds after the stop of all-rotation rotation (after the third stop operation), and is one of the premium freeze effects. .

(Freeze F7 / F8)
“Freeze F7 / F8” means that all the rotating cylinders stop rotating (after the first stop operation to the second stop operation) like Freeze A2 / B2 / C2 / D2 and Freeze A3 / B3 / C3 / D3. It belongs to the “freeze effect before game result derivation” (freeze effect before all cylinder rotation stops) that occurs in the latter) and is associated with freeze effect flags “1CH” to “1DH”.

  The above “freeze F7” belongs to “freeze production after the first stop operation” such as freezes A2, B2, C2, and D2, and the “freeze F8” is the “first” such as freezes A3, B3, C3, and D3. It belongs to "2 Freeze after stop operation", and each freeze time is 8 seconds.

(Freeze G1 / G2 (Freeze G category): Fig. 35B)
“Freeze G1 and G2” belong to “freeze production after all-round cylinder rotation stop” such as freeze A5, B5, and D5, and freeze production flags “1FH” and “20H” are associated with each other. Freeze G1 has a freeze time of 8 seconds, and freeze G2 has a freeze time of 5 seconds.

  For each of the above-mentioned freeze effects, the rotation of the rotating cylinder start lever 11 for operating the normal game (when operating the start lever), the operation of the first rotating rotation stop button (when operating the first stop), It exists in one game at the time of operation such as when the 2nd cylinder rotation stop button is operated (when the 2nd stop operation is performed), when the 3rd cylinder rotation stop button is operated (when the 3rd cylinder is stopped), when all the cylinders are stopped The time when the freeze state can occur (basic trigger point) is associated on a one-to-one basis. The freeze effect is configured by a freeze effect scenario that determines whether or not to generate a freeze for each of the possible times of occurrence of the freeze. However, for the production scenario of the sub-side effect during the freeze, the unit rotation start lever 11 is operated to start the unit game, the game result is output, and the rotation unit rotation start lever 11 is set to start the next unit game. In the period until the operation (lever ON-ON section), there can be one or more production possible times (accompanying trigger points).

  As for the main production effect during the freeze (rotation effect), in the case of the freeze effect types A1, B1, C1, D1 and F7, when the rotation rotation start lever is operated (with freeze), the first rotation rotation stop The production scenario is a combination of a button operation (no freeze), a second cylinder rotation stop button operation (no freeze), and a third cylinder rotation stop button operation (no freeze). These freeze occurrence times are abbreviated as the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. When the start lever is operated, the first stop operation is performed, and the second stop operation is performed. In the third stop operation, the occurrence of freeze is a combination of “present, absent, none, none”.

  Also, in the case of freeze effects of freeze effect types A2, B2, C2, D2, and F8, the occurrence of freeze occurs during the start lever operation, during the first stop operation, during the second stop operation, and during the third stop operation. “No, Yes, No, No” combination scenario, and in the case of freeze production types A3, B3, C3, D3, the occurrence of freeze is “No, No, Yes, No” combination. It will be used.

  In the case of the freeze effects of freeze effect types A4, B4, and C4, the occurrence of the freeze is “None, Yes, during the start lever operation, during the first stop operation, during the second stop operation, and during the third stop operation. In the case of freeze production of freeze production types A5, B5, D5, F1-F5, F9, G1-G2, the occurrence of freeze is “none, none, none, yes ”Is used.

  In addition, in the case of the freeze effects of the freeze effect types E1 to E3, the occurrence of the freeze is “None, Existence, Existence, Existence” at the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. ”Is used.

(Push order non-freeze production and push order regulation freeze production)
Here, the above-mentioned “freezes F1 to F5, F7 to F9, G1 to G2” are greatly different from “freezes A1 to E3” in the following points. If the freezes A1 to E3 win the freeze effect lottery, the occurrence of the freeze effect corresponding to the lottery result is deterministic. However, the freeze effects F1 to F5, F7 to F9, and G1 to G2 are generated when a predetermined push order is executed in a game in which the freeze effect trigger is won. That is, depending on the pressing order, a freeze effect may or may not occur (see FIGS. 33A to 33E described later). In this respect, “Freeze A1 to E3” and “Freeze F1 to F5, F7 to F9, G1 to G2” are greatly different. This will be described in detail below.

(Freeze A1 to E3 (freeze production regardless of pushing order))
For freezes A1 to E3, the freeze effect generated in the current game by the freeze effect lottery on the main control unit 400 side (see the reel lottery effect process in FIG. 8 (step S17), see step S103 in FIG. 9 showing the details). The type is determined, and the predetermined generation timing (for example, when the rotating rotation start lever 11 is operated, the first to third stop operations, etc.) determined for the determined freeze effect type is determined regardless of the pressing order. When it arrives, a freeze effect is generated. In this regard, it differs from a freeze effect type in which the pressing order is a generation condition, such as “freeze F1 to F5, F7 to F9, and G1 to G2” described later. A freeze production type that does not use the pressing order as a generation condition, such as freezes A1 to E3, is referred to as “push order unrestricted freeze production”, and a role that causes the push order unrequired freeze production to occur is “push order unrestricted freeze opportunity” Called.

(Normal freeze production lottery table: Fig. 26)
The freeze effect lottery (normal freeze effect lottery) is executed on the main control unit 400 side based on the “normal freeze effect lottery table” shown in FIG.

  In the normal freeze effect lottery table, the winning role type (specific winning role type (see FIG. 6)) is classified according to the current gaming state (RT0 game in the main control unit side gaming state, RT1 game, RT2 game: see FIG. 6). 26)) and the freeze effect type are defined in association with each other, and freezes A to D are selected in accordance with the selection ratio (lottery probability: determination value / lottery area size (128)) shown in the figure. The In addition, the numerical value (determination value) shown in the cell in the figure is the number of occupied areas of the determination value (winning area) with respect to the size 128 of the lottery area. For example, if the current gaming state is an RT0 game and the current winning combination is a single BB1, Freeze C is selected with a lottery probability “18/128”, and Freeze D is selected with a lottery probability “72/128”. It is like that.

  In the case of this embodiment, according to the degree to which the value given to the player is increased, the freeze time is classified in the order of freezes A to D. As belonging to each of the freezes A to D, there are freeze effect types A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C4, and D1 to D5 shown in FIG. 35A. Although not shown in order to avoid duplication, the freeze effect type indicates each of a plurality of freeze effect types that exist in this category, for example, “Freeze B”. Any one of the freeze effect types B1 to B5 belonging to this category is selected according to a predetermined lottery probability. In FIG. 35A, freeze effect types E1 to E3 are also listed as available.

  In the normal freeze production lottery, basically, a role having a low winning probability (rare lottery target role) is given preferential treatment with respect to a game value that can be given to a player when the freeze is triggered. Specifically, during the normal game (RT0 game), the following AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery: FIG. 27) or during the preparatory ART game (RT1 game), “the ART start game number addition lottery (FIG. 28)” ”Or“ the ART continued game number addition lottery (FIG. 29 to FIG. 30) ”in the ART game (RT2 game), etc., the lottery subject with a lower winning probability will be given preferential treatment. The selection probability (lottery probability) of the freeze effect type is relatively high. In this embodiment, as a general rule, it is determined that the degree of preferential treatment increases in this order of Freeze A, Freeze B, Freeze C, Freeze D, and Freeze E (not shown).

  Further, a plurality of types of freeze effects belong to the above-described freeze category, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one or more freeze effects belonging to each freeze category may be used. For example, there are 4 types of A1 to A5 for Freeze A, 1 type of Freeze B1 for Freeze B, 2 types of Freeze C1 to C2 for Freeze C, 1 type of Freeze D1 for Freeze D, Freeze The E section is a type of freeze E3. There may be only one type of freeze effect belonging to each freeze category, and what type of freeze effect belongs to what freeze category, and what type of freeze category is provided depends on the game characteristics. Can be set as appropriate.

(Freeze F1-F5, F7-F9, G1-G2 (push order regulation freeze production))
Next, the freezes F1 to F5, F7 to F9, and G1 to G2 will be described. These freeze effects differ from the above-mentioned “push order unquestioned freeze effects” and are freeze effect types that include the push order as a generation condition. Such a freeze effect is referred to as a “push order prescribed freeze effect”, and a role that triggers the push order prescribed freeze effect is referred to as a “push order prescribed freeze opportunity”. Below, for convenience of explanation, first, freezes F1 to F5 and F7 to F9 at the time of special AT winning will be described.

(Freeze production at the time of winning special AT (Freeze F1 to F5, F7 to F9): FIGS. 32A to 32C, FIGS. 33A to 33C)
In the present embodiment, when one of the special ATs 1 to 6 is won, the characteristic freeze lottery form described below and the generation form of the freeze effect are employed. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 32A to 32C and FIGS. 33A to 33C.

  In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, outlines of the freezes F1 to F5 and F7 to F9 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the special ATs 1 to 6 is won, depending on the gaming state (main control unit side gaming state) and the pressing order, different types of freeze effects are generated, or depending on the pressing order, A freeze effect is not generated (see FIGS. 33A to 33C described later). For example, if the special AT1 is won during the RT0 game (see, for example, the special AT1 column in FIG. 33A or FIG. 33B), if the pressing order is “left → middle → right (forward pressing)”, “freeze F5” A freeze effect (here, freezes F1 to F5) corresponding to a predetermined pressing order is generated, such as “freeze F2” is generated if “middle → right → left (clamping)” occurs. However, if the pressing order is “left → right → middle (nip)”, the freeze effect is not generated (the freeze effect is not generated). Note that freezes F7 to F9 are freeze effect types generated during the RT2 game, and this also corresponds to a predetermined push order as in the case of the above-described freezes F1 to F5. An effect occurs or does not occur (see FIG. 33C).

  In this way, because the types of freeze effects (including those that have not occurred) differ depending on the order of pressing, if the player performs a stop operation on the dark clouds, an undesired freeze effect may occur or the freeze may occur. The production will not occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, assist notification of the push order information corresponding to the freeze effect that should be generated in the current game (hereinafter referred to as “freeze assist notification”) The freezing effect type (including no freezing) is determined by causing the player to stop the operation according to the pressing order specified by the assist notification. In other words, the content of the freeze assist notification substantially specifies the type of freeze effect generated in the current game. This means that the main control unit 400 side does not determine the freeze effect type, but the effect control unit 410 side exclusively determines the freeze effect type. In this respect, like the freezes A1 to E3, the main control unit 400 side determines the freeze effect type itself, which is greatly different from the “push order unquestioned freeze effect” that occurs regardless of the push order.

  As to what kind of notification information is used for the above-mentioned freeze assist notification, on the effect control unit 410 side, the “freeze-use assist notification lottery table for special AT win” shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C is used. It is determined by “Assist Notification Lottery”. The content of the assist notification determined here substantially specifies the type of freeze effect to be generated in the current game (the same applies to the assist effect lottery tables for freeze effects shown in FIGS. 32D to 32E described later).

(Assist notification lottery table for freeze effect at the time of special AT winning: FIGS. 32A to 32C)
In the “Special AT winning freeze notification assist notification lottery table” shown in FIG. 32A, “Normal (non-AT game) special AT winning freeze notification assist notification lottery table” is used according to the current performance state. 32B, “Prepared ART game (AT1 game) special AT winning freeze notification lottery table for special effects”, and FIG. 32C “This ART / addition specialization (AT2 / AT3 game) special AT” “Assist notification lottery table for freezing effect at the time of winning” is included.

  In addition, about the said production | presentation state (production control part side game state), you may manage only AT game classification (non-AT game, AT game 1-3), but in this embodiment, the production state is further Subdivided and configured to be manageable as follows.

  On the effect control unit 410 side, the main control unit side gaming state is based on a specific effect control command from the main control unit 400 side (for example, a game information start command including main control unit side game state information). In order to maintain consistency with the game, the game is managed so that there is no problem in the production of the production. In other words, the production control unit 410 side is configured to be able to manage the RT game type and the AT game type (non-AT game) so that the gaming state of the entire gaming machine can be grasped.

  Details of the gaming state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7. For example, if the main control unit side gaming state is currently an RT0 game and a non-AT game, the effect state is set to “normal state (during normal)”. If the main control unit side gaming state is an RT0 game, and the promotion replay notification precursor AT game described later, the production state is managed as “promotional replay notification precursor AT game”, and the main control unit side gaming state Is RT1 game and the production state is AT1 game, it is managed as “preparation ART game (RT1 game + AT1 game)”, and if the main control unit side game state is RT2 game and AT2 game, “ART game (RT2 game + AT2 game)”, and if the main control unit side game state is RT2 game and AT3 game, “addition special zone (RT2 game + AT3 game)” It is managed.

  Note that, due to an erroneous stop operation of the player, a fall trigger may be won during the preparatory ART game (RT1 game) or the main ART game (RT2 game), and the player may fall into the RT0 game. For example, in the case of a fall during a preparation ART game, an inconsistent gaming state, which is normally not scheduled to occur, is “RT0 game + AT1 game”. Assuming such a case, the production control unit 410 side manages “RT0 game + AT1 game” as “prepared ART game during fall” as the inconsistent game state, and “RT0 game or RT1 game + AT2 game”, “ “RT0 game or RT1 game + AT3 game” can be managed as a “falling down ART game”. Therefore, when the production state is “AT1 game”, there is a case of a prepared ART game or a preparatory ART game during fall, and when it is “AT2 game”, it may be a real ART game or a real ART game during fall. sell.

  Therefore, the “notification lottery table for freezing effect during special AT win” during the preparation ART game (AT1 game) in FIG. 32B may be used during the preparation ART game or the preparation ART game during the fall. 33C is a “notification lottery table for freezing effect during special AT winning (AT2 / AT3 game) special AT win” in FIG. 33C, during this ART game, during the specialization zone, or during the fall It may be used in.

  In the present embodiment, when the player falls during the AT game 3, the game moves to the AT2 game, and the additional specialization zone is forcibly terminated. However, in the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that an inconsistent gaming state does not occur unless particularly required, and that the player performs a stop operation on the assumption that the player follows the assist notification contents.

  Each of the special AT winning freeze notification assist notification lottery tables is determined by associating the winning combination type (here, special AT1 to 6) and the freeze assist notification type corresponding to the freeze effect type to be generated. The freeze assist notification shown in the figure is selected according to the lottery (selection) probability (determination value / size of the lottery area (128)) shown in FIGS. 32A to 33C.

  As for the freezing assist notification type to be a lottery target, during the normal (non-AT game), the freezing assist notification type corresponding to the freezing F1 to F5 is the lottery target (see FIG. 32A), and the preparation ART game (AT1). During the game), the freeze assist notification types corresponding to the freezes F2, F4, and F5, including “no occurrence (non-occurrence)” of the freeze effect, are subject to lottery (see FIG. 32B), and this ART game (AT2 During the game) and during the specialization zone (AT3 game), the assistance notification types for freezes corresponding to the freezes F7 to F9, including “no occurrence (non-occurrence)”, are selected (see FIG. 32C). . For example, if the current game state is “normal game (RT0 game + non-AT game)” and the winning combination is special AT1, the “usual notification lottery table for freezing effect during normal special AT win” of FIG. 32A is referred to. The freeze assist notification corresponding to freeze F1 has a lottery probability “32/128”, the freeze assist notification corresponding to freeze F2 is the lottery probability “34/128”, and the freeze assist notification corresponding to freeze F3 is lottery. With the probability “20/128”, the freeze assist notification corresponding to the freeze F4 is drawn with the lottery probability “20/128”, and the freeze assist notification corresponding to the freeze F5 is drawn with the lottery probability “22/128”. It has become.

(Freeze effect selection table for special AT: FIGS. 33A to 33C)
Next, the “freezing effect selection table for special AT” shown in FIGS. 33A to 33C will be described. This special AT freeze effect selection table is used to determine the type of freeze effect actually generated in the current game based on the pressing order, and is used on the main control unit 400 side that controls the execution of freeze. (The same applies to the freeze effect selection tables shown in FIGS. 33D to 33E described later).

  In the “special AT freeze effect selection table”, as shown in FIGS. 33A to 33C, the current game state type (main control unit side RT0 game, RT1 game, RT2 game: see FIG. 6) "RT0 gaming special AT freeze effect selection table", "RT1 gaming special AT freeze effect selection table", and "RT2 gaming special AT freeze effect selection table". In addition, about the information (AT game classification information) regarding the production state, the information cannot be transmitted from the production control unit 410 side to the main control unit 400 side (for one-way communication for preventing fraud), The main control unit 400 cannot grasp the production state. Therefore, the main control unit 400 selects the special AT freeze effect selection table based on the RT game type managed by itself (the same applies to the freeze effect selection tables of FIGS. 33D to 33E). ).

  In each of the special AT freeze effect selection tables, the push order and the freeze effect type are defined in association with each winning role type (here, special AT 1 to 6), and the freeze effect type corresponding to the push order is determined. It is to be selected. For example, when the current gaming state (main control unit side gaming state) is “RT0 gaming” and the winning combination is special AT1, the “left middle right” push order is executed, and after all the cylinder rotation stops “Freeze F5” which is a freeze effect is selected (see the column of special AT1 in FIG. 33A). As a result, a freeze state for 60 seconds is generated after the entire cylinder is stopped.

(Regarding the generation process of freezes F1-F5, F7-F9)
Next, with reference to FIG. 32A to FIG. 32C and FIG. 33A to FIG. 33C, the generation process of the freeze effect relating to the freezes F1 to F5 and F7 to F9 will be specifically described. In the present embodiment, when one of the special ATs 1 to 6 is won, a desired freeze effect is generated as follows by game operation control in which the effect control unit 410 side and the main control unit 400 side are linked. It is like that.

  First, when one of the special ATs 1 to 6 is won by internal lottery on the main control 400 side (when determined as a winning combination), the winning information is an effect control command (for example, the inside of step S16 in FIG. 8 described later). The “game start information command”) set during the lottery process is sent from the main control unit 400 side to the effect control unit 410 side. When the effect control unit 410 recognizes that the special ATs 1 to 6 are won, the “Special AT win freezing effect assist notification lottery table (FIGS. 32A to 32C)” corresponding to the current effect state is referred to. The content of the freeze assist notification is determined by lottery, and the determined assist notification is determined at a predetermined timing before the rotation of the rotating cylinder such as when the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated or when the rotating cylinder is started. To appear. This is because the push order is related to the occurrence of the freeze effect, and thus it is necessary to make the assist notification appear at a stage before the rotating cylinder is stopped. When the turning operation of the rotating drum is performed, the main control unit 400 side refers to the “freeze effect selection table for special AT (FIGS. 33A to 33C)” corresponding to the current main control unit side state, The freeze effect corresponding to the pressing order is determined, and the freeze main effect (rotation effect) corresponding to the determined freeze effect is controlled and transmitted, and the freeze effect type information is transmitted to the effect control unit 410 side. On the production control unit 410 side, the sub-stage production during the freeze corresponding to the type of production of the freeze is controlled to appear on the production means. Thereby, the effect in the frozen state is realized by the main side effect during freezing (rotation effect) and the sub side effect during freezing (the effect by the effect means).

(Freeze production (Freeze G1) when Replay B is selected: Fig. 32D, Fig. 33D)
Next, the freeze effect when winning replays B1 to B3 will be described. In the present embodiment, a freeze G1 or a freeze G2 can occur as a freeze effect when the replays B1 to B3 are won. Here, the freeze G1 will be described, and the freeze G2 will be described later. The contents substantially the same as those of the special AT will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In the case of the present embodiment, during the preparation ART game (RT1 game + AT1 game), when the replays B1 to B3 are won, “freeze G1” is generated. Also in the case where the replays B1 to B3 are won, a freeze effect is generated according to the pressing order as in the case of the special AT described above. Specifically, freeze assist notification is determined based on the “freeze effect assist notification lottery table for replay B during preparation ART (during AT1 game)” shown in FIG. 32D, and “preparation ART (RT1 game during RT1 game)” shown in FIG. 33D. The “freeze production type corresponding to the push order” is determined by the “middle) replay B freeze production selection table”.

(Assistance lottery table for freeze effect at the time of replay B winning during preparation ART: FIG. 33D)
The above “assist notification lottery table for freeze effect during preparation ART (during AT1 game) replay B win” is referred to when the production state is a preparation ART game (AT1 game) on the production control unit 410 side. Similar to “Assist notification lottery table for freezing effect at special AT win” in FIG. 32C, it corresponds to the winning role type (here, replays B1 to B3) and the freezing effect type to be generated (here, freeze G1). The freeze assistance notification shown in FIG. 32D is selected in accordance with the lottery probability (determination value / lottery area size (128)) shown in FIG. 32D. .

  In the case of this embodiment, freeze assist notification for freeze G1 is selected at 100%. The pressing order specified by the freeze assist notification is the pressing order in which the special replays related to the replays B1 to B3 win.

  However, in the present embodiment, a part of the special replay push order related to the replays B1 to B3 is assigned in the push order that triggers the occurrence of the freeze effect, and the push order is notified by the freeze assist notification. Specifically, for example, in the case of the replay B1, there are two pressing orders for the special replay winning, “right middle left” and “right left middle”, which are set to the “right cylinder 5c” for the first stop operation. However, among them, “right middle left” is assigned as the pressing order that triggers the occurrence of the freeze effect (see the replay B1 column in FIG. 33D described later), and this pressing order is notified by freeze assist notification. The reason why a part of the pressing order is assigned in the pressing order that triggers the occurrence of the freeze effect will be described later.

(Preparation ART (RT1 game) Replay B freeze effect selection table: FIG. 33D)
Next, the “freeze effect selection table for replay B during preparation ART (during RT1 game)” shown in FIG. 33D will be described. This RT1 in-game replay A freeze effect selection table is used to determine the type of freeze effect actually generated in the current game, based on the push order, as in the “freeze effect selection table” of FIGS. 32A to 32C. It is used on the main control unit 400 side. By this “prepared ART (RT1 game) replay B freeze effect selection table”, in RT1 game, special replays related to replays B1 to B3 are won in a pushing order (here, a part of pushing order). In some cases, the freeze G1 is selected. In other cases, the freeze effect is not generated.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays B1 to B3 are won during the preparatory ART game, the “special replay” that is a trigger for the transition to the ART game (pseudo bonus) is won by the freeze assist notification. To generate “freeze G1”. The freeze G1 is used as a “pseudo bonus notification effect” for notifying the ART game (pseudo bonus) transition.

(When a specific role is won (Replay B1 to B3, AT3 to AT4) Freeze production (Freeze G2): FIGS. 32E and 33E)
Next, the occurrence of the freeze G2 when winning a specific lottery target combination will be described. In this embodiment, freeze G2 is generated when one of the replays, replays B1 to B3, and AT3 to AT4 is won in the “additional special zone (RT2 game + AT game 3)” described later. . Also in this case, as in the case of the special AT described above, a freeze effect is generated according to the pressing order.

(Assisted lottery table for freezing effect during AT / Replay B winning specialization: Fig. 32E)
32E, “Assisted lottery table for freeze effect during AT specialization / replay B win” in FIG. 32E is referred to when the production state is the specialization zone (AT3 game) on the production control unit 410 side. 32D As with the freeze effect assist notification lottery table of FIG. 32D, the freeze assist notification corresponding to the winning combination type (here, AT3 to 4 or replays B1 to B3) and the freeze effect type (here, freeze G2). The freeze assistance notification shown in the figure is selected according to the lottery probability (determination value / size of the lottery area (128)) shown in FIG. 32E.

  The push order specified by the freeze assist notification corresponding to the freeze G2 is the push order in which the advantageous winning combination (Bell 1) wins for AT3 and AT4, and the special replay wins for replays B1 to B3. Push order.

  However, in this embodiment, a part of the pushing order of the advantageous winning combinations relating to AT3 and AT4 is assigned to the pushing order that triggers the freeze effect generation (see columns AT3 and AT4 in FIG. 33E described later), and Of the order of special replays related to replays B1 to B3, a part is assigned to the order in which the freezing effect is generated (see the column of replays B1 to B3 in FIG. 33E described later). Notified by assist notification. The reason why a part of the push order is assigned in the push order that triggers the occurrence of the freeze effect will be described later.

(Freeze effect selection table for AT / Replay B during RT2 game: FIG. 33E)
Next, the “RT2 in-game AT / replay B freeze effect selection table” of FIG. 33E will be described. In the RT2 gaming AT / Replay B freeze effect selection table, the freeze effect type actually generated in the current game is determined based on the pressing order, similarly to the “freeze effect selection table” of FIGS. 33A to 33D. For this reason, it is used on the main control unit 400 side. With this “RT2 game AT / Replay B freeze effect selection table”, in the RT2 game, AT3 and AT4 are in the push order (in this case, a part push order) in which the winning winning combination (Bell 1) wins. In some cases, and for replays B1 to B3, freeze G2 is generated when the special replay is in the pressing order (in this case, a part of the pressing order), and in the other pressing order, Freeze production is not generated.

  In the present embodiment, when AT3-4 or replays B1-B3 are elected in the special zone for addition, freeze G2 is generated by freeze assist notification. This freeze G2 is used as an “addition notification effect” for announcing the number of additional games by an additional lottery (see FIG. 33) described later.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a push order in which a freeze effect (freeze state) occurs is assigned to a specific lottery target role, and by assist notification control (freeze assist notification) on the effect control unit 410 side, The occurrence of freeze production can be controlled. Thereby, the following specific effects can be produced.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a revolving gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-285173), since the occurrence of a freeze state depends exclusively on the internal lottery (depending only on the internal lottery and the freeze production lottery based on the result) Therefore, the occurrence of the freeze state was a coincidence product. As a result, the gaming machine side relates to predetermined game information, for example, whether or not a pseudo bonus is appropriate (for example, whether or not to shift to the present ART game or the preparatory ART game (the success or failure of an AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery: FIG. 27) described later)). Information, transition to a specific gaming state that favors the player, such as when shifting to a pseudo bonus (when transitioning to this ART game or preparation ART game), or when winning an extra lottery (FIGS. 29 to 30) There has been a problem that the freeze state cannot be generated at the timing when it is desired to notify information on winning or giving a specific game value, and accordingly, an impactful production cannot be produced.

  In particular, the production status managed on the production control unit 410 side (the production state and production process state managed on the production control unit 410 side), for example, whether or not a pseudo bonus is won or not (for example, the present ART game or the preparation ART game) Transition processing (whether to be a later-described AT lottery (elevation replay notification lottery)), promotion replay notification condition established state (AT lottery winning state), transition processing to this ART game or preparatory ART game, extra lottery winning, etc. Regarding the change of the state and the production state, the information cannot be notified to the main control unit 400 side from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, and the main control unit 400 side that controls the freeze state knows the production state as described above. As a result, on the main control unit 400 side, the timing at which the freeze state is generated depends solely on the lottery result on the main control unit 400 side. Can not generate a freezing effect corresponding to the effect conditions managed by the performance control unit 410 side, the degree of freedom of the freeze effect had become limiting.

  In addition, as in a conventional gaming machine, the main control unit 400 side exclusively determines the freeze state type, specifically, the freeze state based on the internal lottery result on the main control unit 400 side and the freeze effect lottery based on the result. In the configuration in which the type itself is determined and the freeze effect resulting from this appears in the game, the freeze state type depends solely on the lottery result on the main control unit 400 side, and there are variations in the freeze effect. It was restrictive.

  In addition, for gaming machines that are subject to No. 7 sales under the Law Concerning Customs Sales, etc. Installed in Pachinko Stores and the Act on Optimization of Business, etc. Since the program capacity of the ROM (corresponding to the ROM 401a in this embodiment) mounted on the main board (corresponding to the main control unit 400 in this embodiment) that controls the overall game operation is limited (same as above). Appendix Table 3 Technical standards related to the structure of gaming machines to prevent unauthorized modifications and other changes (related to Article 6)), the main control unit 400 is responsible for controlling the overall freeze effect. As the program capacity increases, the control burden also increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a push order in which a freeze effect is generated is assigned to a specific lottery object combination, and a configuration in which a freeze state (freeze effect) is always generated if the push order is executed, and the effect control unit 410 is configured. On the side, by notifying the push order information for generating the freeze effect, the generation of the freeze effect and its type are controlled according to the effect state (effect processing state) managed on the effect control unit 410 side. Be able to. In the present invention, the main control unit 400 and the production control unit 410 can be linked well so that the game machine can take the lead in controlling the occurrence / non-occurrence of the freeze without depending only on the internal lottery result. Thus, the above problem can be solved.

  According to the present invention having such a configuration, for example, the following operational effects can be achieved.

  (A-1) Control whether the freezing effect is generated or not generated according to the winning / non-winning (pseudo bonus shifting lottery result) to the bonus game (for example, pseudo bonus) managed on the effect control unit 410 side. be able to. In the case of this embodiment, when one of “Special AT 1 to 6” that works as a trigger for the transition to the preparatory ART game is won, any of “Freeze F1 to F5” is performed by assist notification control by the production control unit 410 side. Can be generated (see FIGS. 32A and 33A). Thereby, at the time of winning the pseudo bonus transition lottery, it is possible to generate an impact freeze effect and notify that effect, to congratulate the player, or to enlighten the player.

  (A-2) In addition, a freeze effect can be generated when the transition to the pseudo bonus (this ART game) is confirmed. In the case of the present embodiment, as already described, during the preparation ART game (the game state before the transition to the present ART game: the preparation state for the present ART game transition), it works as a trigger for the transition to the pseudo bonus (the present ART game). When one of the “replays B1 to B3” is won, “freeze G1” can be generated by assist notification control on the side of the effect control unit 410 (see FIGS. 32D and 33D). As a result, at the time of transition to this ART game (pseudo bonus), an impact freeze effect (pseudo bonus transition notification effect) is generated and notified to that effect, to congratulate the player, or to enlighten the player. can do.

  (C) In the preparatory ART game, a freeze effect can be generated when an additional number of main ART game continuation games described later (for example, 40 games) is confirmed. In the case of the present embodiment, when one of the “special AT 1 to 6” is won during the preparation ART game, “freeze F2, F4, F5” can be generated by the assist notification control by the effect control unit 410 side. (See FIGS. 32B and 33B).

  (D) In the ART game or the extra special zone, a freeze effect can be generated when the addition of the number of continuing ART game games is confirmed. In the case of this embodiment, when one of the special ATs 1 to 6 is won during the ART game or the specialization zone, “Freeze F7 to F9” is selected, and AT3 to AT4 or the replays B1 to B1 in the specialization zone. When one of B3 is won, “Freeze G2” can be generated by assist notification control by the production control unit 410 (see FIGS. 32C, 33C, 32E, and 33E). As a result, when the addition of the number of continued ART games is confirmed, an impact freeze effect can be generated and notified, and the player can be congratulated or the player can be raised.

  (D) By assigning a pressing order that triggers the occurrence of a freeze effect to a specific lottery subject (here, special AT1-6, AT3-AT4, or replay B1-B3, etc.) and a pressing order that is not, The occurrence of the freeze effect can be controlled as follows. This will be described in detail below. For convenience of explanation, AT3 to AT4 will be described first.

(About AT3 and AT4)
(D-1) As for AT3 to AT4, a part of the pushing order so that the above-mentioned freeze G2 occurs when AT3 is "middle left and right" and AT4 is "right and left middle" Are assigned in the order of pressing that triggers the occurrence of the freeze effect. The pushing order in which the above-mentioned freeze G2 occurs is a part of the pushing order in which “Bell 1 (advantageous winning combination)” wins.

  Therefore, even when the same winning combination is won by the assist notification control on the side of the effect control unit 410, it is possible to create a case where a freeze effect occurs and a case where a freeze effect does not occur. In addition, with regard to the pushing order specified roles such as AT3 to 4, it is possible to generate a freeze effect when an advantageous winning combination wins, and not generate a freeze effect when a disadvantageous winning combination wins (see FIG. 33E). ). Thereby, the following effects can be produced.

  In this embodiment, for AT3 to AT4, in the same manner as AT1 to AT2 having the same type of performance, during the ART game, the push order in which the advantageous winning combination side bell 1 (advantageous winning combination) wins is notified of the assist. Similarly, in the additional specialization zone, the push order in which the bell 1 wins is assisted in an assist manner, so that a large profit can be given to the player (see FIGS. 6 and 7).

  Here, if all the pressing orders for winning the bell 1 are assigned in the pressing order that triggers the freeze production (or if there is only one kind of pressing order for winning the bell 1), if AT3 or AT4 wins, Since the push order for winning the bell 1 is informed of the assist, a freeze effect is generated every time AT3 or AT4 wins. In particular, AT3 and AT4 do not function as extra lottery triggers related to the number of continued ART game games in this ART game (see FIG. 29), so that a freeze effect occurs even if no benefits are granted. Then, it gives distrust to the player. Further, as in this embodiment, when “Bell 2” on the side of the disadvantageous winning combination is a winning combination that acts as a fall trigger for falling to RT0 game, during “real ART game” that is a special game or “extra special” In the “communicating zone”, it is necessary to secure the player's profit by winning the bell 1 on the side of the advantageous winning combination while avoiding the winning of the bell 2.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing a plurality of types of pressing order for the bell 1 on the advantageous winning combination side to win, and assigning a part thereof to the pressing order that becomes a freezing effect generation trigger, by assist notification control on the effect control unit 410 side, In this ART game (RT2 game + AT2 game), the push order information that does not generate freeze G2 is assisted to inform the effect as the freeze production trigger (no freeze production is generated), and the specialization zone In (RT2 game + AT3 game), the push order information for generating the freeze G2 is assisted to notify and enable it as a freezing effect trigger (freeze effect can be generated), and the same advantageous winning combination side bell 1 wins Even so, it is possible to create a case where a freeze effect occurs and a case where it does not occur, and solve the above problems. So that the can be. Also, according to the extra lottery result in the extra special zone, the variation of the freezing effect is improved by determining whether or not the freezing effect is generated while winning the bell 1 on the advantageous winning side. The game can be interesting.

  In addition, the main control unit side gaming state of the additional specialization zone is the same RT2 game during this ART game. This means that, under the same game state (here, RT2 game) in the main control unit side game state, the function as the freeze effect trigger is invalidated / validated by the assist notification control on the effect control unit 410 side. Means that you can.

  In the conventional gaming machine, since the presence or absence of the freeze state (freeze effect) is controlled only by the main control unit 400 side, the presence or absence of the freeze effect is controlled according to the effect state on the effect control unit 410 side. Can not do it. In a conventional gaming machine, in order to provide a freezing effect triggering function having the function of AT3 or AT4 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state on the main control unit side is managed as a different gaming state in the ART game and the additional specialization zone. In addition, when the AT3 or AT4 is won, the ART game does not generate a freeze effect. In the specialization zone, for example, a control of generating a freeze effect by a freeze effect lottery as shown in FIG. 29 is required. However, increasing the RT game type and controlling the occurrence of the freezing effect leads to an increase in the control burden on the main control unit 400 side.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to invalidate / enable the function as a freezing effect trigger in the game state where the main control unit side game state is the same without increasing the RT game type without darkness. In this way, the production control unit 410 side plays a part in the generation control of the freeze production, and the variation of the freeze production is improved while avoiding an increase in the control burden on the main control unit 400 side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when AT3 or AT4 is elected in the additional specialization zone, the push order in which the freeze G2 is generated at the time of addition (at the time of privilege grant) is notified by the assist notification control on the side of the effect control unit 410, When not added (when no privilege is granted), the push order in which freeze G2 does not occur is notified (see FIGS. 32E and 33E), and the same gaming state (main control unit side gaming state and effect control unit) Under the same gaming state as the side gaming state), even when the same bell 1 wins, it is possible to create a case where a freeze effect occurs and a case where it does not occur. This means that even if the same winning combination is determined under the same gaming state, the presence / absence of the freeze effect can be controlled by the assist notification control (freeze assist notification) on the effect control unit 410 side. To do. As a result, the freeze effect can be varied.

(Replay B1 to B3)
As for replays B1 to B3, as shown in FIG. 32E and FIG. 33E, it is possible to create a case where a freeze effect occurs and a case where a freezing effect does not occur even when a special replay of the same advantageous winning combination side wins. Thus, the same effects as those of AT3 to AT4 described above can be achieved. Specifically, during this ART game, the push order for winning the normal replay is assisted while avoiding the fall replay, and the push order for winning the special replay is assisted in the added special zone. (Assist notification for freeze) can be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or to generate a freeze effect unnecessarily during the gaming state that does not act as an extra lottery trigger. In particular, “special replay” functions as a promotion trigger that triggers the transition from the preparatory ART game to this ART game, so it cannot appear in a dark state except in a special game state such as an additional special zone. , It is not preferable because the player has a suspicion that "some game value can be given?" In the present embodiment, such a problem can be avoided.

(About special AT1-6)
For the special AT1 to 6, a plurality of types of pressing orders that are the triggers for generating a freezing effect are assigned to a plurality of types of freezing effects, and different freezing effects can be generated for each pressing order (FIG. 32A). To FIG. 32C and FIG. 33A to FIG. 33C). In the present embodiment, this is utilized, and regarding the special AT, when a freeze effect corresponding to the pressing order in which the advantageous winning combination (special small combination 1 to 6) wins is generated, an additional game number lottery (described later with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 28) 30) and the like are increased (advantageous to the player). In addition, the winning probabilities of the special ATs 1 to 6 are substantially the same winning probabilities (may be the same), but some special ATs (for example, the special AT 6) are more than those won by other special ATs. The selection rate of the freeze F5 and the freeze F9 is preferentially given, and even if the same type of lottery target roles with the same or almost the same winning probability, the game value can be given light weight. Thereby, the freedom degree of the variation of the same kind of role increases and it can improve game property.

  (E) In the case of the inconsistent gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned “preparing ART gaming state during fall (RT0 gaming + AT1 gaming)” or “main ART gaming state during falling (“ RT0 gaming + AT2 gaming ”) ”Or“ RT1 game + AT2 game ”)), it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an irregular freeze effect.

  On the main control unit 400 side, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it is currently impossible to grasp the progress of the production on the production control unit 410 side. As already described, in order to prevent an external go-to action, the production control unit 410 side functions only as an input in one-way communication, and some information is mainly received from the production control unit 410 side. This is because it cannot be transmitted to the control unit 400 side. For this reason, only the RT game type is managed on the main control unit 400 side, and it is impossible to grasp whether or not the game state is inconsistent. This can cause the following problems.

  Due to a player's erroneous stop operation, for example, a pseudo-bonus is being performed (in the present embodiment, the present ART game), but a low-probability RT game (non-RT game) is changed from a high-probability RT game (RT game related to ART). If a fall opportunity (in this embodiment, a fall replay or a bell spill) falls into a low-probability RT game (in this embodiment, “fall”) In the case of a Nakamoto ART game (RT0 game + AT2 game) ”), a game having a“ relief function ”for relieving the player so as to return to the original ART game has been put into practical use. In the case of this embodiment, when an AT1 game or an AT2 game is occurring (during preparation ART or during this ART game), a fall trigger is awarded and falls to “RT0 game” (in this embodiment, during AT3 game) In the event of a fall, the game control side side gaming state is shifted to AT2 game), and during the RT0 game of the fall destination, “promotion replay notification” or “special replay notification” is performed, and RT1 game or RT2 game is again performed. The game is promoted to the preparatory ART game or the main ART game.

  In this case, for example, as a return game route in the case of falling during the ART game, if the replay A1 to A3 is won during the main ART game (RT0 game + AT2 game) during the fall, the push order of the promotion replay is selected. Notification is made, and then the player is promoted to “RT1 game + AT2 game” which is a fall state in accordance with the prepared ART game. Then, when the replays B1 to B3 are won during the “RT1 game + AT2 game”, the push order of the special replay is notified and the original ART game (RT2 game + AT2 game) is returned to and transferred to.

  When following such a return game route, it is preferable to avoid the occurrence of an irregular freeze effect. This is because if the freeze occurs in the dark, it will be misunderstood as a situation where a player can be granted some kind of privilege, which is not preferable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when following the return game route, in order to return to the current state from the falling state while avoiding unnecessary freeze production (unnecessary push order regulation freeze production), the above problem is solved as follows. It can be solved.

(When replaying Class B is selected during return)
In the case of following the return game route, when the replays B1 to B3 are won during the “RT1 game + AT2 game” according to the prepared ART game, the push order other than the push order corresponding to the freeze G1 shown in FIG. 33D is notified, Prevent freeze G1 from occurring. As a result, even if the replays B1 to B3 are won in the fall state, the freeze G1 does not occur, and the original ART game (RT2 game + AT2 game) can be restored.

(When special AT is selected during return)
In the case of following the return game route, when the special AT is won in the “falling down ART game (RT0 game + AT2 game)”, the push order information corresponding to “not generated” shown in FIG. Return assist notification) to prevent the generation of freeze effects (freezes F1 to F5). In addition, when the promotion replay prize is entered to shift to “RT1 game + AT2 game” in accordance with the prepared ART game, and the special AT is won in the “RT1 game + AT2 game” as the transfer destination, “freeze F2, F4” shown in FIG. 33B. , F5 "other than the press order information corresponding to the assist notification to prevent the freezing effect. Thereby, even if the special AT is won during the fall state, the freeze effect is not generated.

(When winning AT3 to AT4)
When the return game route is traced and the AT3 to AT4 are elected, in this embodiment, the effect control unit side gaming state in the fall state is set to “AT2 gaming” (in this embodiment, an extra special feature). When the player falls during the turn zone (AT3 game), the game control state is shifted to the AT2 game), and the push order in which the freeze G2 does not occur is assisted (FIG. 32E). As a result, the freeze effect does not occur even if AT3 to AT4 are won in the fall state.

  As described above, when the return game route is traced, the push order information that does not generate the freeze effect in the case of following the regular route is assisted notification (return assist notification) so that unnecessary freeze effects are not generated. The Thereby, it is possible to return to the current state from the fallen state while avoiding unnecessary freeze effects.

  In this embodiment, the freeze effect types shown in FIGS. 35A to 35B are illustrated as the freeze effect types, but the present invention is not limited to this. With regard to the “freeze state”, for example, (a) a game medal bet number setting operation (game medal insertion processing operation) by operating the 1 bet button 9 or the MAX bet button 8; The rotation of the cylinder by the rotation start operation (processing related to the rotation start operation of the cylinder), (c) the rotation of the rotation of the cylinder by the rotation stop button 12 (at least one of the rotation of the cylinder rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, and 12c). Rotation stop operation (processing operation related to rotation stop control), (d) game medal payout operation (process operation related to game medal payout operation), (e) re-game operation (replay for giving replay) A state in which at least a part of the game progress (game operation process) such as a process operation related to the operation is delayed (a state that is delayed from the normal game (game) progress) It can be controlled as Leeds. " Also, any effect mode that appears (executes) using this freeze state (the main effect during freeze (rotating effect) and / or the sub effect during freeze (effect by the effect means)) is “freeze effect”. May be called. In addition, the freeze state uses the occurrence of the freeze state itself as an effect from the point that it can give the player a sense of incongruity due to its occurrence, for example, the effect when the freeze occurs does not appear when the freeze state occurs, Such a form can also be handled as the “freeze effect”.

  The present embodiment described above can be configured as follows.

A game result display means (rotor device 210) for deriving and displaying a game result by a combination of symbols at the time of stopping each of the spinning cylinders, having a plurality of spinning cylinders on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed;
Starting means (rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11) for rotating each rotating cylinder under predetermined game start conditions;
In response to the starting operation of the starting means, a lottery for a plurality of types of winning combinations is performed, and a winning lottery means for determining a winning combination (S16 in FIG. 8, a winning lottery table (FIG. 24));
A plurality of stopping means (rotating cylinder rotation stop button 12) provided corresponding to each of the rotating cylinders for individually stopping the rotation of the rotating cylinders;
Stop control means (S19 in FIG. 8) for stopping and controlling the rotating cylinder so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be derived and displayed as the game result in response to the stop operation of the stop means,
Delay state control means (S17 in FIG. 8, processing related to freeze in FIGS. 9 to 16) for controlling execution of a delay state that delays the game progress from the normal game progress based on a predetermined execution condition;
Production means for performing production related to the game,
Production control means (production control unit 410) for the production means;
With
A revolving type gaming machine configured to be able to give a player a game value according to the game result,
In the role to be a lottery target of the role lottery means,
When the pressing order for operating the plurality of stop means is a predetermined procedure by the stop control means, a first combination of symbols accompanied by the provision of a first predetermined amount of game media is derived and displayed as the game result. On the other hand, when the pressing order is a procedure different from the predetermined procedure, the combination of the second symbols accompanied by the provision of the second predetermined amount of game media can be derived and displayed as the game result. Includes the push order ruler defined in (for example, AT3 and AT4)
The production control means includes
Assist notification for performing execution control on the effect means for notifying information relating to the pressing order corresponding to the winning combination based on the determination that the pressing order determining combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination lottery unit Control means (S619 in FIG. 21),
The delay state control means includes
In the case where the pushing order specified combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination lottery means, the delay state (for example, freeze G2 in FIG. 33E) is executed in the predetermined procedure, while the predetermined combination is performed. If the procedure is different from the procedure, the delay state is not executed.

  Note that, for example, an advantageous winning combination (bell 1) can be adopted as the first symbol combination accompanied by the provision of the first predetermined amount of game media, and the second predetermined amount of game media is provided. For example, a disadvantageous winning combination (Bell 2 (the number of payouts is less than that of Bell 1)) can be adopted as the second symbol combination accompanied by.

  The first symbol combination and the second symbol combination may be the same symbol combination (for example, Bell 1). In addition, the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination are the same symbol combination, and the first predetermined amount and the second predetermined amount are the same amount, in other words, the same performance. (A winning combination (for example, Bell 1)). That is, even when the same bells 1 are aligned, the pressing order in which the bells 1 are aligned can be assigned to the pressing order in which freezing occurs and the pressing order in which no freezing occurs (see FIGS. 25A and 33E).

  In the case of the predetermined pushing order, the delay order is not executed in one game state (for example, RT0 game, RT1 game), and the other game state (for example, In the case of (RT2 game), it can be determined that the delay state is executed (FIG. 33E).

In addition, the pushing order defining combination includes a first pushing order defining combination (for example, “freezing occurring combination such as AT1, AT2”) and a second pushing order defining combination (for example, “push order” including AT3, AT4, etc.). Regulation freeze opportunity "),
The delay state control means includes
When the first push order determining combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination lottery means, the delay state is not executed even in any of the predetermined procedure and a procedure different from the predetermined procedure,
When the second push order determining combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination lottery means, the delay state is executed in the predetermined procedure, but the procedure is different from the predetermined procedure Can be configured not to execute the delay state. In this case, the first pushing order defining combination and the second pushing order defining combination can be set in different pushing orders in the predetermined procedure.

  Further, the pushing order defining combination may include a third pushing order defining combination (for example, special AT1 to 6). The third pushing order defining combination can determine the pushing order in which the delay state is executed so as to be different between one gaming state and another gaming state (FIGS. 33A and 33B). Further, the third pushing order defining combination can determine the pushing order in which the delay state is not executed so as to be different between one gaming state and another gaming state (FIGS. 33A to 33C). Further, the third push order defining combination can be determined such that different delay states are executed according to the push order (FIGS. 33A to 33C). Further, even if the third pushing order defining role is the same pushing order (for example, “left middle right” of special AT1), different delay states are executed under one gaming state and the other gaming state. (FIG. 33A to FIG. 33C: For example, refer to the columns of freezes F5 and F9).

(About freeze production period)
Here, in the freeze occurrence period, the freeze occurrence period and the freeze effect execution period do not necessarily coincide with each other, and a time lag may occur. The reason is as follows.

  The “main-side effect during freezing (rotation effect)” according to the present embodiment is an effect mode that uses the operation mode of the crotch during the freeze. Therefore, after the freeze is released, normal game progression processing is performed. In the above, the spinning performance must be ended, and in the section where the performance is generated, the game result is derived and displayed after operating the spinning rotation start lever 11, and the winning determination process (step S20 in FIG. 8) is performed. The period until the transition is set as the target section (freezing at the start of rotation of the rotating cylinder, freezing before the stopping of the entire rotation, and freezing after the stopping of the entire rotation: see FIGS. 35A and 35B). Therefore, the execution period of the main side effect during freezing (rotation effect) is always included in the freeze occurrence period.

  On the other hand, the sub-stage effect during the freeze is not an effect that uses the operation mode of the rotating cylinder, but an effect mode that uses the effect means based on the effect control command on the main control unit 400 side. After the determination process (step S20 in FIG. 8), in order to start the next unit game, the insertion of a game medal from the medal insertion slot or the number of bets by the bet buttons 8 and 9 is set, so Even during the period until the rotation start lever 11 is operated, the present freeze effect can be made to appear (for example, the sub-side effect during the freeze can also appear during the period from time t8 to t9 in FIG. 37).

  Accordingly, although the freeze target section is less than the period corresponding to one game, the effect generation section of the freeze effect relating to the freeze is “predetermined effect until the operation of the rotation rotation start lever 11 by the next game + the next game. Time period ”(see, for example, the period from time t0 to time t9 in FIG. 37).

(Promotion replay notification during RT0 game: upper left frame in FIG. 7)
Returning to the description of FIGS. 6 and 7 again. During the above-described RT0 game (see the upper left frame in FIG. 7), when the replays A1 to A3 that allow the promotion replay are won, assist notification related to the promotion replay (hereinafter referred to as “promotion” under the predetermined promotion replay notification conditions). Abbreviated as “replay notification”). The promotion replay functions as a trigger for the transition to the RT1 game. Depending on whether or not the promotion replay wins, a “preparation ART game (RT1 game + AT1 game)” described later with an AT1 game (upper right in FIG. 7). It is determined whether or not it is possible to shift to (see the frame), and the player's profit is greatly influenced.

  However, in the present embodiment, the following conditions are attached to the occurrence of “AT1 game”. The AT1 game is generated when the promotion replay is won when the promotion replay notification is generated during the RT0 game (AT1 game is generated by the “regular route”), and the promotion replay is performed when the assist notification of the promotion replay does not occur. It does not occur when winning. For this reason, even if the player intentionally or accidentally receives the promotion replay and shifts to the RT1 game, the AT1 game is not generated, which is unexpected in the specification and design of the gaming machine. Is prevented from being given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery) related to the right to generate the promotion replay notification is performed and the lottery is won, it is assumed that the right to generate the assist notification related to the promotion replay is obtained and the promotion replay is performed. The notification condition is established (elevated replay notification condition is established). Then, under the notification condition, the promotion replay assist notification is generated when the replays A1 to A3 are won.

(RT0 gaming AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery) table: FIG. 27)
Regarding the above-described promotion replay assistance notification, specifically, the production control unit 410 side performs AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery) based on the “RT0 gaming AT lottery table (promotion replay notification lottery table)” shown in FIG. ) Is executed. In this “RT0 gaming AT lottery table”, a promotion replay notification lottery probability (determination value / lottery area size (128)) corresponding to a specific winning combination type and freeze production type (freezes A to D) is stored. It has been established. For example, if a weak cherry is won in this game and a freeze effect has not occurred, the promotion replay notification lottery is won with a probability of 2/128, and the promotion replay notification condition is established.

  Referring to FIG. 27, in the AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery) during RT0 game, whether the winning role type is weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, or strong cherry, and freezes A to D Whether or not there is an effect type, for example, freeze effect types A1 to A5 (freeze A category), B1 to B5 (freeze B category), C1 to C4 (freeze C category), D1 to D5 (freeze D category) shown in FIG. 35A ) The determination value differs depending on whether it accompanies or not, and when the occurrence of the freeze effect types of freezes A to D is accompanied, the winning probability is higher than in the case where it is not accompanied. Even if a freeze effect occurs, the determination value differs depending on which of the freeze effects A to D belongs to the generated freeze effect type, so that the winning probability increases in the order of freezes A to D. It has become.

  When the winning combination type is “weak watermelon, weak cherry”, only freezes A and B are generated, and freezes C and D are not generated. When “strong watermelon, strong cherry” is won, the cases of freezes C and D are added to increase the types of freezes, and there is a possibility that any of freezes A to D will occur. In particular, when a freeze of Freeze D occurs, the winning probability is 100%, and the promotion replay notification lottery is always won. In addition, when “Special AT” is won, the winning probability is 100% (AT lottery win (ART direct hit)), and it is always won in the promotion replay notification lottery.

  (Special AT1-6 winning in RT0 game (this ART direct hit route) and freeze)

  When the above special AT1 to 6 are won, it is assumed that a premium role has been won, and this win is triggered to generate a freeze effect (freeze F1 to F5) (see FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A), and start this ART game. An additional number of games (hereinafter abbreviated as “starting up number of games”) can be given. With these freezes F1 to F5, in addition to winning the promotion replay notification lottery, the player is informed that the right to grant the number of games added to the start is acquired, and the player's expectation and uplifting feeling is given. In the following, a game route from an RT0 game (ordinary game) to a later-described main ART game due to special AT1-6 winning may be referred to as a “real ART direct hit route (ART direct hit route)”.

  Specifically, when the special ATs 1 to 6 are won, a freeze assist notification lottery (FIG. 32A) is performed on the effect control unit 410 side, and a freeze assist notification corresponding to one of the freezes F1 to F5 is performed. At the same time that the effect control unit 410 is determined, the “starting game number addition lottery table during this ART game” shown in FIG. 28B is referred to, and the number of additional starting games corresponding to the determined freeze assist notification type is determined. Is determined by lottery (the lottery with the number of starting games added). Then, on the main control unit 400 side, a freeze effect corresponding to the pressing order is generated (here, one of the freezes F1 to F5 is always generated by following the freeze assist notification) (FIG. 33A). .

  When the above-mentioned number of additional games is given, the number of additional games is added to the initial number of main ART game start games (40 games). As a result, at the start of the main ART game, "40 games + α (addition) The number of games) ”is the initial start game number of the ART game (the initial value of the ART game continuation game number). In addition, even if a promotion replay notification lottery (AT lottery) is won by winning a watermelon role (weak watermelon or strong watermelon) or a cherry role type (weak cherry or strong cherry), the number of games added to the start is not granted. In this respect, the special AT is a premium role that gives the highest ranking game value.

  For the freezes F1 to F5, the number of games with a relatively large number of games added to the start is selected in this order. In order to notify this, when the freezes F1 to F5 occur, as the contents of the freeze effects, the start expectation degree of acquisition of the number of added games and the freeze effect (high expectation freeze effect) for notifying the number of games are present. It has come out. The freeze effects related to the freezes F1 to F5 are “direct hit effects” for notifying the promotion replay notification lottery (AT lottery) winning decision and the possibility of acquiring the number of premium games.

(Regarding the number of lots to be added to the ART game start game number when the special AT is won during RT0 game: FIG. 28 (B))
The “starting up game number” is determined by “this ART starting game number adding lottery” according to “the ART starting game number adding lottery table” shown in FIG. In the “art ART start game number extra lottery table”, the number of extra games (start extra game number) and the lottery probability (determination value / size of lottery area (128)) according to the freeze effect type (freeze F1 to F5). ) Is stipulated.

  The above-mentioned start added game number is determined by referring to the “freeze effect assist notification lottery table” of FIG. 32A on the production control unit 410 side (start added game lottery means), and this time according to the selected special AT type. The type of freeze effect to be generated (more precisely, assistance notification for freeze) is determined by lottery. Next, the “art ART start game number extra lottery table” shown in FIG. 28 (B) is referred to, and the start extra game number (“start extra G number” in FIG. 28 (B)) based on the determined freeze effect type. ) Is decided by lottery. For example, when the occurrence of freeze F2 is designated by the freeze notification assist notification lottery, the number of added games “+20 games” is selected with a probability of 64/128, and “+40” is selected with a probability of 64/128 (FIG. 28). (Refer to the column of freeze F2 in (B)). Therefore, at the stage where the freeze effect type to be generated this time is specified, the number of games to be added to the start is determined in advance.

  The notification of the determined number of games added to the start is performed as part of the freeze effect. In this embodiment, as a part of the freeze effect (direct hit effect), for example, an effect mode in which the expectation of whether or not the number of additional games can be acquired can be obtained, and in the case of this embodiment, the hero and the enemy character develop a battle. “Battle effect” appears, and the number of games added to the start is notified as an effect result of this battle effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect mode expressing a fleet battle in which the own ship (hero) and the enemy ship (enemy character) develop a naval battle (battle) is adopted.

  The basic effect content (effect scenario) of the battle effect includes, for example, the following effect scenario elements (A) to (D). (A) “Battle start effect” for notifying that the battle effect has started, (B) “Confrontation effect” expressing how the ship and the enemy ship face each other while entering the attack posture, and (C) the ship "During the battle" where naval battles with the enemy ship, and (D) "Victory effect" expressing how the ship is sinking the enemy ship as a "result effect" that informs the result of the battle production this time, or your ship It consists of each production scenario element, such as “Defeat production” that expresses how the enemy ship is attacked and wrecked. As the progress of the battle effect, first, the “battle start effect” is executed as the opening effect, and then the “confrontation effect” and the “in-battle effect” are sequentially executed. Then, a “winning effect” or a “defeat effect” is executed as an ending effect.

  The above-mentioned battle effect is a “freeze-time effect” that occurs at the time when all cylinders are stopped, and the contents of the effect corresponding to each of the freezes F1 to F5 are developed. Based on the result of the battle effect (the “victory effect” or “defeat effect”), the number of games added to the start is notified. It should be noted that instead of notifying “starting added game number” as the effect result of the battle effect, the ART starting game number itself with the added number of games added may be notified.

(About the battle effect related to Freeze F1)
For example, in the case of “Freeze F1”, the above “defeat effect” appears as an effect result of the battle effect. This “defeat effect” corresponding to the freeze F1 has effect contents for notifying that the number of added games (privileges) at the start is not obtained (the number of added games is zero).

(Battle effects related to Freeze F2 and F4)
In the case of “Freeze F2” and “Freeze F4”, as in the case of Freeze F1, “Defeat production” appears, and it is once notified that the number of games added to the start is not obtained, and the next game At the time of betting (BET), a “revival effect” will appear, which shows that an allied torpedo strikes and destroys an enemy ship by lightning. That is, the defeat production here is a “false production result”, and based on a predetermined condition (in the present embodiment, at the time of the next game bet (BET)), a “real production result” is restored. The production has come to appear. This revival effect is an effect content that can notify that the number of games added to the start is acquired.

  When the freeze F2 or the freeze F4 is selected, a predetermined extra game lottery is performed on the effect control unit 410 side. For example, referring to the columns of freezes F2 and F4 in FIG. 28B, in the case of freeze F2, 20 games (selection rate 50%) or 40 games (selection rate 50%) are selected by lottery, and freeze F4 In this case, 40 games (selection rate 37.5%) or 60 games (selection rate 62.5%) are selected by lottery. As to which game number has been determined, the number of games is notified by the above-mentioned revival effect. As a result, even when a defeat effect is generated, it is possible to get a sense of expectation for the number of games added to the start.

(Battle effects related to Freeze F3 and F5)
In the case of “Freeze F3” and “Freeze F5”, the above “Victory effect” appears as an effect result of the battle effect. This “winning effect” has the effect of notifying that the number of added games has been started.

  When freeze F3 is selected, 40 fixed games are added, and when freeze F5 is selected, the number of games to be added is larger than other freezes F1 to F4 (for example, 100 games). (See the columns of freezes F3 and F5 in FIG. 28B). This Freeze F5 is in a premium position, so the Freeze F5 victory effect is different from the Freeze F3 victory effect (for example, as a victory effect, the ship goes back to its home port while raising the Asahi flag. “A mediator (blessing production)” that expresses how people are blessed.

  As described above, if the player performs a stop operation on the rotating drum according to the assist notification for freeze effect, one of the freezes F1 to F5 specified by the assist notification is generated (FIGS. 32A and 33A). At this time, the “battle production (production at the time of freeze occurrence)” that occurs at the time when all the cylinders are stopped (at the time of the third stop operation) is the production corresponding to the freeze production types of freezes F1 to F5. The The point is that the freeze effect that occurs within the freeze (60 seconds after all cylinder stops (after the third stop operation)) is determined by the time width and timing of the freeze. A freeze of 60 seconds occurs after the third stop operation, and a freeze effect (battle effect) using a time width (effect time width) corresponding to this occurs. However, in the case of Freeze F2 and Freeze F4, after the freeze time of 60 seconds is over, and after completing the subsequent winning determination process and the current game is over, When a player performs a betting number setting operation (insertion of game medals) ("trigger timing"), a "revival effect" appears, indicating that the number of additional games has been acquired (in this case, the number of additional games is notified) Including). If this is described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 37 (here, since the description is about the freeze F section, the description of the first freeze and the second freeze in FIG. 37 is ignored), the third stop A freeze occurs with the operation as a basic trigger timing (t7 in the figure), and the “battle effect” occurs as a freeze effect (effect when the freeze occurs) over the period “t7 to 60 seconds” shown in the figure. As a part of this battle effect, the above “defeat effect” appears, and at the time t8 shown in the figure (the operation of the MAX bet button 8 is the trigger timing as the betting number setting operation), the “resurrection effect” appears. Will be issued. However, although this revival effect is an effect aspect in the battle effect, it is an effect aspect triggered by a trigger different from the effect during operation during freezing in that it appears after the freeze ends.

(Regarding the production of effects during operation during freeze)
In the above-described freeze effects (battle effects) related to the freezes F1 to F5, a predetermined operation effective period is provided, and the operation of the operation means during this period is used as an opportunity (using the operation means as a trigger timing). "Direction during middle operation" can be displayed. It should be noted that the effect during operation during freeze can be the effect during main freeze and / or the effect during sub-freeze (the same applies to other freeze types).

  For convenience of explanation, a case where an “enemy ship attack effect” representing an anti-ship attack from an enemy ship appears as a scenario of the “in-battle effect” will be described as a representative example.

  When a predetermined operation effective period is provided in the “enemy ship attack effect” and a predetermined operation means (for example, the 1 bet button 9 or the MAX bet button 8) is operated during the operation effective period, As an effect, a “result effect” corresponding to the type of freeze can be displayed. Specifically, in the case of freezes F3 and F5, for example, a “victory effect” that expresses that the ship avoids the attack is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of freezes F1, F2, and F4, a “defeat effect” that causes the ship to receive the attack is displayed. In this case, during the operation effective period, the player can recognize that the operation effective period is in effect, for example, “hit the rotating rotation start lever!” Or “press the MAX bet button!”. As described above, it is preferable to present a “prompting effect” that prompts the player to operate the operating means, and to prompt the player to operate the operating means. This prompting effect is made to appear for a predetermined time length on condition that a time length during which the effect during operation during freezing can be effectively appreciated is secured. The player operates the operation means while the prompting effect appears. Further, when the operation means is not operated within the operation effective period, it can be assumed that the operation means has been operated after the operation effective period, and the corresponding operation effect during the freeze can appear.

  In addition, it is possible to employ an effect mode in which the effect during operation during freeze is “step-up effect”, for example, “step SU1 → step SU2 → step SU3”. Specifically, every time the operating means is operated, a different effect during operation during freezing can appear. Thereby, for example, as the above “battle effect” scenario, it is possible to realize a freeze effect that can generate a plurality of types of operation effects during freeze (steps SU1 to SU3).

  This step-up effect will be described using the above-mentioned “enemy ship attack effect” effect scenario as an example. The enemy ship attack is triggered by the operation of the first (first) operation means (for example, the operation of the MAX bet button 8). "SU1 production (step SU1)" expressing that the player has entered the preemptive attack posture, and when the SU1 production is appearing or after the SU1 production has ended, An “SU2 production (step SU2)” that expresses how the enemy ship starts attacking and the torpedoes approach the ship suddenly appears. Then, when the MAX bet button 8 is operated for the third time, the “SU3 effect (step SU3)” corresponding to the “victory effect” that expresses how the ship avoids the torpedo, or the ship receives the torpedo. "Defeat production" can appear. Here, a story-up step-up effect appears, and the result of the effect appears in step SU3 in the final stage.

  Such operation during operation during freeze can improve the fun of the game because the player's feeling of tension and excitement with respect to the result (victory or defeat) can be obtained every time the operating means is operated. .

  It should be noted that the operation detection signal (ON signal or OFF signal) or the operation command (ON operation command) related to any operation means with respect to the timing (trigger timing) at which each step-up effect (step SU1, step SU2, or step SU3) appears. Whether or not to adopt the OFF operation command) can be appropriately set according to the contents of the effects and the game characteristics. For example, in the case of steps SU1 and 2, the “in-frozen operation command 9 (on edge)” relating to the MAX bet button 8, and in the case of step SU3, the “in-frozen operation command 10 (on OFF edge)”. ) "Can be used to produce a sub-freeze effect corresponding to this.

  Further, in the above example, a corresponding effect (steps SU1 to SU3) is displayed each time a predetermined operation means (for example, the MAX bet button 8) is operated once. About the frequency | count of operation of the operation means in which each step-up effect appears, it can determine suitably. For example, steps SU1 to SU2 appear when the MAX bet button 8 is operated once, and step SU3 in the final stage appears when the MAX bet button 8 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times). It can be configured.

  Further, when a predetermined operation means (for example, the MAX bet button 8) is in an ON state for a predetermined time (when so-called “long press”), a corresponding step-up effect may be displayed and the ON state is continued. The time may be the same time or different time for each step-up effect.

  In addition, it can be determined as appropriate as to which step-up effect will appear when the operation means is operated. For example, step SU1 can be triggered by the operation of the MAX bet button 8, step SU2 can be triggered by the rotation rotation start lever 11, and step SU3 can be triggered by the rotation rotation stop button 12.

  In the above description, each step-up effect (steps SU1 to SU3) is described as an effect during operation during freeze. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first step SU1 is frozen according to the content of the step-up effect. It may be configured so that it appears as “freezing occurrence effect” at the time of occurrence, and the next steps SU2 to SU3 appear as “freezing operation effects”.

  As for the selection rates of the above-mentioned freezes F1 to F5, as shown in FIG. 32A, special AT1, special AT3, and special AT5 have the same selection rate, and special AT2 and special AT4 have the same selection rate. AT6 is determined so that the selection rate of the high expectation freeze effect is given preferential treatment over other special ATs. Each special AT has substantially the same internal lottery probability, but “special AT6” with a high degree of preferential treatment has a lower probability than other special ATs from the viewpoint that a high profit can be given. It is preferable to determine to.

  Note that in this embodiment, even if the player performs an erroneous stop operation or a push order that intentionally ignores the assist notification for freeze production, the number of additional games to be added is determined by the lottery drawing for assist notification for freeze production. The number of games corresponding to the produced freeze effect is added (as described above, because the number of games added to the game is determined internally when the freeze effect is specified), and the player Can not control the profits that are intentionally granted. In addition, in order to strictly observe the pressing order specified by the freeze effect assist notification, when a pressing order different from the notification content is executed, the number of games added to the start is set to “zero” as a penalty (originally The number of games granted is invalidated), or the number of games that is smaller than the number of start additional games originally given (for example, if it is freeze F2, for example, 10 games are added (originally 20 games or 40 games are added) )) May be given. In this case, it is preferable that a “warning effect” for warning the player that the wrong pressing order has been executed appears instead of the freeze effect.

  In the above description, the number of games added to the start is added to the initial number of main ART start games (specified number of continued games: 40 games here). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and freezes F1 to F5 are added. A corresponding fixed number of games may be set as the number of ART game start games. For example, Freeze F1 may be 40 games, Freeze F2 may be 50 games, Freeze F3 may be 70 games, Freeze F4 may be 80 games, and Freeze F5 may be 140 games (premium start game number).

  In addition, all or some of the production scenario elements such as “battle start production”, “confrontation production”, “combat production”, “victory production”, and “defeat production” related to the freeze production (battle production) in freezes F1 to F5 are appearing. The main effect during freezing (for example, a spinning effect accompanied by an irregular rotating operation of the spinning cylinder) can be executed. Along with such a swirl effect, the above-mentioned battle effect is generated by generating a sub-side effect during freezing with an impact video (image display effect), sound (sound effect), and light decoration (light effect). It can be even more exciting and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, with regard to the promotion replay notification lottery, basically, focusing on the winning probability of the role and / or the occurrence probability of the freeze effect, the lower the winning probability or the occurrence probability, the higher the promotion. The winning probability by the replay notification lottery is determined to be high (see FIG. 26 for the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect).

  Further, in the promotion replay notification lottery and the freeze production lottery, the lost probability and AT roles (AT1 to AT4) having a relatively high winning probability are excluded (the normal freeze production lottery table in FIG. 26 and the RT0 game in FIG. 27). AT lottery (see promotion replay announcement lottery table). In addition, the type of the role subject to execution of the promotion replay notification lottery (AT lottery) (promotion replay notification lottery opportunity (AT lottery opportunity)) and the winning probability of the promotion replay notification lottery are not limited to those exemplified in this embodiment. It can be changed as appropriate according to game playability.

  The promotion replay notification lottery triggers (weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, special AT1-6) are related to the opportunity to establish the promotion replay notification condition by the promotion replay notification lottery. If attention is focused on the fact that the establishment of is a condition for transitioning to AT gaming, it will serve as a trigger for transitioning to AT gaming. Such a role that can be an opportunity to shift to an AT game is referred to as an “AT game transfer trigger (privilege game transfer trigger)”. The AT game transition trigger can be said to belong to the “state transition trigger” in that it is a transition trigger for another gaming state (here, the production control unit side gaming state).

(Advance Replay Announcement AT Game: Upper left frame in FIG. 7)
When the above-mentioned promotion replay notification lottery is won, the promotion replay notification condition is established, and after the promotion replay notification condition is established, when any of the replays A1 to A3 is won, the promotion replay notification is generated in the winning game. . In addition, when winning the promotion replay notification lottery, the direct hit effect in the case of a special AT is different from the direct hit effect in the case of a watermelon role or a cherry role as a win effect for notifying a player to that effect. Generate a winning effect.

  Here, after the above-mentioned promotion replay notification condition is established, the game period until the replays A1 to A3 are elected is “the advance replay notification precursor game (promotional replay notification precursor AT game” in that the generation of the assist notification is scheduled. ) ", And the gaming state captured as the entire gaming machine is" RT0 game + advance replay notification precursor game (promotion replay notification precursor AT game) ".

(Α. Gaming state with warning game period after notification condition is established)
In the above description, the promotion replay notification is generated in the winning game won by the replays A1 to A3. However, the following prelude period may be provided.

  If the promotion replay notification lottery is won, the right to generate the promotion replay notification may be obtained, and the execution of the generated right may be temporarily suspended, and the promotion replay notification condition may be established based on establishment of a predetermined notification release condition. .

  For example, the number of precursor games (for example, 24 games) until the occurrence of the promotion replay notification is allowed, and the notification release condition is satisfied after the number of precursor games is digested, the promotion replay notification condition is satisfied ( It is possible to shift to advance replay precursor AT game). Therefore, during the period until the number of precursor games for which the right to generate the promotion replay notification is suspended is consumed, the promotion replay notification is not executed even if the replays A1 to A3 are won, the number of precursor games is exhausted, and the promotion is promoted. After the transition to the pre-replay AT game, when the replays A1 to A3 are won, the promotion replay notification is executed for the first time. In this case, since the promotion replay notification is not generated until the number of precursor games is exhausted, the player can continue to play the game until the number of precursor games is exhausted, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. The number of precursor games is determined by a lottery of lottery games (for example, a predetermined lottery game lottery executed together with the promotion replay notification lottery) from a plurality of types of games (for example, 1 to 24 games). Alternatively, a fixed number of games (for example, 24 games) may be used.

(Β.2 stage AT lottery: promotion chance zone (special performance state))
In the above description, the replay promotion lottery based on the “RT0 in-game AT lottery table” shown in FIG. 27 is performed, and if this is won, the promotion replay notification condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may have the following configuration (two-stage AT lottery form).

An outline of the two-stage AT lottery form will be described. In this two-stage AT lottery form, first, under a predetermined condition, a transition is made to a chance zone (promotion chance zone) in which a promotion replay notification condition can be established for one or a plurality of games (for example, 20 games) (first game). Stage). In other words, the player is in a gaming state in which promotion replay notification conditions are impossible or difficult before the promotion chance zone transition, and during the promotion chance zone, it is easy to establish promotion replay notification conditions. It becomes a game state advantageous to. Next, in this promotion chance zone, the right to generate the promotion replay notification condition is drawn by, for example, a predetermined lottery (second stage). Through such a multi-step AT lottery, the player is given the right to generate the promotion replay notification condition.

  In such a configuration, the promotion replay notification lottery is not executed or the promotion replay notification lottery has a chance unless it is shifted to the above “elevation chance zone”, but the winning probability is lower than in the promotion chance zone. It is possible to create a game such as In this case, since entering the promotion chance zone can greatly influence the player's profit, the significance of the existence of the promotion chance zone will stand out, and the player will be promoted whether or not to enter the promotion chance zone. The interest in the game can be enhanced while paying great attention to whether or not the promotion replay notification condition can be established in the chance zone, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  The promotion chance zone is an aspect of the production state managed on the production control unit 410 side. That is, after the transition to the promotion chance zone, there is only a change in the effect control unit side gaming state, the main control unit side gaming state remains RT0 gaming, and the gaming state regarded as the entire gaming machine is “RT0 gaming + “Promotion chance zone”. In addition, as an opportunity to shift to the promotion chance zone, a winning of a specific lottery object or a winning of a specific winning combination can be used as an opportunity.

(RT0 game promotion chance zone transition lottery table: FIG. 31 (A))
For example, on the side of the production control unit 410, for example, based on the “promotion chance zone transition lottery table” shown in FIG. This “promotion chance zone shift lottery table” has the same basic configuration as the “RT0 gaming AT lottery table” of FIG. For example, if a weak cherry is won and a freeze effect has not occurred, the chance is shifted to the promotion chance zone with a probability of 4/128 (see the weak cherry column in FIG. 31A).

  The probability of transition to the promotion chance zone is preferably determined by paying attention to the winning combination probability and / or the occurrence probability of the freeze effect as in the promotion replay notification lottery. Further, the number of continued games in the promotion chance zone may be different depending on the winning combination type. For example, in the case of a role with a low winning probability (for example, a special AT), the number of continued games in the promotion chance zone may be set to a relatively long number of games compared to other winning combinations, The number of continuing games may be an infinite number of games instead of a finite number of games. In the case of an infinite number of games, the promotion chance zone will be continued until the promotion replay notification lottery is won according to the “promotion chance zone AT lottery table” which will be described later. (The transition to this ART game will be definitive).

  After the transition to the promotion chance zone, the promotion control replay notification lottery is performed on the side of the production control unit 410 based on the “AT promotion lottery zone AT lottery table (RT0 gaming promotion chance zone AT lottery table)” shown in FIG. If the promotion replay notification lottery is won, the game will be shifted to the promotion replay notification precursor AT game.

(AT lottery table for promotion chance zone during RT0 game: FIG. 31 (b))
In the "promotion chance zone AT lottery table" in FIG. 31 (b), as in the case of "RT0 gaming AT lottery table" in FIG. ) Is determined (AT determination value / lottery area size (128)). The “promotion chance zone AT lottery table” has substantially the same configuration as the “RT0 gaming AT lottery table” described above, but the winning probability of the promotion replay notification lottery is relatively high (AT determination value). The point is that the promotion replay notification lottery is performed even in the case of a loss or replay role, and the promotion replay notification lottery is preferentially different. The opportunity to transition to the promotion chance zone (promotion chance zone transition opportunity) can be said to belong to the “AT game transition opportunity” in that it becomes a transition opportunity to the advance replay notification precursor AT game.

  In the form having the promotion chance zone described above, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which no promotion assist notification condition is established unless the promotion chance zone is entered (for example, the promotion assist notification lottery is not executed during a normal game). . In addition, the probability of establishment of the promotion replay notification condition can be made different between the promotion chance zone and the non-elevation chance zone (for example, during a normal game). For example, in the non-elevation chance zone, the promotion replay notification lottery based on the “RT0 gaming AT lottery table” of FIG. 27 is performed, and when the transition is made to the promotion chance zone, the “AT lottery in the promotion chance zone” shown in FIG. Based on the “table”, the promotion replay notification lottery may be performed.

  In addition, when the winning lottery for the “promotion chance zone” is won, the promotion chance zone can be generated after the predetermined number of precursor games has been consumed. In this case, the player does not enter the promotion chance zone until the number of precursor games is exhausted, so the player can continue to play the game until the number of precursor games is exhausted, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. There are advantages such as.

  Moreover, when providing the number of precursor games to a promotion chance zone, based on the result of a promotion chance zone transfer lottery, you may comprise so that the expectation production which makes the transition of a promotion chance zone expect can be shown. Depending on the result of the promotion chance zone transition lottery, a “true expectation effect” can be displayed in the case of winning, and an “expected effect of gasse” that can be expected to occur in the case of “losing” It may be configured. In this case, for example, by changing the appearance rate of a specific effect (for example, the appearance rate of a specific character) between the real expected effect and the expected effect of the gaze, it is estimated whether or not to move to the promotion chance zone. Elements can be given to the player, and the player can enjoy the game while expecting the arrival of the promotion chance zone.

  Further, while staying in the promotion chance zone, a special effect for notifying the fact is displayed to let the player know that it is in the promotion chance zone, and the promotion replay notification lottery opportunity (FIG. 31 (b)) It is preferable to produce an effect that expresses a sense of expectation for the establishment of the promotion replay notification condition.

(About other promotion replay notification conditions)
In the above, the form where the promotion replay notification condition is satisfied when the promotion replay notification lottery is won has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion replay notification condition may be determined by one or more of the following conditions, or may be determined in combination with the promotion replay notification lottery.

  As promotion replay notification conditions, (A) When a predetermined number of games is consumed during a specific gaming state (for example, normal game (RT0 game + non-AT game)) (so-called “ceiling game number” is reached) ), The promotion replay notification condition can be established. For example, the promotion replay notification condition can be established after the 1941 game is exhausted after the transition to the normal game. Also, a plurality of types of ceiling games may be provided. For example, from among a plurality of types of ceiling games (for example, 1941 games or 1208 games) by a lottery of predetermined ceiling games executed on the condition of transition to a normal game. Either can be selected.

  Further, (B) when the number of wins for a specific lottery target or the number of wins for a specific winning combination reaches a predetermined number (cumulative number), the promotion replay notification condition can be established. For example, when the number of wins for a specific replay role (for example, Replay A1) or the number of wins for a specific winning role (for example, Bell 1) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50), the promotion replay notification condition is set. Can be established. The type of the above-mentioned specific lottery object, the number of winning times, or the number of winnings can be set as appropriate. In addition to the number of wins and the number of wins, the number of consecutive wins (for example, five consecutive wins) and the number of consecutive wins (for example, three consecutive wins) over a plurality of games may be used. Further, the promotion replay notification condition can be established when the above-mentioned number of times reaches a certain number during a specific game period (for example, normal game, promotion chance zone, bonus game, etc.).

  Further, (C) when a specific winning combination type is won, a predetermined number of notification points corresponding to the winning combination (for example, 50P for weak cherry and 200P for strong cherry) is added (for example, a predetermined number of points (for example, , 1000P), and when the accumulated point number reaches a predetermined point number (for example, 1000P) (when subtracting from the predetermined point number, the point becomes zero) ), The promotion replay notification condition can be established. The number of notification points may be determined by lottery from a plurality of types of points (for example, 50P, 100P, 200P, 500P) according to the winning combination. In this case, for example, it is possible to draw a relatively high number of points as the winning combination has a relatively low winning probability. Further, the promotion replay notification condition can be established when the number of points reaches a predetermined number during a specific game period (for example, a normal game or a promotion chance zone).

(About RT1 game (medium probability RT game): left middle frame in FIG. 6)
Next, RT1 game will be described.

  The RT1 game (the left middle frame in FIG. 6) is shifted to when “promotion replay” is won during the RT0 game.

  The RT1 game is a game state (prepared game state) that can be transferred to an RT2 game described later (a game state that most advantageously acts on the player (provides high profits) during the general game state) The player's profit is greatly influenced by whether or not the special replay is won.

  In this RT1 game (see the upper right frame in FIG. 7), among the replay role types, replays A1 to A3 are excluded from the lottery target roles, and normal replay, replay B1 to B3, and replay C1 to C3 are the lottery target roles. Become. That is, in the RT1 game, the replays B1 to B3 and the replays C1 to C3 are in a game state that can be won. Therefore, when replays B1 to B3 are won, normal replay, special replay, or falling replay may win, and when replays C1 to C3 are won, normal replay or falling replay may be won. There is.

  However, if a fall replay wins during RT1 game, it falls to RT0 game, and it shifts to a game state that is disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the special replay is won, the game is promoted to the RT2 game, and the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state for the player.

(Assist notification during RT1 game (AT1 game): upper right frame in FIG. 7)
Therefore, when the transition to the RT1 game is made, an “AT1 game” is generated in which the assist notification related to the replays B1 to B3 is executed in order to avoid the fall replay, to win the special replay and to be promoted to the RT2 game. Let In this case, the gaming state captured as the entire gaming machine is “RT1 gaming + AT1 gaming (hereinafter referred to as“ prepared ART gaming ”)”.

  Specifically, when an AT1 game occurs, if one of the replays B1 to B3 is won, the push order for winning the "special replay" is assisted, and if AT1 to 4 are won, The assist order is notified of the pressing order for winning the bell 1. During the above prepared ART game, the winning procedure for the bell 1 is also guided, so that it is possible to wait for the special replay assist notification without reducing the game medals compared to the normal game, and the replays B1 to B3 If either is won, the special replay is informed of the assist, and as long as the player follows this, it is possible to easily shift to the RT2 game (this ART game) described later.

(About replay B1-B3 winning during preparatory ART game)
However, at the time of winning the replays B1 to B3, as already described, the freeze assist notification for generating the freeze G1 is executed in order to perform the notification effect to the ART game transition (see FIGS. 32D and 33D). ). As a result, a “pseudo bonus notification effect” using a freeze is generated to notify the player that the transition to the ART game has been confirmed.

(About special AT1-6 winning during preparatory ART game)
Also, in this embodiment, if any of the special ATs 1 to 6 of the specific role is won during the above-mentioned prepared ART game (RT1 game), the freeze effect according to the pressing order (here) Then, freezes F2, F4, and F5) are generated (see FIGS. 32B and 33B). The occurrence of freeze production during preparatory ART games is a very rare case, so it is a premium. In any case of special AT1-6, there is a 100% probability that the “number of ART start games” will occur. (Refer to the columns of freezes F2, F4, and F5 in FIG. 28B). Therefore, if the special AT is won during the normal game and the special AT is won during the preparatory ART game, the number of additional games can be added (cumulative addition). However, for special ATs 1 to 6, a win probability (freeze assist notification probability for freeze) according to the special AT type is determined (see FIG. 32B). This is the same as in the case of the ART direct hit route. It should be noted that the freeze effect modes related to these freezes F2, F4, and F5 may be the same as the “battle effect” in the above-described normal game, or a dedicated freeze effect mode during the preparation ART game (for the start game number addition notification) (Direction).

  The reason for this very rare case is that during the preparation ART game, the replays B1 to B3 are won with a relatively high probability (the combined winning probability is about 1 / 4.46: see FIG. 24). You can win a special replay. Further, during the preparatory ART game, when replays B1 to B3 are won, special replay assist notification is made, and the player is required to follow this assist notification in order to avoid falling replay. Furthermore, since the combined winning probability of replays B1 to B3 is about 1 / 4.46 of the high probability, the winning is about 4 to 5 games on average and about 100% if about 20 games. And can be a special replay prize. On the other hand, the combined winning probability of the special ATs 1 to 6 is about 1/874, and it is quite rare to draw the special ATs 1 to 6 with the winning probability of about 1/874 between the above 4 to 5 games. It's a case.

  Therefore, taking into account that the special AT1-6 won during the preparatory ART game, the premium degree is quite high, and when the freezes F2, F4, F5 occur, the number of games starting this ART with a special probability of 100% Add on. Here, as the number of added games (start added game number), a relatively larger number of added games may be set than in the normal game. For example, 60 games for Freeze F2, 80 games for Freeze F4, and 200 games for Freeze F5.

  As a super rare case, a special AT may win a plurality of times during a preparatory ART game. In such a case, each time a special AT is won, the number of games corresponding to each freeze is added. In addition, the first added game number of FIG. 28 (B) is given for the first time, and thereafter, as a bonus for multiple winnings, a predetermined number of added games (for example, regardless of the type of freeze effect) (for example, 100 games) may be awarded. In the case of multiple winnings, a predetermined additional start game number may be added without any occurrence of freeze.

(About strong watermelon and strong cherry winning during preparation ART game)
Further, in this embodiment, when the strong watermelon or strong cherry of a specific role is won during the preparation ART game (RT1 game), the main control unit 400 side performs a normal freeze effect lottery (FIG. 26, FIG. 9 described later). Step S103) is performed, and based on the lottery result, a freeze effect type (here, either freeze C to D or no freeze has occurred) is determined. Note that the strong watermelon or strong cherry is a “push order unrestricted freeze trigger”, so that the freeze effect determined by the freeze effect lottery is generated regardless of the push order.

  Further, when a strong watermelon or a strong cherry is won, the number of the ART start game is added as in the above-described special AT. The number of added games here is determined on the side of the effect control unit 410 based on the “prepared ART game main ART start game number added lottery table” shown in FIG. Since the occurrence of freeze D is a very rare case, the premium means that the “number of ART start games” is added with a probability of 100% (FIG. 28A). (See Freeze D column). When freeze C or no freeze has occurred, the number of games added to the ART start game number is determined based on the lottery probability (determination value / lottery area size (128)) shown in FIG.

  As described above, “AT1 game” is generated when the regular route is followed, that is, in the RT0 game, when the promotion replay is won when the promotion replay notification is generated (AT1 game by the regular route). Occurrence), when the promotion replay wins when the promotion replay assist notification has not occurred, the AT1 game is not generated. Thus, when the promotion replay notification has not occurred, even if the player arbitrarily or intentionally wins the promotion replay and shifts to “RT1 game”, the AT1 game does not occur (in this case, the game The gaming state of the entire machine is “RT1 gaming + non-AT gaming”).

  For this reason, it is extremely difficult to avoid winning of the fall replay, and as a result, even if the game moves to the RT1 game, the game falls to the RT0 game in a relatively short period of time. This prevents an unexpected profit from being given to the player due to the specifications and design of the gaming machine. However, simply preventing the AT1 game from occurring may cause the RT1 game to continue for a long game period due to an arbitrary stop operation by the player. For example, the player may be lucky enough to continue to avoid falling replays or win special replays.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, such an event is also assumed. For example, when the assist notification is not generated, the player presses irregularly (other than “push order in which the first stop operation cylinder is the left cylinder 5a”). In the case of pressing order), a predetermined penalty is imposed (details of the penalty will be described later). This penalty is extremely disadvantageous for the player in the progress of the game, and it is defined as a 'regular procedure' when performing a normal game that the player does not “push irregularly”. In addition, when AT1 game is occurring, if a fall replay wins due to a player's erroneous stop operation and falls to RT0 game, one of the replays A1 to A3 is won during the fall destination RT0 game. In this case, a “relief function” for performing “elevation replay notification” and returning to the RT1 game again is provided.

(RT2 game (high probability RT game): lower left frame in FIG. 6)
Next, RT2 game will be described.

  The RT2 game (lower left frame in FIG. 6) is shifted to when the special replay wins during the RT1 game. The RT2 game has the highest probability of winning the replay role type in the general gaming state, and in this respect, it acts most favorably on the player in at least the general gaming state (can give a high profit). It is in a gaming state.

  In this RT2 game, among the replay role types, normal replay, replays B1 to B3, replays C1 to C3, and CA replays 1 to 2 are included in the lottery target roles (see the RT2 game column in FIG. 24).

  However, during the RT2 game, if the fall replay related to the replays B1 to B3 or the replays C1 to C3 wins, or if the bell 1 spill of the AT1 to AT4 (bell spill) occurs, the above RT0 game It is designed to fall down.

(Assist notification during AT2 game: lower right frame in FIG. 7)
Therefore, when transitioning to this RT2 game, in order to avoid falling replays and bell spilled eyes and to realize a game progression advantageous to the player, replays B1 to B3, replays C1 to C2, and AT1 to AT4 The “AT2 game” in which the assist notification is executed is generated. In this case, the gaming state captured as the entire gaming machine is “RT2 gaming + AT2 gaming (this ART game: pseudo bonus)”.

  Specifically, when an AT2 game occurs, if one of the replays B1 to B3 or the replays C1 to C3 is won, the push order for winning the “normal replay” is assisted, and the AT1 to 4 are won. In this case, the push order information for winning the bell 1 is assisted. However, when AT2 or AT3 is won, the push order for avoiding the occurrence of freeze G2 among the push orders for winning the bell 1 is notified (see FIG. E). This is because AT2 and AT3 do not function as an extra lottery trigger for the ART game extra lottery, which will be described later, so as not to invalidate the action as a freeze stage trigger and cause unnecessary freeze production. It is to do. Further, for replays C1 and C2, the push order for winning the chance replay is assisted with notification under a predetermined notification condition, and the push order for winning the normal replay is otherwise notified with assistance. However, the AT2 game is generated when a transition is made through the regular route (when a special replay is won in the preparation ART game). The details of the freeze effect during this ART game will be described later.

(Number of continuing games in this ART game: Number of continuing games by ART direct hit route)
With regard to the number of continuing games during the ART game, for example, “40 games” is set as the number of continuing ART games as a result of the special replay winning during the preparation ART game. The 40 games are the initial value of the number of continued ART games, that is, the number of ART starting games. Therefore, when the number of the main ART start games is added, the added number of games is set as the main ART continuing game number. The actual ART game continuation game number is not the RT2 game continuation game number but the AT2 game continuation game number.

  In detail, in the present embodiment, the RT2 game is ended when a “falling replay” or “bell spill” that is a fall triggering role is won. The game ends when all the game continuation games have been consumed. In addition, during AT2 game, an assist notification for avoiding the “falling replay” or “bell spilling” prize is generated, so that the player avoids these falling triggers and performs “normal replay” or “bell 1”. "Can be awarded.

  However, when the number of the above ART game continuation games is over and the AT2 game is finished, the game state captured from the entire gaming machine is the state where only “RT3 gaming” is generated as the gaming state captured from the entire gaming machine. It becomes. For this reason, after the AT2 game is over, the winning procedure for avoiding the fall replay or the bell spill is not notified, and the player has no clue to avoid these fall triggers. Replays B1 to B3, Replays C1 to C3, and AT1 to 4 are won with a higher probability than other roles, so after AT2 game is over, a fall replay or bell spill will win in a relatively short period of time. Thus, it falls to RT0 game. Therefore, after the AT2 game is over, it is difficult to continue the RT2 game, and eventually the RT2 game will fall to the RT0 game. Therefore, the number of continuing games of the AT2 game can be substantially regarded as the number of continuing games of the ART game. In this regard, also for the above-mentioned prepared ART, as in the case of this ART game, when the AT1 game is managed by the number of continuing games, the number of continuing games of the AT1 game is substantially regarded as the number of continuing games of the prepared ART game. be able to. As described above, in this embodiment, the RT game is ended due to the end of the AT game. Accordingly, unless otherwise required, the number of AT game continuing games and the number of ART continuing games are equivalent to each other. Treat as a thing.

  Returning to the description of the lower right frame in FIG. When entering the above ART game, the assist notification of Bell 1 will be performed by winning AT1 to AT4, the replay probability will be the highest among all RT games, and the “addition lottery” opportunity described later will be given. The game development is more advantageous to the player than during the preparatory ART game. This ART game can be said to be a pseudo bonus game (pseudo bonus game) since the average number of game medals per game (average net increase per game) increases as in the bonus game.

  In this embodiment, when the number of continuing games of the ART game is over, a predetermined continuous lottery is performed, and when this continuous lottery is won, one set of 40 games is set again and the ART game is continued. It can be made to. The timing for performing the continuous lottery is not particularly limited as long as it is before the end of the number of continuous games in the ART game. For example, it may be performed at the final game when the number of ART game continuation games ends, or may be performed at the start or end of an intermediate game (arbitrary number of remaining games) in the number of ART game continuation games.

  Further, the continuation rate by the continuation lottery may be a single continuation rate (for example, continuation at 50%), or may be drawn from a plurality of types of continuation rates (for example, 50%, 65%, 75). % Or 85% is determined). When there are a plurality of continuation rates, the ART game is determined at a predetermined timing before the start. For example, when the replays B1 to B3 are won during the preparatory ART game or when the special replay is won, any one of the continuation rates can be determined by lottery.

(About the additional number of ART continuing games)
In the present embodiment, an “additional lottery” in which the number of games (more precisely, the number of continued games in the AT2 game) can be added to the number of continued ART game games (in the present embodiment, 40 games of the prescribed continuous game number). Is to be done.

  In this extra lottery, a predetermined number of lottery conditions are established, and one of the plurality of types of games is determined by lottery. The determined number of games is determined based on the current number of ART continuing games. It is added. As a result, the game period of this ART game is extended and further benefits are provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, as the gaming state in which the extra lottery is executed, a “real ART game” which is a normal extra lottery state and an “extra special zone” in which the extra lottery fluctuates with high probability are provided. Yes.

(About this lottery during this ART game)
The extra lottery during the main ART game is executed on the side of the effect control unit 410 (the extra lottery means) based on the “extra lottery table during the main ART game” shown in FIG.

(Additional lottery table during this ART game: Fig. 29)
In the extra lottery table during the ART game, the number of extra games (“G extra number” in FIG. 29) corresponding to a specific winning combination type (additional lottery trigger) and a freeze effect type (including no freezing). And the lottery probability (determination value / size of the lottery area (128)) is determined.

  As shown in the figure, the extra lottery opportunity includes specific small role types such as weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, and special AT1-6. There are no particular restrictions on the extra lottery opportunity. For example, a loss or replay role may be included. Further, one or more types of extra lottery triggers can be provided.

  In addition, a plurality of types of games are prepared as the number of added games. Basically, a relatively large number of added games is drawn for a specific role having a lower winning probability.

  In addition, as can be seen from FIG. 29, in this embodiment, the extra lottery trigger also functions as a freeze production lottery trigger. That is, there is a case where a freeze effect is generated when a winning lottery opportunity is won. Paying attention to this, as the occurrence probability of the freeze effect type is lower, a relatively large number of additional games is drawn.

(Additional lottery with weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, and strong watermelon during this ART game)
Of the additional lottery triggers, when a weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, or strong watermelon is won, a normal freeze effect lottery (FIG. 26) is performed on the main control unit 400 side, and a freeze effect type (here, Any of freezes A to D and no freeze occurs) is determined. Then, on the side of the production control unit 410, the “Additional lottery table during the real ART game” shown in FIG. 29 is referred to, and the number of additional games corresponding to the freeze production type determined on the main control unit 400 side is drawn by lottery (the real ART game). It is decided by the medium top lottery). As already explained, since the weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, and strong watermelon are “independent push order freezing triggers”, the freeze production determined by the above freeze production lottery is independent of the push order. Will occur.

  In the above ART start game number addition lottery, whether or not the freeze effect types of freezes A to D are accompanied, that is, freeze effect types A (A1 to A5), B (B1 to B5), and C (C1 to C1) shown in FIG. C4), the number of additional games differs depending on whether D (D1 to D5) is involved. In the case where the freeze effect types of freezes A to D are accompanied, the winning probability and the number of added games are increased as compared with the case where the freeze effect types are not accompanied. Specifically, a larger number of additional games is drawn in the order of no freeze, freezes A, B, C, and D. Since the occurrence of freeze D in strong watermelons and strong cherries is a rare case, a premium means that a relatively high number of games are added with a probability of 100% (FIG. 29). (See Freeze D column).

(Regarding the extra lottery by special AT1-6 winning in this ART game)
In this embodiment, when one of the special ATs 1 to 6 is won during the ART game, the freeze effect according to the pressing order (here, the freeze F7) is the same as when the normal AT or the preparatory ART game is won. ~ Any of F9) is generated.

  Here, when one of the special ATs 1 to 6 is won, a freezing assist notification lottery (FIG. 32C) is performed on the effect control unit 410 side, and the freezing corresponding to any of freezing F7 to F9 or no freezing occurs. 29, the effect control unit 410 side refers to the “Additional lottery table during the ART game” shown in FIG. 29, and the number of additional games corresponding to the determined assist notification type for freeze is determined by lottery ( It is determined by the extra lottery during this ART game). Further, the determined freeze assist notification appears on the effect control unit 410 side, and freeze effects (freezes F7 to F8) corresponding to the pressing order are generated on the main control unit 400 side (FIG. 33C). reference).

  As shown in the “Special AT Winning Freeze Assist Notification Lottery Table” in FIG. 32C, regarding the freeze assist notification corresponding to the freezes F7 to F8, the special AT1, the special AT3, and the special AT5 have the same selection rate and special AT2. The special AT 4 has the same selection rate, and the special AT 6 is determined such that the selection rate of the freeze F8 and the freeze F9 (high expectation freeze effect) is given preferential treatment over other special ATs. Further, as shown in the “Lottery table during the ART game” in FIG. 29, the first special AT group of special AT1, special AT3, and special AT5, and the second special AT of special AT2, special AT4, and special AT6 Even if the same freeze effect occurs in the group, the number of added games is different, so that the number of games in the second special AT group is higher than that in the first special AT group It has become. In this embodiment, each special AT has substantially the same internal lottery probability, and is a lottery target having the same characteristics regarding the type of winning combination and the payout of game medals, but the game value given by each special AT By adding light weight to the game, the variety of roles has been expanded and the fun of the game has been improved.

  Here, regarding the freezes F7 to F9, when the freeze assist notification is made to appear, in particular, the AT1 which can be won with a relatively high probability without showing a notice effect that informs that the special AT has been won. -A production mode (production mode including an assist notification mode) similar to that when AT4 is won is displayed. In other words, even if the special AT is won, the production will behave as if the AT1 to AT4 are won (substantially the same (similar or similar) between the special AT win and the AT win). To make it difficult or difficult to distinguish whether the special AT type is won or the AT type is won, and the special AT win is concealed. The reason for making such a production mode is as follows.

  During the game period where the number of games is limited as in this ART game, the occurrence of freeze F7 to F9 is first won by a special AT by internal lottery, and further by winning by a freeze assist notification lottery, Notification occurs (see FIG. 32C). Here, the special AT is set with a low probability as compared with other small roles. Therefore, the occurrence probability of freezes F7 to F9 is lower than the internal winning probability, which is a very rare premium case (see the special AT column in FIG. 24, see FIG. 32C). With regard to freezes that occur with low probability in this way, many players say that the freezes themselves are not expected to play games, and that they will be able to draw if they are lucky. The fact is that he enjoys playing games with a certain level of awareness.

  Focusing on this point, in the present embodiment, when the special AT is won and the occurrence of freezes F7 to F9 is scheduled (when freeze assist notification for freezes F7 to F9 is determined by freeze assist notification lottery) ) In the same manner as when AT1 to AT4 were won (actually the same) from the time of operation of the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 to the occurrence of a freeze (substantially the same) assist notification (the effect mode including the assist notification is substantially the same) ) To reveal the fact that the special AT was won internally, and the basic trigger timing (in the case of freeze F7, the first stop operation, in the case of freeze F8, in the second stop operation, in the case of freeze 9 “Freeze when the third stop operation is performed”), or “Freeze during operation” with accompanying trigger timing Can produce impact effects (for example, impact sounds (special sound effects), intense flashes (special light effects), intense action / drop effects (special action effects) using movable body objects (not shown), etc.) Let

  In this way, when the player is alert that “AT1 to AT4 have been won”, an impactful effect appears, so that the player's intention can be struck. As a result, it is considered that the degree of impact received by the player is high, and an excellent performance effect can be expected.

  In particular, when a freeze occurs after the first stop operation or the second stop operation as in Freeze F7 or Freeze F8, as described above, the occurrence of the freeze is concealed to the player in terms of performance. As a trigger (accompanying trigger) timing for the first time as described above, the operation of the rotation stop button 12 during the freeze is given as a trigger timing. Configure to show "impact production". That is, the effect during operation during freeze works as the impact effect. Thus, since the effect that appears suddenly while concealing the occurrence of the freeze appears in a form that strikes the player's intention, it is considered that the impact received by the player is considerably high.

  In the case of concealing the occurrence of the above-mentioned freeze, the effects that the freeze effect such as “to give the player a sense of incongruity due to the delay state” and “to produce an effect with the use of freeze” Can make the most of it. In particular, players who are accustomed to playing games perform a series of operations of “first stop operation → second stop operation → third stop operation” with a familiar hand and good tempo during normal games. During games, such as during games, the focus is often on assist notifications, and the occurrence of freeze is often out of sight. Therefore, the player who is accustomed to the game (intermediate game player to advanced player) is more likely to be surprised and more surprised. Satisfying intermediate to advanced players is important in improving the operating rate and repeat rate of gaming machines, and the occurrence of sudden freeze effects as described above attracts skilled players. It is thought that it works effectively.

  The case where the above-mentioned freeze F7, F8 generate | occur | produces is demonstrated using the time chart of FIG. Here, a case where freeze F7 occurs will be representatively described. Since the Leeds F7 corresponds to the illustrated first freeze (freeze after the first stop operation), the illustrated second freeze is ignored.

  In the case where the freeze F7 occurs, when the player first performs a first stop operation (for example, operating the left torso stop button 12a), the freeze occurs at t1 shown in the drawing using this as a basic trigger timing. The freeze time here is t1 to 8 seconds (corresponding to t1 to t3 shown in the figure). During the freeze time from t1 to t3 (8 seconds), the “effect when the freeze occurs” is not displayed (the occurrence of the freeze is concealed). However, at “t2” during the freeze time, the player operates the rotation-rotation stop button 12 (for example, the intermediate-rotation stop button 12b (for example, any button) to stop the next rotation. (For example, in the case of an effect during sub-freeze), when the mid-cylinder stop button 12b is operated, an operation command 3 or 4 during freeze is generated, which is designated as an effect control unit. 410 is received), the impact effect (effect during operation during freezing) appears. It should be noted that the valid reception period of the rotation rotation stop button 12 can be the whole period or a part of the freeze time (a period corresponding to the command reception valid period shown).

(Additional special zone (RT2 game + AT3 game): lower left frame in FIG. 7)
Next, the additional specialization zone will be described. This extra special zone functions as one of the 'pseudo bonus games' and is the route when winning the “CA Replay” with the lowest probability among the replay roles, and as a bonus, the extra lottery is high. Gaming state that fluctuates in probability, in other words, a gaming state that is specialized for the addition, such that a relatively higher number of additional games can be obtained than this ART game, or the chance of acquiring the number of additional games fluctuates with high probability (Additional lottery high probability fluctuation state). Note that “CA replay (chance replay)” functions as a “pseudo bonus combination” that triggers a transition to a pseudo bonus, similar to replays B1 to B3 (special replay).

(About the transition to the specialization zone)
In the case of the present embodiment, the transition to the special zone for the specialization is specialized in the addition that the number of games can be increased relatively higher than the normal route, when the CA replays 1 and 2 are won. A game state is generated. Specifically, when one of the CA replays 1 and 2 is won, an opportunity to notify the “chance replay” assist is given, and the player is given an opportunity to win a chance replay. When the player can win a chance replay according to the contents of the assist notification, an AT3 game is generated. When transitioning to this “additional special zone”, the gaming state captured as the entire gaming machine is “RT2 gaming + AT3 gaming” (see the lower left frame in FIG. 7). However, in the present embodiment, the conditions for shifting to the additional specialization zone are defined as follows.

  In the present embodiment, as a condition for shifting to the additional specialization zone, the generation of a freeze effect related to the winning of CA replays 1 and 2 is a condition. When the winning of CA Replay 1 or 2 is won, a normal freeze effect lottery (FIG. 26) is performed, and as shown in the figure, CA Replay 1 with a lower internal winning probability wins a relatively high probability of freezing. (See winning numbers 32 and 33). In the case of winning the freeze effect lottery, an assist notification for winning the chance replay is generated, and the game is shifted to the specialization zone.

  In the present embodiment, when CA Replay 1 with a low winning probability is won among CA Replays 1 and 2, the freezing effect lottery is won at 100% (128/128) as a bonus and added to the special zone The transition is promised. On the other hand, when CA Replay 2 having a higher win probability than CA Replay 1 is won, the freezing effect lottery is won with a probability of 50% (64/128). When the freeze production lottery becomes ‘losing’ (non-winning), the following production will appear.

  When the “freezing” lottery results in “losing”, an assist notification for winning the “normal replay”, that is, a “false notification” that is an assist notification for the disadvantaged winning side is performed. This false notification is, for example, assist notification in the same event as assist notification for avoiding the “special replay” win when the replays B1 to B3 are won and winning the normal replay (to avoid the “falling replay” win). It has been informed. The reason for such “false assist notification (lie notification)” is as follows.

(About assist notification about CA replay)
The CA replay has a very low winning probability (see winning numbers 32 and 33 in FIG. 6) and is a premium lottery target. Therefore, it is also effective to display an effect that can notify that the CA replay has been won and to give the player a sense of expectation. However, in the case of CA Replay 2, even if this is won, there is a 50% probability that a freeze effect (freeze D) will occur due to the freeze effect lottery (see winning number 33 in FIG. 26). If the feeling of disappointment is disappointing, after all, if it is not possible to add to the specialization zone, the reaction will be great and the player will be discouraged. As a result, distrust and dissatisfaction are raised for the gaming machine, and the willingness to play is reduced. In addition, this may cause a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the freeze effect lottery is lost, the assistance notification is substantially the same as when the replays B1 to B3 and the replays C1 to C3 are won (in this case, the assistance notification that avoids the winning of the fall replay ( Fake assist notification (false notification))) and thereby concealing that the CA Replay 2 has been won, thereby preventing the player from giving excessive expectations and reducing the willingness to play the game. This can be prevented.

  In addition, when an extra special zone is scheduled to be generated (when the special zone transition lottery (in this embodiment, when the freezing effect lottery (FIG. 26) is won)), the player will receive a normal replay due to an erroneous stop operation. Even if it does, it is designed to shift to the specialization zone as a relief function, which makes it too severe for the player to invalidate the specialization zone transition itself. However, a predetermined penalty may be given, for example, a penalty may be given in which the number of continued games “20 games” in the extra zone is set to a smaller number of games (for example, 10 games).

(Assist notification during AT3 game: lower left frame in FIG. 7)
Next, the AT3 game in the case of shifting to the “additional special zone” will be described. During the AT3 game, as in the AT2 game, when one of the replays B1 to B3 is won, the push order for winning the “normal replay” is assisted, and when the AT1 to 4 are won, The assist order is notified of the pressing order for winning the bell 1. However, during AT3 game, in order to generate freeze G2, if one of the replays B1 to B3 is won under a predetermined notification condition, push order information for winning the “special replay” (special replay wins) When a specific push order in the order of pushes is notified to assist and AT3 to AT4 are won, the push order information for making Bell 1 win (specification of the push order in which Bell 1 wins) (In order of pressing) is notified of assistance (details of this will be described later).

(Additional lottery table in additional specialization zone (freeze type and number of additional games): Fig. 30)
The extra lottery in the extra special zone is performed by the above “extra lottery means” on the production control unit 410 side. Here, the extra lottery is based on the “extra special zone extra extra lottery table” shown in FIG. I do. The extra lottery table in the extra special zone includes the number of extra games and the number of extra games according to the winning combination type (extra lottery trigger type) and the freeze production type (freeze A to D, freeze G2, and freeze F7 to F9). The lottery probability (determination value / size of the lottery area (128)) of the number of added games is determined.

  Referring to “Additional lottery table in extra special zone” in FIG. 30, in the specialization zone, as shown in the comparison with “Extra lottery table in this ART game” in FIG. The lottery opportunity includes watermelon role, cherry role, special AT type, as well as replays B1 to B3, CA replays 1 and 2, AT3 to 4, lost, etc. From the additional lottery opportunity during this ART game However, there are many types, and it is possible to obtain a relatively large number of additional opportunities than during the present ART game. In addition, winning in the extra lottery also varies with a higher probability than during this ART game, and when the extra lottery is selected, it is possible to acquire a relatively large number of games. Further, as in the case of this ART game, the extra lottery opportunity can also function as a freeze production lottery opportunity, and there may be a case where a freeze effect occurs when the extra lottery opportunity part is won. Paying attention to this, as the occurrence probability of the freeze effect type is lower, a relatively large number of additional games is drawn.

  Next, the extra lottery in the extra special zone will be described. Note that substantially the same contents as in the ART game will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

(Additional lottery by weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, and CA Replay 1-2 in the special zone)
Of the additional lottery triggers, when winning a weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, or CA replay 1-2, the main control unit 400 side performs a normal freeze effect lottery (as in this ART game). 26) is performed, and the freeze effect type (here, one of freezes A to D (A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C4, D1 to D5) and no freeze) is determined. Then, on the side of the production control unit 410, the “upper specialization zone addition lottery table” shown in FIG. 30 is referred to, and the number of additional games corresponding to the freeze production type determined on the main control unit 400 side is determined by lottery (extra special It is decided by the addition lot in the conversion zone).

(Regarding the extra lottery by special AT1-6 winning in the extra special zone: Fig. 32C, Fig. 33C)
In addition, when the special AT1 to 6 are selected among the additional lottery opportunities, the assist control lottery for freezing (FIG. 32C) is performed on the side of the effect control unit 410 as in the case of this ART game, and the freeze F7 to F7 Freeze assist notification corresponding to one of F9 and the occurrence of no freeze is determined, and the above-mentioned “addition special zone in the extra special zone lottery table” is referred to on the effect control unit 410 side, and the determined freeze assist notification type is determined. The number of added games corresponding to is determined by lottery (addition lottery in an extra special zone). Further, the determined freeze assist notification appears on the effect control unit 410 side, and freeze effects (freezes F7 to F8) corresponding to the pressing order are generated on the main control unit 400 side (FIG. 33C). ).

(Regarding the extra lottery by replays B1 to B3 and AT3 to AT4 in the extra special zone: FIGS. 32E and 33E)
In addition, when the replays B1 to B3 and AT3 to AT4 are won among the additional lottery triggers, as in the case of the special AT described above, on the effect control unit 410 side, the assist notification lottery for freezing (FIG. 32E). The freeze assist notification corresponding to either freeze G2 or no freeze is determined, and on the side of the effect control unit 410, the “upper lottery table in the extra special zone” shown in FIG. 30 is referred. The number of additional games corresponding to the determined freeze assist notification type is determined by the extra lottery in the extra special zone. Further, the determined freeze assist notification appears on the effect control unit 410 side, and a freeze effect (freeze G2) corresponding to the pressing order is generated on the main control unit 400 side (FIG. 33E).

  In addition, when the freeze assist notification corresponding to the occurrence of the freeze is selected by the freeze assist notification lottery, the push order other than the push order in which the freeze G2 is generated is notified of the assist.

  In addition, it is preferable that all of AT1 to AT4 have substantially the same production mode (the production mode including the assist notification mode is substantially the same). In other words, in the production, an effect that makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish which AT from AT1 to AT4 has been won is displayed, and the winning of AT3 and AT4 is concealed. In this way, when AT3 or AT4 is elected, even if the freeze assist notification corresponding to the occurrence of freezing is selected, the player cannot know that fact, so The game can be digested in the same way as when AT1 or AT2 wins without giving excessive expectation. In addition, when freeze assist notification corresponding to freeze G2 is selected, the performance behaves in the same way as when AT1 or AT2 is won, so if freeze G2 occurs after all cylinder stops, It is possible to expect an effect similar to the case where the special AT in the present ART game that has already been described is won and a freeze (freeze F7 to F9) occurs.

  When the above-mentioned freeze G2 occurs (when freeze G2 is designated by the freeze assist notification lottery), as shown in the “upward specialization zone addition lottery table” in FIG. 30, the number of additional games with a probability of 100% Is added, and using the freeze, the number of added games has been acquired, and an “additional notice effect” for notifying the number of games appears.

  Here, AT3 to AT4 are points that are accompanied by payout of a predetermined number of game media, and replays B1 to B3 are internal lottery target types having the same performance in terms of replaying, and the same internal lottery probability. (See FIG. 6), but the number of added games is determined to be different. In the present embodiment, when a combination (for example, AT4, replay B2, or replay B3) that is difficult to win for the freeze assist notification corresponding to freeze G2 is won among AT3 to AT4 and replays B1 to B3 (see FIG. 32E). ), As a privilege, it is determined that a relatively large number of additional games is given. Thereby, even if it is internal lottery object combination which has the same property, since the weight of game value can be attached, gameability can be improved.

  In addition, the reason why the replays B1 to B3 are targeted for the extra lottery trigger is that when pushing one of the replays B1 to B3, the push order information for winning the special replay is assisted to notify the player, and during this ART game This is because it is possible to make the player more entertained by arranging “seven complete replays” that are not evenly arranged (a winning combination that is not aligned as long as the player follows the assist notification). Of course, the additional lottery opportunity is not limited to this, and the same role type as in the case of this ART game may be determined.

(Regarding the end of the specialization zone (number of continuing games))
After the number of additional special zone continuation games is over, AT3 game ends and AT2 game is generated. As a result, from the special zone (AT3 game + RT2 game) shown in the lower left frame of FIG. 7 to the lower right frame of FIG. The illustrated ART game (RT2 game + AT2 game) is entered. Here, the handling of the number of continuing games in the ART game when the CA replay in the ART game is won will be described.

  If the CA replay is won during the ART game and the game is added to the specialized zone, the right to execute the ART game is temporarily suspended so as not to give a disadvantage to the player. Specifically, if the special zone is scheduled to be added due to the CA replay winning, the ART game continuation game count is temporarily stopped, and after the additional special zone is completed, the ART at the time of the stop is again This ART game is resumed from the number of remaining games. This is to prevent the number of continued ART game games from being consumed as well as the number of continued games in the added special zone. As a result, the profit of the added special zone is given without impairing the player without losing the profit of the already acquired ART game.

  In addition, you may provide the other RT game (RT game for specialization zone | zones) which will be transfered due to the chance replay prize which concerns on CA replay. In this case, the gaming state captured from the entire gaming machine can be “addition-specific zone RT game + AT3 game”. In addition, the RT game for the specialization zone can be configured to shift (fall) from the RT game for the specialization zone to the RT2 game when a fall replay or a bell spill that is a fall opportunity wins. . When such an additional special zone RT game is provided, the AT3 game ends with the end of the additional special zone continuous game number, and the avoidance procedure for the fall trigger role is not notified. You can re-enter the game.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described promotion opportunity (promotion replay according to replays A1 to A3, special replay according to replays B1 to B3, chance replay according to CA replays 1 and 2) or fall opportunity (replays B1 to B3, Falling replays related to replays C1 to C3, bell spills related to AT1 to 4, etc.) can be made easy or definitive (easy to win) or difficult to win by assist notification control on the production control unit 410 side. Or it becomes indeterminate (a state where winning is difficult). That is, the winning rate greatly depends on the assist notification control on the side of the effect control unit 410. In other words, the assist notification control on the side of the effect control unit 410 plays an equivalent role to the internal lottery on the side of the main control unit 400. This means that the game state transition control is not managed by the game operation control by the main control unit 400 side, but exclusively by the effect operation control by the effect control unit 410 side. In the present embodiment, the effect control unit 410 side does not simply control the effects related to the game, but also functions as a main part responsible for transition control between game states. As a result, the transition conditions between a plurality of types of gaming states can be varied, and the gaming properties can be improved.

  In addition, the role which acts as a transition opportunity of the “advantage notification state” which acts on the player in an advantageous manner, such as an assist notification condition establishment state related to the promotion opportunity (AT game transition opportunity role) described above or an additional specialization zone, etc. The type is not particularly limited as long as the effect of the present invention can be obtained.

  The “advantageous notification state” is an effect state that can act on the player more advantageously than the normal game state or the normal effect state (normal state). For example, an AT game, a promotion chance zone, or a promotion opportunity It is a concept that broadly encompasses gaming conditions such as a state where an assist notification condition is established (elevation replay sign AT game) and an extra special zone.

  The promotion opportunity (AT game transition opportunity) refers to a “lottery target role” or “winning role” that acts as a transition (occurrence) trigger to the advantageous notification state. In other words, the lottery target roles that can be promoted when the winning role is determined (for example, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, strong cherry, weak cherry, etc.), the lottery target role itself acts as a promotion opportunity role. Yes, even if it is determined as a winning combination, such as a push order specified combination, a different winning combination is derived as a game result by the stop operation procedure, and it can shift to an advantageous notification state according to the winning combination The winning prize itself will serve as an opportunity for promotion. It should be noted that “Lottery target role” and “Winning role” can also play the role of “falling opportunity role” that becomes a trigger to shift to a gaming state that adversely affects the player.

(About RT3 games (BB internal winning (during bonus carryover games) RT games))
Next, RT3 game will be described. This RT3 game is an RT game for a BB internal winning state that is transferred when a BB is won during the above-described RT0 game to RT3 game, and the above-mentioned general game is in a carry-over game of the BB. It is different from RT0 game to RT3 game in the state. Note that during the RT3 game, the same replay role type as the RT0 game is in a game state that can be won, and the winning probability of the replay role is substantially the same as that of the RT0 game. Further, when the game is shifted to the RT3 game, the game state is not shifted to another game state until BB wins.

(BB winning during ART game)
If the BB role is elected during the preparatory ART game, this ART game, or the specialization zone, these ART games are temporarily held, and after the bonus game ends, the right to execute the ART game again. Can be granted. For example, when a BB is won during the preparation ART game, after the bonus game by the BB is completed, the promotion replay notification can be executed, and the game can be shifted to the preparation ART game again. In addition, if the BB is won during the ART game, the number of continued ART game games will be temporarily stopped, and after the end of the BB, the promotion replay notification state will be forcibly re-entered. Thus, the ART game can be resumed from the number of remaining ART game remaining games at the time of winning the BB.

(About the penalty)
In the present embodiment, a lot of lottery targets, their composition, and a plurality of types of gaming states are improved to improve gameplay, while taking into account machine discounts and gambling required for gaming machines. As a penalty for the progress of the game, when the player does not execute the regular game procedure, a predetermined penalty is given. The reasons for penalizing are as follows.

  For gaming machines that are subject to No. 7 sales under the Law on Customs Sales, etc. established in pachinko parlors, and the Act on the Optimization of Business, etc. According to Attached Table No. 5 Technical Standards for Torso Machines (Related to Article 6) (1) Standards for Performance), machine discounts and gambling are severely restricted. Therefore, the player is satisfied with the game method being protected, and the player is satisfied while suppressing unexpected balls (for example, a state where a player can intentionally obtain many balls). In order to create game playability, a predetermined penalty related to game progress is imposed.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined state transition trigger (for example, promotion replay, fall replay, special replay, chance replay, bell spill) is provided as a role that affects the profit of the player. For example, for the promoted replays related to the replays A1 to A3, the pushing order (pushing order correct answer) in which the prizes are won is assigned. Therefore, the player can freely perform the rotation stop operation without incurring any penalty. If the (push order operation) is allowed, the player may perform a stop operation procedure in which the correct push order is made accidentally or intentionally. In this case, it may frequently occur that the player is promoted to a preparatory ART game despite the fact that the promotion replay assist notification has not occurred.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning probability of AT2 to AT4 is set to a probability that is slightly lower than the winning probability of AT1 (see the columns of AT1 to AT4 in the role lottery table in FIG. 6). Most of the push order assignments of bell 1 by AT2 to AT4 with high probability have a bias in the push order other than the forward push. Therefore, the player who knows this performs “alternate push” (the first stop operation cylinder is a push order other than the left cylinder 5a) for middle push or reverse push, and intentionally pays the bell 1 It is easy to make technical interventions such as waiting for a BB win or a promotion transition of the gaming state (for example, waiting for a promotion replay notification establishment state) without reducing the number of game medals as compared to the case of pushing forward with high probability. End up. As a result, there is a possibility that the balance of the machine discount that is assumed in the design of the gaming machine is lost.

  Thus, it is necessary to suppress the occurrence of an unexpected event due to the stop operation procedure in the progress of the game. Therefore, if the player does not follow a predetermined gaming method (hereinafter referred to as “regular procedure”), a penalty that acts adversely on the player is imposed, thereby allowing the player to protect the gaming method in the gaming machine. I am doing so. The details of such a penalty will be described later, but any penalties that can be obtained as long as the regular procedure is executed can be used.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined penalty is mainly imposed depending on what state of play control unit side game state (effect state) is present or what kind of effect is appearing. It is like that. Conditions for penalizing (penalty conditions) include, for example, when “unusual push” is executed during a non-AT game, or when a specific winning combination wins (eg, unnecessarily pushes and bell 1 Or when an irregular push is executed in a state where no assist notification has occurred (when no assist notification has occurred).

  Examples of the content of the penalty include a game that is disadvantageous to the player until a predetermined number of penalty games (for example, 10 games) is consumed. For example, even if the promotion replay notification lottery is won until 10 games are consumed from the game that has executed the irregular procedure (during the penalty period), the promotion replay notification lottery or the promotion chance zone shift lottery is not executed (that Even if the lottery is won, it may be treated as invalid (lost), and the occurrence of the promotion chance zone or the generation of the assist notification itself is invalidated to restrict the execution of the assist notification. If a ceiling game number is provided, the count up to the ceiling game number is stopped.

  In this way, during the penalty period, it is limited that the AT game start condition (condition for transition to AT game) is satisfied, or the ceiling game number is stopped and the ceiling game number is substantially extended. It is like that.

  This penalty is particularly effective when an irregular push (an irregular procedure) is performed during an RT0 game. If the above penalty (restriction of assist notification) is imposed during the RT0 game, it becomes impossible to follow the regular route (in this embodiment, as described above, the promotion replay is awarded when the promotion replay notification has not occurred. Even if the game is shifted to the RT1 game, the AT1 game is not generated). Such a penalty is a very disadvantageous game development for the player even in a short period of time, and the player strictly observes the regular procedure so that no penalty is imposed. In particular, if the promotion replay assist notification is prohibited, the transition to the ART game is hindered as a result, which is effective for strictly adhering to the regular procedure. In this embodiment, execution of “forward push” is defined as a normal procedure during non-AT games or when assist notification is not executed.

  The penalty as described above influences the profit state to be given to the player exclusively by the control (particularly the assist notification appearance control) on the side of the production control unit 410, or manages the winning rate related to the state transition trigger. In a gaming machine that can control a transition state (a transitionable state or a transitional impossible state) between states, it has significant significance.

(About penalty exemptions)
The penalties described above impose a disadvantageous game development on the player, although it is related to game play. Therefore, if the penalty is uniformly imposed when it is not a regular procedure, the player's willingness to play may be reduced, or distrust may be given to the gaming machine. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a “penalty exclusion target” that does not penalize exceptionally is defined. Hereinafter, the penalty exclusion target will be described.

(About penalty exemptions)
In the present embodiment, as already described, for example, if any one of the special ATs 1 to 6 is won, the transition to the ART game becomes definitive (ART direct hit route). The special AT is positioned as the above premium role because the special AT has the lowest winning probability among the small roles (in this embodiment, the lowest among the general roles) Therefore, when this is won, a special privilege is given to the player called ART direct hit.

  Winning a role with a high game value such as the special AT is one of the players' interests. Therefore, if a special AT is won during the penalty period and the game value acquisition right by the win is invalidated, the special AT win will be lost, which is severe for the player. Too much. Moreover, such a situation may reduce the player's willingness to play and increase distrust of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in view of the above-described problems, the special AT itself is excluded as a penalty function as a relief function, and even if it is during the penalty period, the right to generate the assist notification by the special AT winning is not invalidated. This is treated as valid. The relief function is related to the assist notification appearance control, and the effect control unit 410 plays the function part.

  In the above description, the special AT has been described as not subject to a penalty, but the present invention is not limited to this. In relation to the above problem, a penalty effect can be excluded from the freeze effect. The reason is as follows.

  Unlike the effects related to the game progress during normal times, the above freeze is a heterogeneous effect with a delay period such as temporarily interrupting the game progress, and can mainly be given high profit or (For example, it is used as a notice effect (high expectation effect) that informs or implies that it is an opportunity to transition to AT games), and when a freeze occurs, the player has a great expectation for profit acquisition. I will send it. For this reason, when the above freeze occurs, it is preferably excluded from the penalty.

  Also, not all of the freeze production types of freezes A to D are excluded from the penalty, but a specific freeze production type, for example, a freeze production type of “freeze C” or “freeze D” having a relatively high expectation degree. If this occurs (see FIG. 26), this can be excluded from the penalty. In this case, in addition to the special AT, “strong cherry”, “strong watermelon”, etc. (see FIG. 26) for which the freeze effect type of freeze C / D can be selected can be a role that is not subject to penalty.

  In this embodiment, as a penalty condition, when an irregular push is performed in a state where no AT game is occurring (during non-AT game), an irregularity in a state where some assist notification is not occurring (during non-assist notification) Although it is assumed that the push is executed, even if the push order satisfying the penalty condition is executed, the penalty does not need to be imposed in the following cases.

  For example, in this game, there is a case where an irregular pressing is performed in a state where no matter what pressing order is applied, the machine discount is not affected. Specifically, if the winning combination of this game is not a “push order prescribed role” that is related to the push order, that is, “push order unquestioned part”, it may be configured not to penalize exceptionally. good. If the winning order is unquestionable, the winning combination will not differ depending on the pressing order, so there is little need to penalize the player, there is no extra penalty for the player, and there is a particular inconvenience in gaming. Because there is no.

  In addition, when the assist notification itself is not generated as in the state where the assist notification condition is established in the promotion replay, but the assist notification is scheduled to occur, this is treated as “assist notification is being generated” and is exceptional. You can avoid penalizing it. This is because, even if the assist notification condition establishment state is established during the game according to the regular procedure, if the scheduled assist notification is invalidated, it is too severe for the player.

(Warning production during penalty)
In the present embodiment, when a penalty occurs, a “warning effect” is displayed by the effect means in order to notify the player of this. The content of this “warning effect” is an effect mode for notifying that a penalty has occurred and that it is during the penalty period. For example, a warning is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 6a to notify that a penalty has been imposed. This warning effect informs the player that a penalty has been imposed, and then urges the player to follow a regular procedure. However, a penalty will be imposed if it was originally, but as described above, if the penalty is not exceptionally imposed, the warning indication is given to notify the player that the irregular procedure has been executed. Is preferably performed.

  In this warning effect, for example, (i) a first warning effect that warns the player when an irregular procedure (an irregular pressing) is executed (for example, the first case is used for the first case except the left case 5a). (When the stop operation cylinder is used, a warning sound is generated at the time of the stop operation), (ii) a second warning effect informing that the penalty has actually been imposed, and (iii) informing that the penalty is being applied. 3 warning effects (for example, a warning effect with a “penalty game number display” such as “up to 5 penalty remaining games”), and the like.

  Of the warning effects described above, the warning effects need not always appear until the penalty is released. For example, if the current game is an irregular procedure, a warning effect may appear only for that game. For example, the display of the third warning effect may be canceled when the remaining number of penalty cancellation games reaches one game to several games. This is because it may be troublesome for the player if the warning effect is continuously displayed until the penalty is released.

  In addition, the above-mentioned warning effect is exclusively used for image display effect by image display in order to clearly notify the player, but depending on the warning effect mode, without performing the image display effect or with the image display effect, A warning effect can be produced by a warning sound by a sound effect, a special light emission mode (warning light) by a light effect, or the like.

(About the penalty for special roles (BB))
“BB” is a role for shifting to a special game state called bonus game, and this bonus game does not bring a profit to the player due to the difference in the production state like AT game, and is exclusively for the general role type. It is a gaming state in which the probability is raised and the player is profited. For this reason, there is no need to penalize the production for BB, and this is not a penalty.

  It should not be confused here that the role that is meaningful in penalizing is the transition / occurrence of AT games that cannot be managed by the main control unit 40 (management control of the number of continuing games and additional games related to AT games) The winning combination or winning combination related to Therefore, when a BB having the following performance is provided, it can be a penalty.

  For example, during a bonus game by BB winning, a game state in which a push order determining combination (for example, AT1 to AT12) is selected with a high probability is set, and further, an assist notification of an advantageous winning combination (for example, Bell 1) related to the AT winning is performed. This is a case where the gaming machine has a so-called “twin bonus” function in which the player's profit is influenced by the presence or absence. For example, there are cases such as a bonus game without assist notification in BB1 winning (normal bonus) and a bonus game with assist notification in BB2 winning (hyper bonus). In this case, the bonus game depends on the player's profit depending on the presence or absence of the AT game that is controlled on the side of the effect control unit 410 and accompanied by the assist notification of the advantageous winning combination. In this case, for example, when BB1 is won during the penalty, a penalty such as limiting the occurrence of assist notification and dropping the hyper bonus to the normal bonus can be imposed.

<Game operation control processing>
Next, the processing content related to the gaming operation control of the spinning-reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail.

<Processing on the main control side: FIGS. 8 to 17>
With reference to FIG. 8 to FIG. 16, processing contents on the main control unit 400 side that generally manages main game operations will be described.

(1. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 8)
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing (main control side main processing) on the main control unit (main control board) 400 side in accordance with the game operation control program. This process is executed by the main CPU 401c. For convenience of explanation, the main body that executes the process will be referred to as the main control unit 400.

  When the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on signal indicating that the power is turned on is sent from a power supply board (not shown). In response to this power-on signal, the main control unit 400 starts the main process on the main control side shown in FIG.

  In the main control side main process, step S11 is performed as the first process after the power is turned on, and in other cases, steps S12 to S26 are performed as processes during normal operation.

  In the main process on the main control side, the initial setting process in step S11 is executed as the first process when the power is turned on. In other cases, the processes in steps S12 to S27 are executed as processes in normal operation.

  After the above initial setting process is completed normally, a RAM initialization process (step S12) is performed. In this RAM initialization process, predetermined data used at the end of the previous game is cleared, and a work area necessary for the current game is secured.

  Next, a game state flag generation process is performed (step S13). In this game state flag generation process, the game mode (main control unit side game state) of the current game is confirmed based on the mode data in the main RAM 401b, and the game state flag (for example, RT game type or bonus game) corresponding thereto is confirmed. A flag for identifying the main control unit side gaming state such as medium is set. The gaming state of the current game is designated by the gaming state flag.

  Next, a game medal insertion process is performed (step S14). In this game medal insertion process, mainly the detection of game medals inserted into the main body of the gaming machine, the management of credits, the automatic insertion process of game medals when there is a request for re-game, etc., and the game can be started It is monitored whether or not a predetermined number of game medals have been inserted. When it is confirmed that the prescribed number of game medals have been inserted, the game start condition is established, and the operation detection signal from the rotating cylinder rotation start switch 11a is sent while the condition establishment condition is maintained. .

  When receiving the operation detection signal from the rotating cylinder rotation start switch 11a, the main control unit 400 acquires an internal lottery random value (numerical value range: 0 to 65535) based on the counter value of the counter circuit 403 (step S15). .

  Next, an internal lottery process based on the acquired random number for internal lottery is performed (step S16). In this internal lottery process, an internal lottery based on the acquired random number for internal lottery and the lottery table (FIG. 24) corresponding to the current gaming state is performed, and winning combination information (winning flag) corresponding to the internal lottery result Set. Here, a “game start information command” is set as an effect control command. This game start information command includes at least winning combination information (lottery result information), and in the present embodiment, includes gaming state information and winning combination information. Information included in the game start information command is used on the side of the production control unit 410 to determine the production that appears during the current game, or to draw lots (for example, FIGS. 27 to 31) regarding the number of pseudo bonuses and additional games. The The effect control command is transmitted from the main control unit 400 to the effect control unit 410 in a command output process during the main control unit side timer interrupt process of FIG.

  Next, reel effect lottery processing is performed (step S17). In this reel effect lottery process, with reference to the normal freeze effect lottery table (FIG. 26), a freeze effect lottery (normal freeze effect lottery) based on the internal lottery result in step S16 and the current game state is performed, and the freeze lottery concerned. A setting process based on the result is performed. Details of the reel effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a setting process at the time of rotation rotation start (rotation rotation start setting process) is performed (step S18). In this rotation rotation start setting process, data necessary for starting rotation of the rotation cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c, for example, rotation rotation operation related to rotation rotation production and normal rotation operation are necessary. Data (control data for rotating operation of the rotating cylinder (control data for the rotating cylinder driving motors 211a, 211b, 211c)) and a game start wait timer (4.1 for specifying the shortest time of one game) Second). In addition, after the game start wait timer elapses, a “rotation start command” indicating rotation start is set as an effect control command. Then, the rotating cylinder is started to rotate (normal rotating operation), whereby each of the rotating cylinders 5a, 5b, and 5c enters a rotating state. The details of the rotation rotation start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, when the rotating cylinder is started to rotate and all the rotating cylinders reach a substantially constant speed, a stop operation permission state is made in which the stop operation of the rotating cylinder rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, and 12c is made effective. In this stop operation permissible state, when the rotating cylinder rotation stop button 12a, 12b, or 12c is operated, a rotating cylinder stop process is performed to stop and control the rotating cylinder that is the target of the stop operation (step S19). In this turning stop process, in addition to the process related to turning stop control, the pushing order of the turning cylinder is monitored, and the push order unrestricted freeze effect (here, freeze effect other than the freeze effect when the lever is turned on) and the push order regulation Manage and control the occurrence of freeze effects. The details of the rotating cylinder stop process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When it is confirmed that all the cylinders are stopped, a winning determination process is performed (step S20). In this winning determination process, based on the winning line data (symbol stop information), it is confirmed whether the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the effective winning line, that is, whether or not a winning has occurred. Is confirmed, the number of game medals to be paid out is set based on the stopped combination of symbols.

  Further, here, “winning information command (all-turn cylinder stop command)” is set as an effect control command when all-cylinder is stopped. This winning information command includes various types of game information that can identify the current game result, such as stop symbol information when all the cylinders are stopped, and winning line information. When the “winning information command” is transmitted from the main control unit 400 side, the production control unit 410 side displays an effect (for example, a prize production effect) related to the time when all the cylinders are stopped (when the game result is derived) An effect control process required when stopping all the cylinders is performed, such as a transition control of the effect state based on the game result.

  Next, a medal payout number monitoring process is performed (step S21). In this medal payout number monitoring process, based on the payout information set in the winning determination process in step S19, the hopper unit 500 is driven to perform a payout process of a desired number of game medals and a credit addition process. Here, “payout command” is set as an effect control command related to payout. This “payout command” designates that a game medal has been paid out, and is sent to the effect control unit 410 every time there is one payout. The payout command is used when the payout appearance at the time of payout (for example, medal payout sound) appears on the effect control unit 410 side.

  Next, re-game RT setting processing is performed (step S22). In this re-game RT setting process, when the replay is stopped on the valid pay line, a setting process necessary for the re-game operation is performed. When the re-game operation is designated by this process, in the game medal insertion process (step S14) at the next game start, the same number of game medals as the game medals required this time are automatically inserted, and the next game is played as a game medal. It is possible to start without input. In addition, here, setting processing relating to transition control between RT games caused by winning of a promotion trigger such as promotion replay or special replay, or a fall trigger combination such as fall replay or bell spilling is also performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a bonus game is in progress (step S23). If the bonus game is being performed (step S23: YES), a bonus game operating process is performed (step S25). In the bonus game operating process, a process required to continue and end the bonus game is performed. When the bonus game operating process is completed, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process in step S12.

  On the other hand, if the bonus game is not being played (step S23: NO), it is next determined whether or not the bonus combination has stopped on the effective pay line (step S25). If the bonus combination has not stopped (step S23: NO), the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process of step S12, and the processes after step S13 are sequentially performed.

  On the other hand, when the bonus combination stops on the effective pay line (step S24: YES), bonus game operation start processing is performed (step S25). In this bonus game operation start processing, for example, the bonus acquisition number counter for managing the number of acquired bonus games and the bonus winning flag are cleared, and before the bonus start necessary for shifting to the bonus game from the next game. Perform the setting process. When the bonus game operation start process is completed, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process of step S12, and the processes after step S13 are sequentially performed.

<2. Reel effect lottery processing (step S17): FIG. 9>
Next, the reel effect lottery process (step S17) of FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the reel effect lottery process of FIG.

  In FIG. 9, the main control board 400 first acquires the winning combination information lottery in the random number acquisition process of step S15 (step S101).

  Next, the current game state is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is a freezing effect lottery target for the game state (step S102). The freeze effect lottery target role here is a push order unrestricted freeze opportunity role.

  If it is a freeze effect lottery target (step S102: YES), freeze effect lottery processing is performed (step S103). Here, referring to the normal freeze effect lottery table of FIG. 26, based on the current game state (game state flag) and the winning role type, the freeze effect type belonging to one of freezes A to D of the push order unrestricted freeze effect. One (accurately, any one of A1 to E3) is determined by lottery.

  Although not shown in the normal freeze effect lottery table, the current game state (RT0 game to RT2 game) and the winning role type, the outline of the freeze effect type (freezes A to D), and the specifics belonging to each Freezes (freezes A1 to E3) are defined in association with each other, and the freeze production type to be executed belongs to any of freezes A to D, and which execution freeze is specifically specified in the freeze part. Whether to do this is determined by a lottery using a random number for freezing effect lottery with a predetermined lottery probability. However, paying attention to the specific gaming state that becomes the opportunity for the promotion chance zone or the extra lottery opportunity, when the gaming state is a specific gaming state (RT0 to RT2 gaming), a freeze effect is generated. It has been established.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as described above, the freeze effect types are classified into freezes A to D. That is, the freeze effects include freezes A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C4, and D1 to D5 shown in FIG. 35A, and there are categories of freezes A to D as classification destinations of these freeze effects. In this example, freezes A1 to A5 belong to the freeze A category, freezes B1 to B5 belong to the freeze B category, C1 to C4 belong to the freeze C category, and D1 to D5 belong to the freeze D category. ing. Therefore, when the category of freezes A to D is determined by the normal freeze effect lottery, any freeze effect belonging to the category is determined by a predetermined lottery (freeze selection lottery). For example, when freeze A is selected by lottery, one of freezes A1 to A5 belonging to this, for example, freeze A1 is selected by lottery, and a freeze effect is generated. The lottery probability of the freeze effect type by the above freeze selection lottery can be determined as appropriate according to game play. If each of the freeze effects belonging to the freeze A to D category is single, the freeze effect is determined by the normal freeze effect lottery without using the freeze selection lottery (the freeze selection lottery is unnecessary).

  When the freeze effect lottery process is completed, a freeze effect flag corresponding to the freeze effect lottery result is set (step S104). As described above, this freeze effect flag is a flag for identifying (designating) a freeze effect type generated in the current game, and is cleared for each game. If it is determined in the process of step S104 that the combination is not the target for the freezing effect lottery (step S102: NO), the freezing effect lottery is handled as “losing” and the freezing effect flag is set to “00H”. Accordingly, in the process of step S104, a freeze effect flag corresponding to the lottery result of the freeze effect lottery (step S103) or a freeze effect flag corresponding to the occurrence of no freeze (lost) (unoccurrence (lost) = 00H) is set. Will be.

  Next, a “freeze type command” based on the freeze effect flag set in step S104 is set (step S105). This freeze type command includes freeze effect type information (including information indicating that no freeze has occurred). By transmitting this freeze type command to the effect control unit 410, any type of freeze is generated. The effect control unit 410 recognizes whether the effect is generated or has not occurred, and is used when the effect control unit 410 determines the effect scenario of the current freeze effect (the effect scenario when the freeze occurs). Further, on the side of the production control unit 410, based on the information included in the game start information command set in the internal lottery process and the freeze type command, the current game state (main control unit side game state), winning combination information, In addition, it grasps the type of freeze effect (including no occurrence of freeze), and performs various lotteries (FIGS. 27 to 31, FIGS. 32A to 32E, etc.) and assist notification control processing.

  Next, the freeze effect flag is checked, and it is determined whether or not the lever-on freeze effect is related to a non-rotating spinning effect (non-rotating spinning effect) that does not involve irregular rotation (step S106). . In the present embodiment, “Freeze D1” corresponds to the non-rotating spinning effect, so it is determined here whether or not it is Freeze D1.

  If the freeze effect type is not freeze D1 (step S106 ≠ 04H), the reel effect lottery process is exited without doing anything.

  However, if the freeze effect type is freeze D1 (step S106 = 04H), a freeze command (for freeze D1) is set assuming that the condition for occurrence of freeze D1 is satisfied (step S107). This “freeze command” is a command for specifying the start of a freeze effect, and when the freeze command is transmitted from the main control unit 400 side to the effect control unit 410 side, the effect control unit 410 side causes an effect scenario when a freeze occurs. The effect control process for displaying the freeze effect (effect during sub-freeze) is performed. Therefore, the freeze command serves as a trigger timing for generating an effect during sub-freeze.

  Next, the freeze time required for freeze D1 (delay time: here, “30000 ms (30 seconds)” corresponding to freeze D1) is set in the freeze timer (step S108). The “freeze timer” is a timer for managing the freeze time, and is one of the timer management areas of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, there is one kind of non-rotating rotator effect. However, when a plurality of non-rotating rotator effects are provided, a freeze time corresponding to each non-rotating rotator effect is set. .

  Then, a designated number interrupt waiting process is performed to wait for the freeze timer time to elapse (step 108). Since the freeze D1 is a freeze when the lever is turned on without the rotating operation of the rotating drum, it waits until the freeze timer elapses. When the freeze timer has elapsed, a “freeze end command” is transmitted. The freeze end command is a command for specifying the end of the freeze state. When the freeze end command is transmitted from the main control unit 400 side to the effect control unit 410 side, the effect control unit 410 side Freeze production ends. As a result, the reel effect lottery process is exited, and the process proceeds to the spinning cylinder rotation start process (step S18) in FIG. In the case of a freeze effect type with a spinning effect other than the non-rotating spinning effect, the control is performed in a later-described spinning rotation start setting process (step S18) and a spinning stop process (step S18).

<3. Spindle rotation start setting process: FIG. 10>
Next, referring to FIG. 10, the spinning cylinder rotation start setting process (step S <b> 18) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the spinning cylinder stop process of FIG.

  In FIG. 10, the main control unit 400 first acquires the freeze effect flag set in step S104 (step S201), and the freeze effect flag is a freeze effect with irregular rotation among the lever-on freeze effects. (1/4 frame reverse rotation) or not, that is, whether or not the freeze effect flag “01H to 03H” (see FIG. 35A) of freezes A1, B1, and C1 is determined (step S202). If it is related to the freeze effect with irregular rotation (step S202: YES), irregular rotation setting processing (S202 to S206) is performed. On the other hand, when it does not relate to the freeze effect with irregular rotation (step S202 NO), the process proceeds to step S207 described later.

(Anomalous rotation setting process (at the start of rotation): S202 to S206)
In the case of a freeze effect with irregular rotation, first, the routine proceeds to the irregular rotation start setting process in step S203, and motor control data (rotating drum drive motors 211a, 211b, 211c) for irregular rotation operation according to the freeze effect type is controlled. Data to be set) (step S203). As a rotation effect, the motor control of the rotation cylinder that reversely rotates 1/4 frame is based on the motor control data set here, and the rotation control process (FIG. 17 described later) during the main control timer interrupt control process. In step S43).

  Next, a freeze command corresponding to the freeze effect flag type (freeze A1, B1, C1) is set (step S204), and the freeze time corresponding to the freeze effect flag type (freeze A1, B1, C1) is set in the freeze timer. (Step S205).

  Next, a designated number interrupt waiting process is performed to wait for the freeze timer time corresponding to the current freeze effect to elapse (step S206). Here, for example, freeze A1 “1/4 frame reverse rotation and then stop for about 2 seconds”, freeze B1 “1/4 frame reverse rotation and then stop for about 5 seconds”, freeze C1 “1/4” It waits for the freeze time for the irregular rotation of “frame reverse rotation and subsequent stop for about 5 seconds and reverse rotation for 10 seconds” to elapse. During the freeze time, the irregular rotation is performed in the rotating rotation control process (step S43 in FIG. 17) during the main control timer interrupt control process.

  As described above, when the freeze effect flag is any of 01H to 03H in the determination in step S202, one of freezes A1, B1, and C1 is performed as the freeze effect at the start of rotation of the rotating cylinder. After the processing of S203 to S305, the process proceeds to step S207. However, if the freeze effect flag is not any of 01H to 03H, the process proceeds to step S207 without passing through the processes of steps S203 to S206.

(Normal rotation setting process: S207 to S211)
In step S207, a game start wait timer is acquired as a preparation for normal rotation of the spinning cylinder (step S207), and it is confirmed whether or not the timer value is 0 (step S208). If the value of the game start wait timer is not 0, the process waits until the timer value becomes 0 (step S208: NO). This game start wait timer is a timer for regulating the “game time of one game” in the normal operation, and 4.1 seconds is set in the process of the next step S209. As a result, the time required for one game is 4.1 seconds at the shortest.

  If the game start wait timer is 0 (step S208: YES), first, the above-mentioned 4.1 seconds are set as the minimum time required for one game in the game start wait timer (step S209). Then, as the normal rotation start setting process, “control data for normal rotation operation” is set, and “01H (during full rotation)” is set to the rotation state flag (step S210). Here, control data for normal rotation is set, and after the freeze time related to the lever-on freeze, all the cylinders start normal rotation by this processing, and the first rotation operation of the rotation rotation stop button 12 is performed. Is allowed (the built-in LED of the rotating cylinder rotation stop button changes from red to blue). As a result, the rotation rotation start setting process with and without the lever-on freeze is substantially ended.

  Finally, as the production control command, a “rotation start command” for designating that the spinning cylinder has been started is set, thereby exiting the spinning cylinder rotation start setting process (step S211). The rotation start command here is an alternative to transmitting a freeze end command to the effect control unit 410 side. When notifying the effect control unit 410 of the end of the freeze effect at the start of spinning rotation, a “freeze end command” may be prepared and transmitted. However, immediately after the freeze ends, the rotation start command is always set. Since this is transmitted to the effect control unit 410 side, the freeze end command can be substituted by the rotation start command without preparing and transmitting the freeze end command. As described above, each of the drums 5a, 5b, and 5c enters a rotating state (normal rotating operation).

<Rotation stop processing: FIG. 11>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the spinning cylinder stop process (step S19) of FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the spinning cylinder stop process of FIG.

  In this rotating cylinder stop process, the rotation stop control process of each rotating cylinder is sequentially performed by passing the steps S301 to S307 of the rotating cylinder stop process three times in total. Further, in the case where the winning combination is a push order unrestricted freezing opportunity, the winning combination lottery (step S103) at the time of lever-on has been won, and based on the winning result, the first stop operation is performed. Effects related to one or more or all of the freeze (trigger category β), the freeze at the second stop operation (trigger category γ), and the freeze at the third stop operation (trigger category δ) Processing is performed. Among these, the control processing for “freeze at the first stop operation (trigger category β)” and “freeze at the second stop operation (trigger category γ)”, which are the freeze effects before all cylinder stoppages, It is performed in the freeze effect process before the cylinder stop (step S308), and the freeze (trigger category δ) at the time of the third stop operation is performed in the freeze effect process after the full-time cylinder stop (step S309). For the linkage freeze effect (trigger category β + γ, trigger category β + γ + δ), the necessary processing is performed using the freeze effect process before stopping the full-time cylinder stop (step S308) and the freeze effect process after stopping the full-time cylinder (step S309). Done. In the case where the winning combination is a push order regulation freeze opportunity role, the push order is confirmed in the specific role freeze production management process (step S307), and a control process is performed to generate a freeze production corresponding to the push order. Is called.

  In FIG. 11, first, the main control unit 400 determines whether or not the rotation rotation stop button 12 has been operated while the rotation can be stopped (step S301). In the present embodiment, in the main control unit 400, when the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated and each rotating cylinder starts normal rotation, and the rotation of the rotating cylinder rises to a substantially constant rotational speed, the corresponding rotation of each rotating cylinder is started. The stop operation function of the trunk rotation stop button 12 is effectively activated (stoppable state). At this time, the stop button lamp built in the stop button changes from red to blue under the control of the production control unit, and the stop operation can be performed. The player is informed that this is the case. For this reason, the stop operation of the rotating cylinder rotation stop button 12 is effective only when all the rotating cylinders rise to a certain speed and the corresponding rotating cylinder is in a stoppable state. Even if the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12 is operated by a person, it is treated as an operation that cannot stop the spinning cylinder (stop operation invalid).

  If there is a stop operation for the rotation rotation stop button 12 in a state where the rotation stop is possible (step S301: YES), stop preparation data is set (step S302). The stop preparation data includes “stop operation order data” that can specify the pressing order, and “stop rotation number data” that can specify the number of rotations that have already stopped (number of stop rotations) (for example, the first stop rotation data). In the case of a stop operation, there is no number of rotations that have already been stopped, so this is data that specifies 'number of stop rotations = 0'). “Cylinder data”, a stop interval timer (for example, 213 ms) including a time required for the rotating cylinder to completely stop under the pull-in control, and the like are set as stop preparation data. The current pushing order and the first stop operation can be grasped from the stop operation order data and the current rotation stop number data.

  Next, a “stop information reception command” is set as an effect control command when the stop button is operated, and is transmitted to the effect control unit (step S303). This stop information acceptance command includes information on the above stop operation order data, stop turn number data, and stop target turn data.

  Next, a symbol stop control process is performed (step S304). In this symbol stop control process, a target stop table (not shown) is selected based on the winning information (internal winning flag) and the stop operation procedure (push order or stop operation timing), and the number of sliding frames is selected from the stop table. , And stop rotation control (retraction control) based on this is performed. In addition, when the spinning cylinder stops, based on the stop position, it is possible to specify on which winning line the symbol number of which symbol is stopped on each spinning cylinder. ) ”Is created and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM. This symbol stop information is created each time the drum is stopped, and cleared every game. In addition, although the stop position of the rotating cylinder can be grasped even when the rotating cylinder actually stops, based on the stop operation symbol number and the number of sliding frames, at the stage before the rotating cylinder stops completely, It is also possible to grasp the stop position of the rotating drum.

  Next, a “stop result information command” is set as an effect control command at the time of rotation stop (step S305). The “stop result information command” includes the symbol stop information created when the rotating drum stops.

  On the production control unit 410 side, in accordance with the “stop result information command” and “stop input information reception command”, the order of pushing, the current rotation / stop state of the spinning cylinder, and the winning line (effective winning line) An effect control process is performed for grasping the stop symbol and presenting an effect related to the stop control of the rotating cylinder or penalizing it.

  Next, the timer time (213 ms) set in the stop interval timer is monitored (step S306), and if the stop interval timer is not 0, it waits until the timer becomes 0. If the stop interval timer becomes 0 (step S306: YES), then a specific combination freeze effect management process is performed (step S307). In this specific combination freezing effect management process, a control process necessary for generating a freezing effect related to the push order regulation freezing opportunity is performed. Details of the specific combination freeze effect management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a “freeze effect process before all-turns stop” is performed to cause a freeze effect before all-turns stop, which is triggered by the stop operation (first stop operation or second stop operation) of the turn cylinder (step S308). The details of the freeze effect processing before all-turn cylinder stop will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether or not all the cylinders are stopped (step S309). After the first stop operation or after the second stop operation, since there is still a rotating cylinder, the determination is NO, and the process returns to step S301 to wait for the entire cylinder stop by the third stop operation. .

  If all the cylinders stop through these first to third stop operations (step S309: YES), the “all” to make a freeze effect after all cylinders stop triggered by the third stop operation. “Freeze effect processing after stop of rotation” is entered (step S310). Details of the freeze effect processing after the all-rounding stop will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the freeze effect flag is cleared (step S311). As a result, the process exits from the turning cylinder stop process and proceeds to the winning determination process (step S20) in FIG.

<Specific role freeze production management processing: FIG. 12>
Next, the specific combination freeze effect management process (step S307) in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the specific combination freeze effect management process of FIG. In this specific combination freezing effect management process, a pre-start process for generating a freezing effect for a push order regulation freezing opportunity is performed. The processing related to the occurrence of the freeze related to the push order regulation freeze trigger is performed in a freeze effect processing before the all-round torsion stop (step S308, FIG. 13) and a freeze effect processing after the all-round torso stop (step S310, FIG. 15). Done.

  In FIG. 12, the main control unit 400 first checks whether the winning combination is a push order regulation freeze trigger (in this embodiment, any of special AT1-6, replay B1-B3, AT3-AT4). (Step S431).

  When the winning combination is not the push order regulation freeze trigger (step S431: NO), the specific combination freeze production management process is exited without doing anything.

  However, if the winning combination is a push order regulation freeze trigger (step S431: YES), the process proceeds to step S432, and the freeze effect selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (main control unit side gaming state) (FIG. 33A). (FIG. 33E) is acquired (step S432). Then, referring to the freeze effect selection table, the corresponding freeze effect is determined based on the push order specified freeze trigger type selected this time and the current push order (freeze push order determination process: step S433).

  If there is no corresponding freeze effect (step S434: NO), the specific combination freeze effect management process is exited.

  On the other hand, when there is a corresponding freeze effect (step S434: YES), a freeze effect flag based on the result of the freeze pressing order determination process in step S433 is set (step S435). Based on the freeze effect flag set here, the rotation effect (occurrence of freeze) is controlled in the freeze effect before freeze-stopping all times (step S308) for freezes F7 and F8 before freeze-stopping all-turns. For the freezes F1 to F5, G1, and G2, the rotation effect (occurrence of the freeze) is controlled in the freeze effect processing after the all-time cylinder stop.

  Next, a “freeze type command” based on the freeze effect flag set in step S435 is set (step S436). As a result, the specific combination freezing effect management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the freezing effect before stopping all-rounding in FIG.

<Freeze production process before stopping all cylinders: Fig. 13>
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the freeze effect process (step S308) before the all-cylinder stop of FIG. 11 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the freeze effect process before stopping the full turn of FIG.

  In the freeze effect process before the all-rounding cylinder stop shown in FIG. 13, the control process for the freeze effect before the all-rounding cylinder stop is performed.

  In FIG. 13, the main control unit 400 first obtains a freeze effect flag (precisely, a freeze effect flag including the case of non-winning) (step 401), and the freeze effect flag is frozen before the all-rounding stop. It is determined whether or not it relates to the effect flag type (step 402). In other words, freeze effect flags “05H to 0FH” related to freezes A2, B2, C2 and D2, freeze A3, B3, C3 and D3, freezes A4, B4 and C4, and freeze effect flags “13H to 15H” related to freezes E1 to E3. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the freeze effect flag “1CH to 1DH” (see FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B) related to freezes F7 and F8 (step 402).

  If the acquired freeze effect flag does not relate to the freeze effect flag type before all cylinder stop (trigger classification β, γ in FIG. 34) (step 402: NO), that is, the freeze effect flag is “00H” (no freeze effect) In the case of “normal operation”, “01H to 04H” (freeze at the start of rotation), and “10H to 12H, 1EH to 20H” (freeze after stopping all cylinders), this process is performed without doing anything, and the step of FIG. The process proceeds to the determination process of S308 (determination process as to whether or not all cylinders are stopped).

  When the acquired freeze effect flag is related to the freeze effect flag type before all cylinder stop (trigger section β, γ: 05H to 0FH, 13H to 15H, 1CH to 1DH in FIG. 34) (step 402: YES) Then, the process proceeds to step 403, where it is determined whether or not there is a stop operation for the freeze occurrence target (step S403). Considering the relationship with the judgment time, the freeze A2, B2, C2, D2, and F8 (freeze effect flags “05H to 08H” are assumed to belong to the “freeze effect before triggering all cylinders in the trigger section β” during the first stop operation. 1CH "), Freeze A4 / B4 / C4 (Freeze effect flag" 0DH to 0FH "), Freeze E1 to E3 (Freeze effect flag" 13H to 15H "), Freeze F7 and F8 (Freeze effect flag" 1CH to 1DH ") ), The determination result is YES, and freeze A3, B3, C3, D3, freeze, as belonging to “freeze production before all cylinder stops in trigger category γ” during the second stop operation A4 / B4 / C4 second stage (second freeze), freeze E1-E3 second stage (second freeze) If the determination result is YES, the process proceeds to step S404. If not, the process exits without performing anything and proceeds to the determination process of step S308 in FIG. When freezes F7 and F8 occur, that is, when the freeze effect flag “1CH to 1DH” relating to freezes F7 and F8 is set, the freeze has already occurred in the specific role freeze effect management process (step S307). Since the pressing order is determined, the determination process of step S403 is substantially performed, and step S403 is a redundant determination process. Therefore, when the freeze effect flag “1CH to 1DH” related to the freezes F7 and F8 is set, the process may directly proceed to step S406 without performing the process of step S403.

  Here, the scenarios of “freeze A4, B4, and C4” are the first freeze effect at the first stop operation (trigger category β: first stage) and the second freeze at the second stop operation (trigger category γ), respectively. : Freeze E1 to E3 are the first freeze at the first stop (trigger section β: first stage) and the second at the second stop. 2 freezes (trigger section γ: second stage) and a third freeze (trigger section δ: third stage) at the time of the third stop of the rotating cylinder, of which trigger sections β to δ As to which part of the (first stage to third stage) should be processed, the stop operation order data and the current stop order data that can be specified as to the current push order and the number of stop operation It is grasped by the number of rotation stop data. Therefore, at the time of the first stop operation, the freeze A4, B4, C4 and the freeze E1 to E3 “parts belonging to the first stage trigger category β” are processed, and at the time of the second stop operation, the freezes A4, B4, C4. In addition, “the portion belonging to the second-stage trigger category γ” of the freezes E1 to E3 is a processing target. Note that the “part belonging to the third-stage trigger category δ” of the freezes E1 to E3 at the time of the third stop operation of the freezes E1 to E3 corresponds to the freeze effect processing after the all-round trunk stop (step S310 in FIG. 11). Processing is performed.

  In the following, the freeze effect before the all-cylinder stop (the freeze effect type having the trigger sections β and γ in FIG. 34) will be described.

(In the case of freeze production before stopping the whole body)
When the freeze effect flag type is the freeze effect before all cylinder stop, that is, the freeze effect flag is freeze A2, B2, C2, D2, F7 (freeze at the first stop operation), linked freeze A4, B4, C4 (special In the case of the first stage of the rotation) (freeze at the first and second stop operations), the first stage of the freeze E1 to E3 of the linkage freeze (freeze at the first, second and third stop operations), A freeze effect is triggered by the first stop operation of the original operation. In the case of the second stage of freeze A3, B3, C3 (special rotation) (freeze at the second stop operation), freeze A4, B4, C4 (special rotation), and the second stage of freeze E1-E3, A freeze effect occurs when the second stop operation, which is the original operation, has been performed. In the case of the third stage of freezes E1 to E3, a freeze effect is generated when the third stop operation of the original target operation is performed. However, in the case of the third stage of the freezes E1 to E3, as described above, a “freeze effect process after all-cylinder stop” (step of FIG. 11) to be executed after completion of the pull-in control after the third stop operation is performed. In step S310), the occurrence of freeze is controlled.

  Therefore, if the determination in step 402 is a freeze effect before stopping the full-time trunk, the first to second stop operations that trigger the occurrence (in the case of the third stop operation, the freeze effect process after stopping the full-time trunk is performed). ) Is performed, for example, it is determined whether or not the first stop operation has been performed. If the first stop operation is confirmed (step 403: YES), all the cylinders belonging to the trigger category β are determined. Freeze state (freeze A2, B2, C2, D2, F7, first stage of linkage freeze A4, B4, C4 (special rotation), linkage freezes E1-E3) related to the freeze production before stopping Setting processing (steps S404 to S408) is performed.

  When the second stop operation is confirmed (step 403: YES), the freeze state (freeze A3 / B3 / C3 (special rotation), freeze A4 / A setting process (steps S404 to S408) for generating the second stage of B4 / C4 (special rotation, the second stage of freezes E1 to E3) is performed.

  If the determination in step S403 is YES in the case of the first stop operation, the freeze effect flag “07H” related to “freeze C2” with the occurrence of a special irregular rotation is then set as the freeze effect type before all-turns stop. It is determined whether or not there is (step S404). If the determination in step S403 is YES in the case of the second stop operation, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect flag “0BH” or “0FH” related to “freeze C3, C4” is set. It is determined whether or not it is the second stage portion of C4 (the portion related to the second stop operation: see FIGS. 34 and 35A).

  Therefore, as a simple description method for collectively expressing both the trigger category β and the trigger category γ for the determination target in step S404, such as “freeze C2, C3, C4” or freeze effect flag “07H, 0BH, 0FH”, It is assumed that the freeze effect type or the freeze effect flag of the trigger category β and the trigger category γ is simply expressed side by side. Step S404 in FIG. 13 describes that the freeze effect flag is simply set to “07H, 0BH, 0FH”, but this is for convenience during the first stop operation (passes through FIG. 12 for the first time). ) In the case of the trigger section β and the case of the trigger section γ in the second stop operation (when passing through the second time in FIG. 12) are collectively described side by side. . In the following description, when it is described that “07H, 0BH, 0FH” is determined, it has the same meaning as described above.

  Here, the “special irregular rotation” means that when the stop cylinder (the first or second cylinder) to be stopped is stopped, the remaining unstopped cylinder (the second cylinder or the second cylinder that is rotating) The 3rd cylinder) suddenly slowly moves or trembles, etc. It is a rotator effect that clearly moves differently from the previous forward rotation. In the columns of freezes C2, C3, and C4 in FIG. "Reel irregular rotation".

  In the process of step S404, if the current stop operation is the first stop operation and the determination is YES, it is premised that the first stop operation has occurred. It is determined whether the freeze effect flag “07H” relating to “C2” is set. Also, since it is premised that the second stop operation has been performed as to whether or not the freeze effect flags “0BH” and “0FH” related to “freeze C3, C4” accompanied by the occurrence of special irregular rotation, When the stop operation is the second stop operation, it is determined in step S404.

  In any case, among the freeze effect flags (05H to 0FH, 13H to 15H, 1CH, and 1DH) before the stop of all cylinders, if the freeze effect is related to the freeze effect flags 07H, 0BH, and 0FH, that is, special irregular rotation is performed. When it is the accompanying freeze effect type (freeze C2, C3, C4) (step S404: YES), the process proceeds to “freeze rotation setting process before stopping all cylinders” in step S405, and freeze effects of freezes C2, C3, and C4 are performed. “Control data for special irregular rotation operation” corresponding to the type is set (step S405). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S406.

  When it comes via step S405 (in the case of the freeze effect type with special irregular rotation), in the subsequent step S406, the freeze time corresponding to the freeze effect flag type (here 07H, 0BH, 0FH) is set in the freeze timer. (Step S406). Next, a freeze command corresponding to the freeze effect flag type (here, 07H, 0BH, 0FH) is set (step S407). The effect control unit 410 receives this freeze command, and performs effect control processing for presenting an effect based on the currently frozen sub-effect (presentation when freeze occurs) scenario. Then, after performing “the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect” (step S408), the process returns to step S307 after exiting the freeze effect process before stopping all the cylinders. Details of the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the case of a freeze effect without special irregular rotation as a determination in step S404 (step S404: NO), the process proceeds to step S406 without going through the all-cylinder stop freeze rotation setting process in step S405. This is because, in the case of a freeze effect without special irregular rotation, even if the rotation rotation stop button is operated (first stop operation, second stop operation), the rotation stop function does not work, and the rotation is normally rotated. Because it is related to the freeze that is being performed, or the freeze after the third stop operation that is not dealt with here (freeze production after all cylinder stops), setting processing for special irregular rotation operation is not required It is.

  In the case of a freeze effect without special irregular rotation (step S406 that bypasses step S405), a freeze time corresponding to the freeze effect flag type (in this case, other than 07H, 0BH, and 0FH) is set in the freeze timer. Next, a freeze command corresponding to the freeze effect flag type is set.

  The effect control unit 410 receives this freeze command and determines the effect scenario of the sub-freeze effect during the current freeze (the effect when the freeze occurs and the effect during the operation during the freeze). Then, “the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect” (step S408) is performed, the freeze effect process before the all-round trunk stop is exited, and the process returns to step S307.

(Operation effect processing during previous freeze effect: first half of FIG. 14)
FIG. 14 shows the details of the “previous freeze effect operation effect process (step S408 in FIG. 12)”. Here, a case will be described in which the operation effect process during the pre-freeze effect in FIG. 14 is called (at the time of the first stop operation) in step S408 of the freeze effect process before stopping all cylinders belonging to the trigger category β.

  First, the main control unit 400 determines whether or not an operation for generating the “effect during operation during freezing” is performed within the freeze time (step S501). Specifically, whether or not there has been an operation with respect to the spinning cylinder rotation stop button 12, the spinning cylinder rotation start lever 11, the MAX bet button 8, the 1 bet button 9 or the like that acts as a trigger means for generating an effect during operation during freeze It is determined whether or not (step S501). If the freeze generated by the first stop operation is in progress, the second stop operation for the purpose of progressing the game (not the game progress target operation is invalid but the operation command) In addition to making a determination (step S403) whether or not there has been a rotation), the rotation rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, and 12c, the rotation rotation start lever 11, the MAX bet buttons 8, 1 It is determined whether or not an operation of the operation means (manual operation switches) such as the bet button 9 has been performed.

  When any of these operation means is operated, an operation signal is generated. Whether or not an operation signal is input from these operation means is monitored in the port input process (step S42 in FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process on the main control unit side, and the monitoring function of this operation signal input is frozen. It works effectively even inside. Accordingly, whether or not the operation means has been operated even during the freeze (during freezing production), that is, whether or not there is a target operation that triggers the production of the production during the freezing operation, by the operation command during freezing. 410 side can know. Therefore, when there is an operation of the operating means during the freeze production before the all-cylinder stop (step S501: YES), the crotch stop (progress of the game) is not executed because the freeze is being performed. "Is set (step S502), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 410.

  In the effect control unit 410, when the effect scenario of the effect at the time of the freeze operation is incorporated, based on the operation command during freeze received for a predetermined number of times (for example, the earliest received) during the freeze of the trigger category β. Then, in accordance with the effect scenario of the effect during operation during freezing, the effect during the freeze operation (for example, step-up effect during the freeze) is made to appear by the effect means such as the liquid crystal display device 6, the sound device, or the movable body accessory. Become.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as the effect scenario of the effect during the freeze operation prepared on the effect control unit 410 side, for example, the expected expectation degree such as a specific lottery target role or AT game transition is in the order of steps SU1 to SU3. This is an effect scenario in which the effects (images, sounds, light, vibrations, fallen objects, etc.) up to steps SU1 to SU3 in the “step-up effect” that is made higher are displayed. The production scenario during operation according to the expected expectation degree is prepared in the production scenario incorporating the production during operation during freezing in this example.

  For example, during a normal game, the “SU1 scenario” that shows the stage of step SU1 where the winning expectation degree for the promotion assist notification lottery (AT lottery: FIG. 27) is “low” and the expectation degree for winning is “medium” “SU2 scenario” that appears until step SU2 (SU1 → SU2) and “SU3 scenario” that appears until step SU3 (SU1 → SU2 → SU3) where the expectation for winning is “high”. Be prepared. Also, depending on the situation, during the “SU3 scenario”, we can prepare a winning performance with a “very high (winning confirmation)” expectation level, or as a step-up effect at a higher level of the “SU3 scenario” Can prepare a “SU4 scenario” of “very high (winning confirmed)”. Here, for the convenience of explanation, the step-up effect that increases the winning expectation degree of the promotion assist notification lottery (AT lottery) by itself will be described as a representative example as an effect during operation during freeze.

  The effect scenario of the step-up effect is an effect scenario related to the freeze effect when the “freeze type command” transmitted in S105 (see FIG. 9) during the reel effect lottery process is received (when a freeze occurs). When the basic production scenario is set, and the production scenario of the effect during operation during freezing is incorporated in this basic production scenario, the production control for producing the effect during operation during freeze based on the operation of the operation means Process. In addition, it can be determined according to the type of the freezing effect what kind of effect during the freezing operation appears in response to the operation command during freezing based on which operation means.

  For example, when the effect scenario related to the freeze effect is the “SU3 scenario”, when a freeze occurs at the time of the first stop operation, an effect when a predetermined freeze occurs first occurs, and during the effect when the freeze occurs or first When the player operates the operation means related to the appearance of the operation during the freeze operation, the first stage “step SU1” of the step-up effect is displayed and the player performs the operation during the freeze operation for the second time. If the operation means related to the appearance of the second stage "Step SU2" is produced, and the player operates the operation means related to the appearance of the operation effect during the freeze for the third time, The effect of the third step “Step SU3”, which is the final step, can appear. Moreover, there is no restriction | limiting in the step appearance stage appearance number, It is good also as a step-up effect more than step SU4. In addition, here, the first step SU1 has been described as the operation effect during the freeze. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect when the freeze occurs itself can be the first step SU1.

  Here, an example has been described in which a timing for displaying a plurality of types of effects of steps SU1 to SU3 is provided during a freeze effect related to one freeze state period. In particular, in a linked freeze having a plurality of freeze occurrence sections. Since more appearance timings can be provided, the degree of freedom due to freeze production is further expanded.

  As this step effect mode, for example, a background change effect in which the background image changes, a cut-in effect in which a specific image appears, a special sound effect, a special light effect, a vibration effect by a vibration device, a wind pressure effect by a wind pressure device, It is possible to adopt an effect effect, a spinning effect or the like using the operation mode of the movable object. In addition, for example, when an operation command during freeze that is sequentially transmitted by the first, second, and third operations is received, any of the effects described above can be made to appear sequentially. For example, the first time a cut-in effect (special image display effect) in which a specific image is displayed, the second is an explosive sound (special effect sound), the third is a special action effect (moving object action effect) by a movable object. Can be issued. In this case, it is possible to provide a configuration in which several operation effective reception periods are provided within the freeze time, and an operation signal and an operation command during freeze are effectively received within each reception effective time.

  In addition, in the step-up effect, SU1 to SU3 as effects during operation during freezing can appear when there is an operation that is a generation target of effects during operation during freezing according to the scenario. The player knows that the step-up effect (here, “Step SU1” in the first stage) has occurred and the winning expectation is relatively high, and further increases the winning expectation. Since it is expected that a step-up effect (expected degree: “medium” or higher) of “SU2” or “SU3” will occur, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of exaltation.

  In addition, as with the above-described trigger category β, the other trigger categories can be configured to cause a freeze effect of a plurality of types of operation effects during freeze to appear using the operation command during freeze as a trigger. For example, in the case of the freezing effect after all-cylinder stop (trigger category δ), the effect at the time of the freeze operation related to the battle effect such as the freezes F1 to F5 described above can be displayed. The linkage freeze will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Freeze end process: second half of FIG. 14)
If it is determined in step S503 that the value of the freeze timer has become zero and the freeze time has expired (step S503: YES), the process proceeds to “normal rotation start setting process” in step S504, and the freeze with special irregular rotation is performed. If it is the production type, control data for normal rotation operation is set (step S504), and processing for returning to the normal rotation operation after the special irregular rotation operation is performed. Then, a freeze end command is set (step S505). The effect control unit 410 side receives this freeze end command and ends the current sub-effect during freezing. The operation effect process during the previous freeze effect is a process corresponding to the designated interrupt number waiting process (steps S109 and S206) related to the freeze when the lever is turned on, in that the game progress process is delayed until the freeze time elapses. It has become.

  As described above, the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect is exited, and thereby the freeze effect process before the all-round trunk stop in FIG. 13 is ended, and the program proceeds to the determination process in step S309 in FIG.

<Freeze production process after all cylinder stops>
(Freeze production after all cylinder stops (freeze production type belonging to trigger category δ): FIG. 15)
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the freeze effect processing (step S310) after all-turn cylinder stop of FIG. 11 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the freeze effect processing after all-cylinder stop of FIG.

  In the freeze effect processing after the all-round torso stop of FIG. 15, first, a freeze effect flag is acquired (step 451), and the freeze effect flag is “freeze effect flag type after all-round torso stop (trigger classification δ of FIG. 34)”. In other words, that is, freeze effect flags "10H-12H, 16H-1AH, 1EH-20H" related to freezes A5, B5, D5, F1-F5, F9, G1, G2 in FIG. 35A, freezes E1- It is determined whether the freeze effect flag “13H to 15H” related to E3, the freeze effect flag “16H to 1AH, 1EH” related to freezes F1 to F5 and F9, and the freeze effect flag “1FH to 20H” related to freeze G1 and G2. Judgment is made (step 452).

  If the freeze effect flag is not related to the freeze effect flag type after all cylinder stop (step 452: NO), the process exits without doing anything.

  When the freeze effect flag is related to the freeze effect flag type after all-round torso stop (step 452: YES), setting processing necessary for generating the freeze effect after all-to-be-stopped cylinder is performed (steps 453 to S454).

  First, a freeze time corresponding to the freeze effect flag type is set in the freeze timer (step S453), and a freeze command according to the freeze effect flag type is set (step S454). Then, after calling and executing the post-freeze effect operation effect mid-process (FIG. 16) (step S455), the process exits from the all-cylinder stop freeze effect process of FIG. 15 and proceeds to the process of step S311 of FIG.

(Operation effect processing during post-freeze production: FIG. 16)
The operation effect process during the post-freeze effect in FIG. 16 is a process that is called in step S455 of the freeze effect process after the stop of the entire body (FIG. 15). Thereafter, the operation effect process during the freeze effect is a process corresponding to the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect (see step S408 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14). In the following description, substantially the same contents as the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description.

  In FIG. 16, the main control unit 400 first determines whether or not an operation has been performed within the freeze time by the operation means that is the target of the “effect during operation during freeze” (step S511).

  If any of these operation means has been operated (step S511: YES), the operation signal is generated, and an “in-frozen operation command” corresponding to the operation of the operation means is set (step S512). Since the game is now frozen, the game progress to the subsequent winning determination process (step S20 in FIG. 8) is not performed.

  In the effect control unit 410, the effect during the freeze operation is made to appear by the effect means such as the liquid crystal display device 6, the sound device, and the accessory based on the operation command during the freeze. As an effect at the time of operation during freeze that appears here, for example, a step-up effect during the battle effect of freezes F1 to F5 that have already been described can be cited.

  If the value of the freeze timer becomes zero and the freeze is completed after all cylinder stops (step S513: YES), a “freeze end command” is immediately set (step S514).

  As described above, the operation effect process during the post-freeze effect is exited, thereby ending the freeze effect process after the all-round trunk stop in FIG. 15, and the program proceeds to the process of step S311 in FIG.

  As described above, in the case of a game progress with freezing, after the freeze effect flag is set, based on the fact that all the cylinders stopped via the freeze state, and in the case of a game progress without freezing Based on the fact that all the spinning cylinders have been stopped, the spinning cylinder stopping process in FIG. 11 is completed, and the process proceeds to the next winning determination process (step S20).

<12. Main control timer interrupt processing: FIG. 17>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. The main control timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1.5 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the main control main process.

  In FIG. 17, first, when a timer interrupt occurs, the main control unit 400 performs a saving process for saving a register to a predetermined stack area (step S41).

  Next, port input processing is performed (step S42). In this port input process, detection information from switches and sensors provided in the gaming machine is managed.

  Next, a rotation rotation control process is performed (step S43). In the rotation rotation control process, a pulse signal to be output to the rotation drive motor is generated at the time of rotation start when confirming the rotation state flag or at the time of rotation stop when confirming the stop command flag during stop operation. Management control is used to control the rotation operation, and the current rotation position and speed of the rotating drum are monitored.

  Next, a periodic update process is performed (step S44). In this periodic update process, the timer used for the game operation is updated, and the watchdog timer is periodically cleared. When the periodic update process is not executed, for example, when an abnormality occurs in gaming operation control and the program goes into a runaway state, when the watchdog timer expires, the main CPU 401c is automatically reset to return from the runaway state. To do.

  Next, command output processing is performed (step S45). In this command output process, an effect control command that is set according to the processing state accompanying the progress of the game is transmitted to the effect control unit 410 side (effect control board 420 side). The main control unit 400 outputs an effect control command for one byte for each interruption. Since one effect control command is 2 bytes long, one effect control command is transmitted by two successive timer interruptions.

  Next, medal information output processing is performed (step S46). In this medal information output process, a medal payout signal when a game medal is inserted or a game medal is paid out is output. Each of the above signals is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the external concentration terminal board 310.

  Next, display output processing is performed (step S47). This display output process functions as a game display control means. Here, according to the processing state, the MAX bet LED 84, the stop button LED, various display units formed on the game panel 77 (game start display LED 81, medal insertion) A light emission control signal for controlling the light emission mode, such as the display LED 82, the replay operation LED 83, the inserted number display LED 85, the credit number display 86, the payout number display 87), is output. The information displayed by some or all of the display units can be displayed by displaying the image on the liquid crystal display device 6. In this case, it can be realized by configuring an effect control command including information provided by each display unit to the effect control unit 410 side according to the progress of the game. When this command is transmitted from the main control unit 400 side to the production control unit 410 side, the production control unit 410 side displays and controls the liquid crystal display device 6 based on the information included in the command. Display by image.

  Next, an abnormality monitoring process is performed (step S48). In this abnormality monitoring process, the game operation state is monitored based on the information of the input management process, and an abnormality of the gaming machine (game operation error) is monitored.

  After the processing of steps S41 to S48 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S49 (register restoration processing)), and the interrupt enabled state is set. Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

<Processing on production control side: FIGS. 18 to 23B>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 23B, an effect control process on the effect control unit 410 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the production control unit 410 mainly includes a predetermined main processing (production control side main processing: FIG. 18) and a timer interruption process activated by a scheduled interruption (production control side timer interruption processing: FIG. 19). It is comprised including. The control subject of the effect control unit 410 includes the sub CPU 421c of the effect control board 420 and the CPU of the liquid crystal control board 25, but the effect control board that has received the effect control command from the main control unit 410. Since the 420 (sub CPU 421C) side transmits a liquid crystal control command related to this to the liquid crystal control board 460, the processing procedure performed by the effect control board 420 will be mainly described below. The main body that executes the processing will be described as the effect control unit 410 without distinguishing the function of the control board 460 unless particularly required. The CPU, RAM, and ROM are represented by the sub CPU 421c, the sub RAM 421b, the sub ROM 421a, and the like of the effect control board 420.

(Production control side main process: FIG. 18)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main process (effect control side main process) on the effect control unit side. The effect control unit 410 starts a main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 18 when the gaming machine main body is turned on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the effect control unit 410 (sub CPU) first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as an initial setting process, for example, a command reception interrupt setting, a movable body accessory (not shown) starting point return process, a timer interrupt permission, an initial setting of register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S071 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed at predetermined time intervals as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the effect control unit 410 refers to the main loop update period counter value to determine whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 24) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S072: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the effect control unit 410 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read, and an effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. The effect control command includes a game start information command, a freeze type command, a freeze command, a freeze end command, a freeze operation command, a rotation start command, a stop information reception command, a stop result information command, a winning information command, etc. There is.

  For example, when a game start information command is received and stored in the reception buffer, information included in this command (internal lottery result information (internal winning flag information) and current gaming state (mode) ) Information), one or more types of effect patterns are determined. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an effect element for composing an effect scenario. Next, in order to determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and to appear in the current game The effect scenario data is stored, and the effect scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense. In the case of a player participation type effect, the corresponding part effect is changed according to the operation of the operation means, and the structure of the effect scenario is reconstructed.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. The effect scenario timer is also used in LED data update processing (step S075) and effect actor control data update processing (step S077) described later. Here, the production scenario timer is monitored, and for example, when the time of occurrence of the parts production incorporated in the production scenario comes, the sound data for the speaker 16 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created. Store in the designated area of the sub-RAM. The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for an optical display device such as the decorative lamp unit 13 and the LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the sub RAM. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 19) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 16 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, control data for a driving source (motor) for operating a movable object accessory (not shown) is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 19) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is ended, and the effect soft random number update process of step 079 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

(Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 20)
Next, a command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interruption process is executed with priority over an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 400.

  First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 400 occurs during execution of the main process in FIG. 18, the effect control unit 410 (sub CPU) saves the register contents in the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the sub-RAM (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 400 are received, the command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(Production control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 19)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 19, when the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control unit 410 (sub CPU) saves the register contents in the stack area (step S091), and then performs the effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation or OFF operation) detection signal is input from an effect button (not shown) is monitored, and if it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection is detected. Information is stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 18, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 6 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this stage actor operation management, based on the motor control data for the movable body accessory created in the stage actor control data update process (step S077), the movable body accessory motor (not shown) is passed through the drive control unit. Output a control signal. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory along a production | presentation scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Process: FIGS. 21 to 22>
FIGS. 21 to 22 show processing closely related to the present invention among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 18). Here, effect control commands (game information start command, freeze command (freeze type command, freeze command, freeze end command) related to the start of the game (during operation of the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11), which are closely related to the present invention. Etc.) and the case where an effect control command (for example, a prize information command) related to the all-round cylinder stop is received, will be mainly described, and the description when another effect control command is received will be omitted.

(Production management processing: FIG. 21)
The effect management process shown in FIG. 21 is a part of the processing contents of the received command analysis process (step S073) in FIG. 18, and is executed when a game information start command, a command related to freeze, or the like is received. In FIG. 18, for the sake of convenience of description, in order to avoid duplication, a summary of the processing contents when each command is received is shown, and processing at the time of receiving an individual command corresponding to each command is omitted.

  In FIG. 21, the effect control unit 410 first analyzes a game information start command and a command related to freeze received at the start of the game, and acquires information included in the command (step S611). The “game information start command” includes internal lottery result information (internal winning flag information, winning combination information) and main control unit side gaming state information (RT type information, bonus in-game information). The “freeze type command” includes freeze effect type information, the “freeze command” includes freeze effect start information, and the freeze end command includes freeze effect end information. The effect control unit 410 uses these pieces of information according to the progress state of the effect process. If necessary, the information is stored in the sub RAM 421b, and then read out and used according to the progress state of the effect process.

  In addition, in order to show a target effect in the current game, information regarding the current effect state (effect control unit side game state) is also acquired and used according to the processing state. The effect state information is changed based on a specific effect control command (for example, a game information start command, a winning information command, etc.) from the main control unit 400 side, or according to an effect processing state (AT game transition, etc.) ( Transition control). The performance state is basically managed in a manner that is consistent with the game state on the main control unit side, and is managed so as not to cause a problem in the displayed performance.

  The above-mentioned performance states include various non-AT games, precursor AT games (promotional replay notification precursor AT games), AT1 to AT3 games, RT game types (sometimes inconsistent game states), etc., for specifying the current game state. The production state is included. In the case of the present embodiment, as the production state, information relating to the “RT game” type that is the oil control unit side gaming state is managed so that the gaming state of the entire gaming machine can be identified by the production control unit 410 side. It has become a structure.

  Next, AT game management processing is performed (step S612). In this AT game management process, a process related to the occurrence (transition) of various AT games is performed. The AT game management processing includes, for example, “AT lottery processing” based on the normal AT lottery (promotion replay notification lottery) table (FIG. 27), lottery related to the promotion chance zone (FIG. 31), AT continuous lottery, etc. Various lottery processes relating to the occurrence of AT games are included, and a necessary setting process (AT game start setting process) required for generating an AT game based on each lottery result is included. For example, in the case of winning an AT lottery, setting processing for setting up an advanced replay notification condition (AT lottery winning state) as a preparation setting for transition to a preparatory ART game, or setting an AT game start by an advancement opportunity prize (by promotion replay winning) Preparation ART game (AT1 game) start process, special ART REPLAY (AT2 game) start process by special replay winning), and the like.

  The AT game management process includes a process for monitoring the continuation state of the AT game (AT continuation management process). In the AT continuation management process, for example, an AT game continuation game number management process for monitoring (counting) the number of AT game continuation games (for example, the number of ART continuation game games) at the time of AT game continuation by AT continuation lottery winning Etc. are included. Note that the result of the AT game management process is used in an AT game end management process in step S614 described later.

  Next, a penalty AT game management process is performed (step S613). In this during-penalty AT management process, it is determined whether or not it is in a penalty (penalty state), and if it is in a penalty, it is determined whether or not it is already described as a “penalty exclusion target”. If it is not during the penalty, or if the penalty is excluded even if it is during the penalty, the non-penalty process is performed without doing anything during the penalty game management process.

  In the case of a penalty, a process for giving a predetermined penalty according to the processing state is performed on condition that the penalty is not excluded. For example, when an AT lottery is executed by the AT game management process (step S612), an invalidation process for invalidating the lottery result (processing as a lose even in the win) is performed, and an AT game is generated ( Limit migration). In addition, if an AT game is being played, assist notification and extra game lottery are limited according to the AT game type. In this embodiment, the AT lottery result is treated as invalid. However, when the penalty is in effect (provided that the penalty is not excluded), the AT lottery itself may not be executed. Thereby, the AT lottery may be invalidated. Note that the penalty state (penalty period) is set / released during the penalty monitoring process in FIG.

  Next, AT game end management processing is performed (step S614). In this AT game end management process, it is determined whether or not the AT game end condition is satisfied based on the information managed in the AT continuation management process in step S612. If the AT game end condition is not satisfied, that is, if the AT game is continued, the next game also performs the continuation process for continuing the AT game. If the AT game end condition is satisfied, the end setting process for ending the current AT game is performed. .

  Next, if it is normal (the production state related to the non-AT game (including the penalty)) (step S615: YES), a normal production setting process is performed (step S618). In the normal effect setting process, various effect processes necessary for producing an effect under a normal effect state during a non-AT game are mainly performed. In the effect process here, for example, an effect process (normally freeze effect process) for displaying an effect related to the occurrence of a freeze (sub-freeze effect) and an assist notification (freeze assist notification) appear. Production process (normal assist notification process), production process (normal transition production process) for producing an effect related to the end of an AT game, and other various types for producing an effect related to a normal production state Production process is included. With respect to the production mode that should appear in these processes, the “production scenario (production pattern)” is determined, and the data of the production scenario is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM. As a result, an effect related to the normal game appears.

  In addition, as an effect mode related to the above penalty, as a warning effect, for example, on the liquid crystal screen, the “number of penalty games (can be displayed until the penalty cancellation condition is satisfied)” for notifying the penalty period is displayed, Due to the operation of the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 and / or the operation of the rotating cylinder rotation stop button 12, a sound effect or a light effect different from that during non-penalty (normal time) can be displayed from the speaker 16. . For example, as a warning effect when receiving a “stop information reception command” transmitted at the time of stopping the rotation of the rotating cylinder, a warning sound or a warning light different from the normal time when the rotating rotation stop button 12 is operated, etc. Can appear. In addition, although it was in a state where a penalty was imposed, even if this is a normal production process as an exclusion target and luckily won the AT lottery, in order to alert the player It is preferable to present the warning effect.

  Next, if an AT game is being played (step S616: YES), an AT game effect setting process is performed (step S619). In the AT game effect setting process, various effect processes (including an effect process in an inconsistent gaming state) necessary for producing an effect during an AT game are mainly performed. The effect process here includes, for example, an effect process (freeze effect process during AT) for producing an effect related to the occurrence of a freeze (sub-side freeze effect), an AT game end (for example, an extra special zone (AT3) Effect processing (AT transition effect processing) for presenting an effect relating to (game) end), effect processing (assist assist notification processing during AT) for appearing assist notification corresponding to each AT game, assist notification (freeze) Effect processing (freezing assist notification processing), and various types of effect processing for displaying effects related to the AT game. Regarding the determination and setting of the effect scenario (effect pattern) for the effect mode to appear in these processes, the method of processing is substantially the same as the normal effect setting process in step S616, and the description thereof is omitted. .

  If the performance state does not correspond to the normal state or during the AT game (for example, when the power is turned on or when an error occurs), the other effect state effect setting process is performed as other effect processing (step S617). . Since the other effect state effect setting processing is substantially the same as the normal effect setting processing or the AT game effect setting processing described above, description thereof will be omitted. As a result, the received command analysis process is exited, and the process proceeds to the scenario update process (step S074) in FIG.

  The above-described processes are performed when a command necessary for performing the process is received. For example, if it is a game information start command, a freeze command, a stop input information reception command, a stop result information command, etc., the rendering process required at the start of the game or the stop control of the spinning cylinder can be performed with a winning information command or a payout command, etc. If there is, a necessary presentation process is performed when the game result is derived and displayed.

(Penalty monitoring process: Fig. 22)
The penalty monitoring process shown in FIG. 22 is a part of the received command analysis process (step S073) of FIG. 18, and is executed when a winning information command is received. FIG. 22 focuses on “penalty monitoring processing” that is closely related to the present invention, and omits other processing contents when a winning information command is received.

  In the penalty monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when the “winning information command” transmitted after the game result is derived (after stopping the whole body), it is determined whether the penalty condition is satisfied, If the penalty condition is satisfied, a process for penalizing the next game is performed.

  In FIG. 22, the production control unit 410 first determines a penalty condition (penalty condition) (steps S711 to S713). Here, as the determination, in the current game, (a) whether assist notification is executed (step S711), (b) whether the pressing order is “anomalous pressing” (step S712), (c) It is determined whether it is a penalty exclusion target (step S713). Such information can be grasped in consideration of various information included in the game start information command and the stop information reception command, the processing state of the effect control unit, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the assist notification is not being performed (step S711: NO) and the irregular push is executed (step S712: YES), if the penalty is not excluded (step S713: NO), the penalty condition is satisfied. Then, a penalty setting process is performed (step S714). In other cases, assuming that the penalty condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to the determination process in step S715 without doing anything.

  When it is determined that the penalty condition is satisfied, a setting process necessary for setting the penalty state is performed (step S714: penalty setting process). For example, as a process for determining a penalty period, a predetermined number of penalty games (for example, 10 games) is set. As a result, a penalty is imposed for a predetermined game period from the next game, and processing corresponding to the penalty state (see step S612 in FIG. 21) is performed.

  When the penalty setting process in step 714 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a penalty is in effect (step S715). When the penalty is not in effect (step S715: NO), the received command analysis process is exited and the process proceeds to the scenario update process (step S074) in FIG.

  However, if a penalty is in effect (step S715: YES), then a penalty release condition management process is performed (step S716). In this penalty cancellation condition determination process, it is monitored whether the penalty cancellation condition is satisfied. For example, it is determined whether a predetermined number of penalty games has been consumed. Specifically, whether or not a penalty game is currently being played, that is, the number of penalty games is monitored, and the penalty game number is decremented by 1 in this game, and 1 is subtracted from the penalty game number.

  Next, based on the processing result of the penalty cancellation condition management process, it is determined whether a penalty cancellation condition is satisfied (step S717). Here, it is determined whether or not the number of penalty games after subtraction in step S716 is zero (the number of penalty games = 0). If the number of penalty games is not zero (step S717: NO), the penalty release condition is not satisfied. As established, the process exits the received command analysis process and proceeds to the scenario update process (step S074) in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of penalty games is zero (step S717: YES), it is determined that the penalty release condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the penalty release process of step S718 to release the penalty state. As a result, the effect processing at the normal time (during non-penalty) is executed from the next game.

(Freeze command reception processing: FIG. 23A)
FIG. 23A is a flowchart showing a freeze command reception process when a freeze command is received.

  The freeze command is set in step S204 of FIG. 10 when the freeze effect at the start of the rotation of the spinning cylinder occurs when the freeze at the start of the rotation of the spinning cylinder starts. In addition, when a freeze effect before stopping the full turn cylinder is generated, the freeze that occurs at the start of the full stop stop, that is, the freeze that occurs during the first stop operation is performed during the first stop operation (step S307 in FIG. 11). 13 is set in step S407 in FIG. 13 when passing the freeze-prediction effect process before turning stop for the first time, and the freeze that occurs during the second stop operation is the second stop operation (in step S307 in FIG. 11). 13 is set in step S407 in FIG. 13 (when passing through the all-cylinder stop freeze effect process for the second time). In addition, when a freeze effect is generated after the all-turn cylinder stop, the freeze that occurs at the start of the freeze after the all-turn cylinder stop, that is, the third stop operation, is performed during the third stop operation (in step S310 of FIG. 11). 15 is set in step S454 in FIG. 15 (when passing through the freezing effect processing after all cylinder stops). These freeze commands report the start of the freeze to the effect control unit 410 side.

  In FIG. 23A, when the freeze command is received, the effect control unit 410 generates a sub-effect during freezing (the effect when the freeze is generated on the effect control unit side) triggered by the occurrence of the freeze (step S801).

  If the freeze effect type that is determined when the rotating rotation start lever is operated is for an effect scenario that includes the occurrence of a single freeze (freeze effect flags 01H to 0CH, 10H to 12H), set at step S105 when the freeze starts. Since the freeze type command is present and the freeze start information is obtained from this, the freeze-side sub-side effect can be generated using this freeze type command as a trigger. However, in the case of a production scenario that includes multiple occurrences of freezes (freeze production flags 0DH to 0FH, 13H to 15H), the production control unit 410 can determine any point in time in the scenario only with the freeze type command. It is not possible to grasp until the freeze occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the freeze command for reporting the start time of the freeze is provided. This freeze command is set and transmitted for both the first freeze that occurs when the turning rotation start lever is turned on and the second and third freezes that occur after this in the same freeze production scenario. Therefore, based on the receipt of this freeze command, that is, when each freeze occurs in the scenario as a trigger (basic trigger), it is possible to cause the sub-side effect during the freeze (effect when the freeze occurs) to appear.

(Operation command reception processing during freeze: FIG. 23B)
FIG. 23B is a flowchart illustrating operation command reception processing during freeze when an operation command during freeze is received.

  The operation command during freezing is set and transmitted when a trigger operation is performed during the freeze period that has already occurred (steps S502 and S512).

  Specifically, referring to FIGS. 34 and 35A, for example, in the case of “Freeze B2,” the second stop is performed as an operation (trigger operation) by the operating means during 10 seconds of the freeze period that occurred during the first stop operation. When an operation (cannot be stopped) is performed (here, operation of the rotating cylinder rotation stop button 12), it is set and transmitted.

  Further, for example, in the case of “Freeze B3”, when the third stop operation (cannot be stopped) is performed as a trigger operation within 10 seconds of the freeze period that occurred during the second stop operation (here, the rotation of the rotating cylinder is stopped). Operation of button 12) is set and transmitted.

  For example, in the case of “Freeze B4”, the second stop operation (cannot be stopped) is performed as a trigger operation during 10 seconds of the freeze period that occurred during the first stop operation (here, the rotation of the rotating cylinder is stopped). When the third stop operation (cannot be stopped) is performed as a trigger operation within 10 seconds of the freeze period that occurred during the second stop operation (the operation of the rotation rotation stop button 12 here) ), Each set and transmitted.

  Further, for example, in the case of “Freeze B5”, when a MAX bet operation (invalid) is performed as a trigger operation within 10 seconds of the freeze period that occurred during the third stop operation (here, operation of the MAX bet button 8). , Set and sent.

  In the case of the present embodiment, there may be a player who does not perform a trigger operation during the freeze. Therefore, in order to prompt the trigger operation during the freeze, the effect control unit 410 side steps up at a predetermined timing in the scenario of the freeze effect type, for example, from when the operation during the freeze is performed until the freeze period ends. The above “prompt” that prompts the user to operate predetermined operation means (here, the rotation-rotation stop button 12 or the MAX bet button 8 or the like) at a timing at which a time period during which the performance can be effectively appreciated is secured. "Direction" appears on the LCD screen. The player presses the rotating rotation stop button 12 and the MAX bet button 8 while the prompting effect is appearing.

  For example, in the case of “Freeze B2 (Freeze for 10 seconds after the first stop operation: Middle Freeze)”, the effect when the freeze occurs as the sub-side effect during the freeze during the first stop operation (for example, the first battle effect in which the hero fights the enemy on the ground) Stage) occurs, and the second stop operation (cannot be stopped) is performed as a trigger operation during the production at the time of the occurrence of the freeze, and the production at the time of the operation during the freeze (step SU1 of the step-up production) occurs. This part of the scenario is replaced with the contents of SU1 (for example, an effect in which the main character in the battle takes off clothes).

  For example, in the case of “Freeze B3 (10 second freeze after the second stop operation: middle freeze)”, the effect when the freeze occurs as the sub-side effect during the second stop operation (for example, a battle effect where the hero fights the enemy on the ground) When the first stage) occurs, and the third stop operation (cannot be stopped) is performed as a trigger operation during the production when the freeze occurs, the production during the freeze operation (step-up production SU1) occurs, This part of the scenario is replaced with the contents of SU1 (for example, an effect in which the main character in the battle takes off clothes).

  For example, in the case of “Freeze B5 (10 second freeze after the third stop operation: middle freeze)”, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect when the freeze occurs (for example, a battle effect in which the hero fights the enemy on the ground) The first stage) occurs, and a MAX bet operation (invalid) is performed as a trigger operation during the production when the freeze occurs, so that an operation during the freeze operation (step-up production SU1) occurs. The scenario is replaced with the contents of SU1 (for example, an effect in which the main character in the battle takes off clothes).

  Further, for example, in the case of “Freeze B4 (5 seconds freeze after the first stop operation + 10 seconds freeze after the second stop operation)”, the effect when the freeze occurs as the sub-side effect during the freeze during the first stop operation (for example, The first stage of battle production in which the hero fights against enemies on the ground), and the second stop operation (cannot be stopped) is performed as a trigger operation during the production when the freeze occurs. (Step-up effect SU1) occurs, and this part of the scenario is replaced with the contents of SU1 (for example, an effect in which the main character in the battle takes off clothes). After that, when a freeze occurs during the second stop operation, this part of the scenario is replaced with the next stage (for example, the second stage of the battle production where the hero fights the enemy at sea), and when the freeze occurs When the third stop operation (cannot be stopped) is performed as a trigger operation during the production, the operation during the freeze operation (SU2) occurs, and the scenario of this part is the content of SU2 (for example, the main character in the battle Sounding).

<Specific example 1 (in the case of freeze B4): FIG. 37>
Next, the operation of the freeze effect according to the present embodiment will be described using freeze B4 as a representative example. FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the case of the above-described freeze B4 in FIG. 35A (freeze for 5 seconds after the first stop operation + freeze for 10 seconds after the second stop operation).

(When operating the rotation start lever: Time t0)
When a predetermined number of game medals are actually or pseudo-inserted and the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated (time t0), an internal lottery process (step S16 in FIG. 8) is performed, and the winning information is frozen. If it is a lottery target combination, a freeze effect lottery (step S103) is performed in a reel effect lottery process (step S17 in FIG. 8). At this time, in the case of the freeze B4 in FIG. 35A that is currently handled, the corresponding freeze effect flag “0EH” is set, and then the freeze type command (for freeze B4) is set (steps S104 to S104 in FIG. 9). S105). This freeze B4 is a case that is not the non-rotating spinning effect of the freeze when the lever is on (step S106: NO).

  When the freeze effect flag “0EH” is set, the effect scenario (basic effect scenario) of the freeze effect is determined by the freeze type command. Here, as a basic production scenario, the process related to winning is completed after starting / stopping the normal rotation of all the cylinders from the time when the cylinder rotation starting lever 11 is operated (a period corresponding to one game), and the next game starts. A relatively long production scenario (scenario B4) for the period until the rotating cylinder rotation start lever 11 is operated is taken as an example.

  In this example, since the case where the freeze B4 is won is handled, the freeze effect before stopping all the cylinders belonging to the “trigger classification β + γ” (freeze for 5 seconds after the first stop operation + freeze for 10 seconds after the second stop operation) The freeze effect at the start of rotation of the spinning cylinder belonging to the trigger section α and the freeze effect after the stop of all rotations belonging to the trigger section δ do not occur.

  Subsequently, the rotation rotation start setting process (step S18) of FIG. 10 is entered. In FIG. 10, since freeze B4 is a freeze effect type that does not perform irregular rotation, the determination in step S202 is NO, and irregular rotation start setting processing, freeze command setting, freeze timer setting, and the like (steps S203 to S206) are performed. Without executing, after waiting for the game start wait timer to elapse, 4.1 seconds are set (steps S207 to S209), thereby controlling the time required for the next game start to be at least 4.1 seconds. The Thereafter, the normal rotation start setting process (step S210) is performed, and the entire cylinder rotation is in progress.

(At the time of the first stop operation: time t1)
Subsequent to the above, the process enters the spinning cylinder stop process (S19) in FIG. 11, and when a stop operation (first stop operation) during which the rotary cylinder can be stopped is performed at time t1, the stop preparation data is set and the stop information is received. Command set, symbol stop control process, stop result information command set, etc. are made (steps S301 to S305), and when the stop interval timer becomes zero (step S306: YES), before the first full cylinder stop The freeze effect process (step S308) is entered. Note that because the freeze B4 is not a push order regulation freeze opportunity role, the specific role freeze effect management process in step S307 is not performed.

  In the freeze effect processing before all-turns cylinder stop in FIG. 13, determinations in steps S402 to S404 are performed. Here, since the case of freeze B4 (freeze effect flag type 0EH) is handled, the determination in step S402 (whether or not it is a freeze effect before stopping all cylinders) is YES. In addition, since the first stop operation (first cylinder stop) at time t1 is accompanied by the occurrence of the first freeze, it is a freeze production target stop operation before all cylinder stop, so the determination in step S403 is also YES. Also, since freeze B4 is a freeze with only a delay that does not involve the occurrence of irregular rotation, the determination in step S404 is NO, and the data set for special irregular rotation operation in the freeze rotation setting process before stopping all-turning cylinder (step S405) is obtained. Instead, the freeze timer is set to the first freeze time (5 seconds) for freeze B4 (step S406), and the freeze command for the first freeze for freeze B4 is set (step S407).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 37, the first freeze of freeze B4 is started at time t1, and the first freeze period (5 seconds) in which the original function of the second stop operation is not accepted elapses. On the side of the production control unit 410, the freeze command for the first freeze of the freeze B4 is received, and predetermined production means (speaker 16, LED, liquid crystal display device 6, movable body accessory (not shown)) are used. As a first freeze occurrence effect (sub-freeze effect during freeze), the first stage of battle effect (confrontation effect) in which the hero fights the enemy on the ground is displayed (step S801, see FIG. 37).

(When pressing the second stop button during the first freeze: time t2)
Subsequently, the process proceeds to the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect (step S408 in FIG. 13). In the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect shown in detail in FIG. 14, it is checked whether or not there is a sub-side effect generation target operation as a trigger operation during the freeze (step S501: NO → step S503: NO). If there is a pressing operation of the second stop button (the situation in which the rotation of the second cylinder cannot be stopped because it is frozen), the determination in step S501 is YES, and an operation command during freezing is issued based on the pressing operation. set. That is, the rotation of the second cylinder is not stopped by the pressing operation, but only the operation command during freezing is transmitted to the effect control unit 410 side. Thus, every time the pressing operation is performed, the operation command during freezing is set and transmitted (repetition loop of steps S501 to S503).

  The effect control unit 410 monitors a predetermined time from the time t1 when the first freeze occurs as an “operation command reception valid period” (step S811 in FIG. 23B). This operation command reception valid period is the first half of the first freeze period, and here, starting from the time t1 when the first freeze occurs, the time length that can ensure the SU1 production scale is left. A time width ending at a predetermined timing (in this example, 3 seconds exceeding the front half of 5 seconds) is assigned. If the operation command is generated during the operation command reception valid period, it is effectively received on the side of the effect control unit 410, and it is possible to generate an effect during operation during freezing.

  If a freeze operation command is generated at time t2 within the operation command reception valid period, the effect control unit 410 side causes the effect means to generate an effect during operation during freezing by receiving this (step S812). Here, a step-up effect “SU1” is generated as an operation effect during freezing, in which the main character in the battle emits a sound from the sound device and turns around on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 6. That is, in the stage 1 effect scenario, the scenario at the time t2-t3 is replaced with the contents of SU1 (the effect that the main character in the battle turns around).

  In the case of this specific example, the production control unit 410 side receives the operation command that is first generated during the operation command reception valid period and causes the production means to produce the production operation during the freeze. The operation command being frozen received during the period is treated as invalid even if it is within the operation command acceptance valid period (step S812). In addition, when the pressing operation of the second stop operation button is not performed, the stage 1 effect, which is the effect when the first freeze occurs, continues to flow (the broken line in the figure means this).

(End of first freeze: time t3)
Thereafter, the first freeze period (5 seconds) elapses and time t3 is reached. In FIG. 14, the freeze timer becomes zero (step S503: YES), and the process proceeds to the normal rotation start setting process (step S504). Step S504 relates to processing for setting the control data for returning the irregular rotation to the normal rotation. Therefore, in the case of the freeze B4 that does not perform the irregular rotation, no particular processing is performed, and the process proceeds to the next step S505, and the freeze end command Is set. Thus, the first freeze is completed and the second stop operation can be accepted.

(At the time of the second stop operation: time t4)
In the turning cylinder stop process of FIG. 11, the turning cylinder that has been the subject of the first stop operation has stopped, and all the turning cylinders have not yet been stopped, so the determination in step S309 is NO and the process returns to step S301. When the second stop operation is performed at time t4, a stop preparation data set, a stop information reception command set, a symbol stop control process, a stop result information command set, and the like are performed (steps S301 to S305), and the stop interval timer is set. Waiting for zero (step S306: YES), the process enters the second all-cylinder stop freeze effect process (step S307).

  Since the case of freeze B4 (freeze effect flag type 0EH: trigger category β + γ) is handled in the freeze effect process before all-turns cylinder stop in FIG. 13, the determination in step S402 (whether it is a freeze effect before all-cycles stop) ) Is YES. Further, since the second stop operation (second cylinder stop) at time t4 is accompanied by the occurrence of the second freeze, it is a freeze effect target stop operation before all cylinder stop, so the determination in step S403 is also YES.

  Further, since the freeze B4 is a freeze with only a delay that does not involve the occurrence of irregular rotation, the determination in step S404 is NO, and the process proceeds to step S406 without performing the all-cylinder stop freeze rotation setting process (step S405). Then, the freeze timer is set to the second freeze time (10 seconds) for freeze B4 (step S406), and the freeze command for the second freeze for freeze B4 is set (step S407).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 37, the second freeze of freeze B4 is started at time t4, and the second freeze period (10 seconds) in which the original function of the third stop operation is not accepted elapses. On the side of the production control unit 410, the freeze command for the second freeze of the above-mentioned freeze B4 is received, and the production control unit gives the production means such as a liquid crystal display device or an accessory to the main character as the production when the second freeze occurs. The second stage of the battle effect that fights the enemy in the air appears (step S801, see FIG. 37).

(When pressing the third stop button: time t5)
Subsequently, the process proceeds to the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect of FIG. 13 (step S408). In the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect shown in detail in FIG. 14, if there is a pressing operation of the third stop button as a trigger operation (a situation where the rotation of the third cylinder cannot be stopped because of the freeze), a step The determination in S501 is YES, and the operation command during freezing based on the corresponding pressing operation is set. That is, the rotation of the third cylinder is not stopped by the pressing operation, but the operation command during freezing is transmitted to the effect control unit 410 every time the pressing operation is performed (steps S501 to S503).

  The production control unit 410 side monitors a predetermined time from the time t4 when the second freeze occurs as an “operation command reception valid period” (step S811 in FIG. 23B). This operation command reception valid period is the first half of the second freeze period (10 seconds), as in the case of the first freeze. Here, the operation command reception valid period starts at time t4 when the second freeze occurs. A time width that ends at a predetermined timing that leaves a length of time that can secure a production scale (in this example, 6 seconds exceeding the front half of 10 seconds) is assigned. If it is an operation command during freezing that occurs within this acceptance valid period, it is effectively accepted by the effect control unit 410 side, and an effect during operation during freezing is generated.

  If an operation command during freeze is generated at time t5 within the operation command reception valid period, the effect control unit 410 receives the operation command during freeze operation and causes the effect means to generate an effect during operation (step S812). Here, as the effect during the freeze operation, a step-up effect “SU2” in which the main character in the battle emits a voice and takes off his clothes at the same time is displayed by the sound device and the liquid crystal display device 6. That is, the stage 2 effect scenario is replaced with the scenario at time t5-t6 with the SU2 scenario (effect in which the main character in the battle takes off clothes). This SU2 is configured such that the production mode differs according to the winning expectation degree of the promotion assist notification lottery (AT lottery: FIG. 27). For example, when the protagonist takes off his clothes, an appearance that the lining of the clothes can be seen appears, and according to the lining color (for example, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are highly expected in this order) The winning expectation degree of the promotion assist notification lottery (AT lottery in FIG. 27) is suggested.

  The production control unit 410 receives the operation command during freezing that is first generated during the operation command acceptance valid period of the second freeze, and when the production means produces an operation during operation based on the freeze, The freeze operation command received thereafter is treated as invalid (step S812). If the pressing operation of the third stop operation button is not performed, the stage 2 effect, which is the effect when the second freeze occurs, continues to flow until the MAX bet operation or the rotating rotation start lever operation. (The broken line in the figure means this).

(End of second freeze: time t6)
Thereafter, the second freeze period (10 seconds) elapses and time t6 is reached. In FIG. 14, the freeze timer becomes zero (step S503: YES), and a freeze end command is set (step S505). Thus, the second freeze is completed and the third stop operation can be accepted.

(During the third stop operation: time t7)
Since all the turning cylinders have not been stopped yet, the determination in step S308 of the turning cylinder stopping process in FIG. 11 is NO, and the process returns to step S301. When the third stop operation is performed at time t7, a stop preparation data set, a stop information reception command set, a symbol stop control process, a stop result information command set, and the like are performed (steps S301 to S305), and the stop interval timer is set. When it becomes zero (step S306: YES), all the cylinders are stopped.

  When the stop interval timer becomes zero (step S306: YES), the third all-cylinder stop freeze effect process (step S307) is entered. In FIG. 13, the determination in step S402 is YES and the determination in step S403. NO, do nothing and exit from the all-cylinder stop freeze effect process, return to FIG. 11, and proceed from step S307 to step S308.

  In FIG. 11, when the all-turn cylinder stops, the determination in step S308 is YES, and the process proceeds to the freeze effect processing (FIG. 15) after the all-turn cylinder stop in step S309. However, since freeze B4 is not a freezing effect after stopping the full-time cylinder, the determination in step S452 is NO in FIG. 15, and nothing is done and the freezing effect process is stopped after stopping the full-time cylinder and the process returns to step S309. The flag is cleared (step S310), and the series of processes is terminated.

<Specific example 2 (in the case of freeze B4): FIG. 38>
FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing another operation example in the case of the above-described freeze B4. It differs greatly from the specific example 1 in the operation after the time t4. Below, it demonstrates paying attention to operation | movement after time t4.

(At the time of the second stop operation: time t4)
When the second stop operation (the second cylinder stops) at time t4, as shown in FIG. 38, the second freeze of freeze B4 occurs at time t4, and the original function of the third stop operation is accepted. No second freeze period (10 seconds) is started. On the production control unit 410 side, a freeze command for the second freeze of freeze B4 is received, and a battle in which the main character fights against enemies in the air as production when the second freeze occurs in production means such as a liquid crystal display device or an accessory The second stage of production is displayed (step S801, see FIG. 38).

  As a notification effect for the player for a predetermined time from the occurrence of the second freeze, a “continuous hitting prompting effect” that prompts the corresponding operating means to be repeatedly hit at a timing after this display, for example, “the MAX bet button thereafter The effect of “Let's hit repeatedly!” Appears on the LCD screen along with the sound. In the example of FIG. 38, only the front 2 seconds of the second freeze period (10 seconds) is a continuous strike prompting period by this notification effect. This repeated hitting prompting period (2 seconds) is also an invalid period during which no operation command is accepted.

(Maximum betting operation: time t5)
It is determined that a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) following the continuous hitting prompt period (2 seconds) works as an operation command reception valid period. This is an operation command for receiving, as a trigger operation, a predetermined number of times (for example, one or more times) during freeze operation that occurs when one of the third stop button, the MAX bet, a dedicated effect button, or the like is repeatedly hit. It is a valid reception period. In FIG. 38, the case where the MAX bet is repeatedly hit is handled. If the MAX bet is repeatedly hit for a predetermined number of times (in this example, 3 times) during the operation command acceptance valid period, the generation condition is satisfied at the third time of the predetermined number of times, and the operation effect during the freezing operation SU2 (the main character in the battle is dressed) Production to take off).

  In the specific example of FIG. 38, the effect SU1 during the operation during the freeze continues until the second stop operation at time t4, but may be until the first freeze end time t3. Further, the effect SU2 during the operation during the freeze continues until the lever operation at time t9, but it may be performed until the third stop operation at time t7 or the MAX bet operation at time t8. As in the case of FIG. 37, SU1 is ended at the end of the first freeze t3 and returned to the stage 1 scenario, and SU1 is ended at the end of the second freeze t6 and returned to the stage 2 scenario. Also good.

<Others>
In the above embodiment, among the sub-stage effects during freeze, only one effect during operation during freeze is generated during the freeze period. For example, when the freeze period is long and a sufficient scale can be secured The freeze period is divided into a plurality of sections, a command reception valid period is set for each section, and a plurality or types of effects are generated by generating effects for the operation commands received during that period. You can also. In addition, in the case of freeze production with sound effects (for example, “Ichi”, “Nii”, “Sun”, etc.), the production scale is shorter than when the video is shown, so the freeze period is divided into multiple sections. Even if a command reception valid period is not provided for each, a plurality of operation commands are received within one command reception valid period, and sound effects having the same contents (for example, voices “go!”, “Go!”, “ Go! ”) Or sound effects having different contents (for example, voices“ Ichi ”,“ Nii ”,“ Sun ”, etc.) can be generated, thereby producing an effect with a plurality of types of sounds.

  Moreover, although it is not included in the freeze production lottery table in FIG. 26 in the above embodiment, freezes E1 to E3 can be handled. In these freezes E1 to E3, the freeze occurs three times in total from the first freeze to the third freeze during one game. Therefore, the effect that the main character in the battle looks back during the first freeze (step SU1). ), The effect that the main character in the battle takes off during the second freeze (step SU2), and the effect that the main character in the battle rings the finger during the third freeze (step SU3). Different types of step-up effects can be produced at.

<Effect of embodiment>
In general, a spinning-type gaming machine performs lottery (internal lottery) related to a role in response to a start operation, and starts rotating a plurality of spinning cylinders with various designs of the spinning device. The unit game (one game) is completed by starting and generating a winning according to the combination of symbols at the time of stopping each of the cylinders. During this unit game, winning a winning combination by internal lottery does not immediately confirm the winning. The player is careful to perform the pushing operation carefully, and when the display mode that is the game result of the spinning device is changed to a special display mode determined in advance, the “big bonus game” or “regular bonus game” is not used for the first time. It is controlled to a gaming state advantageous to a player such as an RT (replay time) game in which a winning probability of a bonus game or a replay (replay) combination called “” is a high probability state.

    Furthermore, in recent years, in addition to the basic game played on the main control unit side, it is called an “AT (Assist Time) game” whose generation is controlled on the sub control unit side (production control unit side). It is known that a privilege game advantageous to a player is additionally performed. In this AT game, if a winning combination (lottery) that can win any of multiple types of winning combinations (small roles) with different payouts is won, the winning combination (small) Replays that can be awarded to multiple types of replay roles (for example, promotion opportunities, normal replays, fall opportunities, etc.) that have been reported to assist the player and that are advantageous or unfavorable to the player. When a winning combination (lottery winning combination) is won, assist notification is given of the replay winning combination having a higher degree of advantage to the player in the order of pressing. Therefore, when the AT game and the RT game are overlapped at the same time to become an ART (assist replay time) game, a gaming state that is very advantageous to the player is obtained.

  In this type of swing type gaming machine, various effects that excite the game are performed, and as such effects, freeze effects that pause (delay) the progress of the game are known. This freeze effect is executed at a timing that makes the player expect the transition to the bonus game or ART game.

  Also, when playing a game in a spinning machine, usually the start switch operation of the spinning cylinder (rotary rotation start lever operation) → first stop button operation → second stop button operation → third stop button operation → bet button A series of operations are performed in the order of operations. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which an effect by an animation or sound (an effect controlled by the effect part) is switched for each operation in the series of operations. For example, “Ikuzo!” When operating the start switch, “Ichi” when operating the first stop, “D” when operating the second stop, “Sun” when operating the third stop, “Dar!” When operating the bet button Is known to generate.

  The production is roughly divided into production by the main cylinder controlled by the main control unit (main production during freeze) and production by video, audio, etc. (sub-production during freeze) managed by the sub-control unit (production control unit). . Of these, with regard to the freeze effect performed by video and audio, the freeze time that is started at the time of the third stop operation (medal insertion invalid) is made longer than the time of the freeze effect, and the executed freeze effect may be interrupted. (See Patent Document 1 below).

  However, the above-mentioned patent document 1 determines one trigger point to be used for generating a freeze effect by lottery from trigger points such as a start switch and a stop operation switch of a rotating cylinder. There is.

  The trigger point that is actually used in the unit game is only one trigger point selected by the lottery, and other trigger points that are out of the lottery are not used for generating the freeze effect. For this reason, the types of freeze effects that can be selectively generated in a unit game are limited within the range of the number of types of manual operation switches (not so many) that are mounted on a revolving game machine. The

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of trigger points used for generating the freezing effect in the unit game, and to increase the number of steps and the number of branches in the freezing effect. It is desired to provide a method for realizing a freeze effect so that more production branches can be seen.

  In addition, a normal player performs a series of operations at a fast tempo, such as a start switch operation of the spinning cylinder → first stop operation → second stop operation → third stop operation. Even if the freeze effect occurs, the series of operations are continued if the freeze time elapses. For example, when a freeze effect is generated by a start switch operation, a series of operations of the remaining first stop operation → second stop operation → third stop operation is performed at a good tempo when the freeze time (the first stop operation is invalid) elapses. Will be. If an attempt is made to generate an effect in response to each stop operation, the interval time between operations is too short, so it is necessary to shorten the effect scale to match the interval width. Otherwise, the next stop operation will be performed before the production is completed, and the incomplete production will continue or occur frequently, and the significance of producing the production will be diminished. Therefore, it is desired to provide a method for realizing a freeze effect that can show a predetermined effect carefully until the end.

  Therefore, the present embodiment can be configured as follows.

A spinning device (210) having a plurality of spinning cylinders on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and deriving and displaying a game result by a combination of symbols at the time of stopping each spinning cylinder;
A start switch (11a) for rotating each cylinder under predetermined unit game start conditions;
In response to the start operation of the start switch, a lottery for a plurality of types of winning combinations and a winning lottery means for determining a winning combination (step S16 in FIG. 8, a winning lottery table (FIG. 24));
A plurality of stop switches (rotating cylinder rotation stop buttons 12a, 12b, 12c) provided corresponding to each of the rotating cylinders for individually stopping the rotation of the rotating cylinders;
A stop control means (step S19 in FIG. 8) for controlling the rotation of the rotating cylinder so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be derived and displayed as the game result in response to a stop operation of the stop switch.
Delay state control means for executing and controlling a delay state (freeze state) that delays the game progress from the normal game progress when the start switch and / or the stop switch are operated under a predetermined execution condition (S17 to S19 in FIG. 8, FIGS. 9 to 13 and FIG. 15);
In the delay state, effect execution control means (FIGS. 9 to 13, FIG. 15, effect control unit 410) in the delay state that executes and controls effects related to the game (freeze effect: effect when freeze occurs, effect during operation) ,
A revolving type gaming machine configured to be able to generate a prize according to a game result,
The delay state includes a trigger point triggered by either a start switch operation and / or each stop switch operation as a trigger point at which the delay state can occur, and at one or more predetermined trigger points, the delay state (S17 to S19 in FIG. 8, FIGS. 9 to 16, FIGS. 35A and 35B),
The execution execution control means during the delay state,
During the delay state, based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation-time effect control means (execution effect related to the freeze-time operation effect (for example, FIG. 35A) See), effects by the effect means related to the freeze operation effect (for example, S501 to S502 in FIG. 14, S511 to S512 in FIG. 16, S812 in FIG. 23B),
A rotary-type game machine characterized by comprising:

The delay state includes a plurality of types of delay states,
The delay state production control means,
Based on the start of the delay state by the delay state control means, the delay state occurrence effect control means for executing the delay state occurrence effect (freeze occurrence effect) (for example, FIG. 9 to FIG. 16, FIG. 35A, FIG. 23A S801)
The delay state occurrence production control means,
When a specific delay state is executed by the delay state control means, it can be configured not to execute the effect when the delay state occurs. In this configuration, in the case of a specific delay state, the occurrence of the freeze is concealed from the effect, so that the appearance of the operation effect can be sudden.

  The operation means includes the start switch and each stop switch, and further, the game medium is pseudo-inserted at a time up to the upper limit of the number of bets allowed for one game within the range stored in the credit means. A possible bet button or a production button (not shown) can be included.

In addition, the above-mentioned spinning machine is
When the operation means that can be operated by the player is operated during the delay state, the command means configured to be able to transmit the operation command during freeze including the operation information (the operation effect process during the previous freeze effect shown in FIG. 14). Step S502 of FIG. 16, step S512 of the operation effect processing during the post-freeze effect, FIG. 36),
The effect execution control means during the delay state receives the operation command under a predetermined condition, and controls the appearance effect during the operation (for example, a specific effect during the battle effect, steps SU1 to SU3 of the step-up effect). Operation effect control means (step S812 of the operation command receiving process during freeze in FIG. 23B) can be included.

  Further, the operation-time effect execution control means may be an operation-time effect different from the operation-time effect (for example, a step-up effect, for example, based on the operation of the stop switch during or after execution of the operation-time effect. Steps SU2 to SU3, etc.) can be executed.

  In addition, by using the time difference between the ON operation and the OFF operation of the operation means, it is possible to cause (execute) the effect during the operation during the freeze depending on the ON operation and the OFF operation.

  According to the swivel type gaming machine of this embodiment, the number of trigger timings for generating a freeze in a unit game can be increased, and the number of steps and the number of branches in a freeze effect can be increased. That is, it is possible to flexibly increase the number of freeze steps or the number of freezes generated during a unit game so that more production branches can be seen. Even if the first stop operation and the second stop operation of the rotating cylinder are performed subsequently, if the first stop operation freezes, the second stop operation (cannot be stopped) is being used as a trigger. An effect at the time of operation occurs, and this effect at the time of operation that occurs during the freeze occurs during the freeze. You can show it carefully.

  The present invention is useful for a rotating type game machine that can generate a freeze effect.

1 gaming machine housing,
2 Front door,
3 Display window (rotor viewing part),
3a winning line,
4 Display window (LCD screen viewing area),
5a, 5b, 5c
6 Liquid crystal display device,
6a Display screen (LCD screen),
7 medal slot,
8 MAX bet buttons,
9 1 bet button,
10 Reservation medal settlement button,
11 rotation start lever,
12a, 12b, 12c Revolving rotation stop button,
13 Decorative lamp,
14 Operation panel section
15 Return button,
16 speakers,
17 Decorative panel section,
18 Medal tray
19 Game medal payout exit,
210 Cylinder device,
310 External concentration terminal board,
330 lap trunk relay board,
340 Production I / F board,
340a input buffer circuit,
350 payout relay board,
360 stop switch board,
370 game relay board,
380 LED board,
400 Main control board,
401 microcomputer (main control board side),
401a main ROM,
401b main RAM,
401c main CPU,
401d CTC,
401e interrupt controller circuit;
402 I / O port circuit,
403 counter circuit,
404 I / F circuit,
404a output buffer circuit;
405 I / F circuit,
406 I / F circuit,
407 motor drive circuit,
408 switch input circuit,
420 production control board,
421 microcomputer (production control board side),
421a sub-ROM,
421b sub-RAM,
421c sub CPU,
421d CTC,
421e interrupt controller circuit,
422 I / O port circuit,
423 counter circuit,
430 Cylinder setting board,
450 payout control board,
460 LCD control board,
500 hopper units,
510 hopper motor,
520 Medal payout sensor.

Claims (3)

A game result display means for deriving and displaying a game result by a combination of symbols at the time of stopping each of the cirrus, having a plurality of circadians on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed;
Starting means for rotating each cylinder under predetermined game start conditions;
In response to the starting operation of the starting means, a lottery for a plurality of types of roles is performed, and a winning lottery means for determining a winning combination;
A plurality of stop means provided corresponding to each of the spinning cylinders for individually stopping the rotation of the spinning cylinders;
With the stop operation of the stop means, stop control means for controlling the stop of the spinning cylinder so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be derived and displayed as the game result;
A delay state control means for executing and controlling a delay state for delaying the game progress from the normal game progress based on a predetermined execution condition;
Production means for performing production related to the game,
Production control means for the production means;
With
A revolving type gaming machine configured to be able to give a player a game value according to the game result,
In the role to be a lottery target of the role lottery means,
When the pressing order for operating the plurality of stop means is a predetermined procedure by the stop control means, a first combination of symbols accompanied by the provision of a first predetermined amount of game media is derived and displayed as the game result. On the other hand, when the pressing order is a procedure different from the predetermined procedure, the combination of the second symbols accompanied by the provision of the second predetermined amount of game media can be derived and displayed as the game result. Includes a set push order ruler,
The production control means includes
Assist notification for performing execution control on the effect means for notifying information relating to the pressing order corresponding to the winning combination based on the determination that the pressing order determining combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination lottery unit With control means,
The delay state control means includes
In the case where the pushing order prescribed combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination lottery means, the delay state is executed in the case of the predetermined procedure, while the procedure is different from the predetermined procedure. Do not execute the delay state;
This is a spinning machine. The first symbol combination and the second symbol combination are composed of the same symbol combination,
The first predetermined amount and the second predetermined amount are the same.
The spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: The second predetermined amount is less than the first predetermined amount;
The spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:

Images